Volume 5-2 (B) - ESIA For Pangira

REPUBLIC OF UGANDA
MINISTRY OF WATER AND ENVIRONMENT

INTEGRATED WATER MANAGEMENT AND DEVELOPMENT PROJECT (IWMDP)
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESMENT FOR THE

PROPOSED LARGE SOLAR POWERED PIPED WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
AND SANITATION FACILITIES IN PANGIRA RURAL GROWTH CENTRE,
LAMWO DISTRICT
ENVIRONMENTAL & SOCIAL IMPACT STATEMENT

Prepared for Submission to:
The Executive Director
National Environment Management Authority
P.O. Box 22255, Kampala, UGANDA
in conformity with The Requirements of the National Environment Act, 2019 and
The National Environment (Impact Assessment) Regulations, 2020
Submitted By: Prepared by:
Ministry of water and Environment Pinnacle Enviro Consult

Plot 3-7, Kabalega Crescent Road, Plot 6, Kyambogo View Road, Ministers Village-Ntinda,
P.O Box 20026, Kampala, UGANDA P.O. Box 22546, Kampala, UGANDA
Tel; +25614505942/+256414 505945 Tel; +256-414-340756, Mob; +256-703-333200
AUGUST 2023
Environmental & Social Impact Statement for large solar powered piped water supply & sanitation facilities in Pangira, RGC
E-mail;[email protected] or [email protected] E-mail; [email protected]
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page ii IWMDP-MoWE

DOCUMENT CONTROL
Proponent: MINISTRY OF WATER AND ENVIRONMENT

Integrated Water Management and Development Project (IWMDP)
Project Number: P163782 Contract Number: MWE/CONS/21-22/00019
Document Title: Environment and Social Impact Statement (ESIS), for a Large Solar Powered Piped Water Supply
System and Sanitation Facility project in Pangira Rural Growth Centre in Lokung sub-county, Lamwo District.
Document No: ESIA/0026/2023
Name Title Date; Document Revision

Number;
Authors Dr. Kijobo Paul Musali Team Leader/Environmental Specialist
Dennis Noah Higenyi Sociologist
Isah Kiti Nabide Hydrogeologist
Dr. Bernard Barasa Water/Wastewater Specialist
Percis Namukasa Biodiversity/ Ecology Expert

Vegetation and Flora Specialist
11/04/2023
Dismas Ongwen Archaeologist/Cultural Heritage
John Paul Magaya GIS Specialist
Ann Mary Kirabo Occupational Health and Safety Specialist
Clever Peter Tofayo Air Quality, Noise and Vibrations Specialist
Dr. John O. Kameri Environmental Management
Reviewer Dr. John O. Kameri Project Manager 12/04/2023
Approver Dr. Paul Kijobo Musali Team Leader 13/04/2023
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page iii IWMDP-MoWE

Proponent’s Reviewers
S/No Name Speciality
1.
Martin Akonya Senior Environmental Health Officer
2.
Doreen Namara Principal Sociologist
3.
Edema Maurice Madra Environmental Safeguards Specialist
4.
Kayima Jonan Social Safeguards Specialist
Other contributing specialists
S/No Name Specialty
1. Mildred Nassuna Sociologist
2. Willie Epalitai Socio-Economist
3. Joash Kalogoi Environmental Engineer
4. Frank Mugisha Soil and Water conservation
5. Emmanuel Eteni Environmentalist
6. Mercy Bwire Botanist
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page iv IWMDP-MoWE

CITATION
This report should be cited as follows: Ministry of Water and Environment -Pinnacle Enviro Consult (April 2023):
Environmental and Social Impact Statement for proposed Large Solar powered piped water supply system and
Sanitation facilities in Pangira Rural Growth Centre, Lokung Sub-county, Lamwo District.
COPYRIGHT INFORMATION
This document contains intellectual property and propriety information that is protected by copyright in favour
of Pinnacle Enviro Consult and the specialist consultants. The document should therefore NOT be reproduced,
used or distributed to any third party without the prior written consent of Pinnacle Enviro Consult. This document
is prepared exclusively for submission to Ministry of Water and Environment, and is subject to all confidentiality,
copyright and trade secrets, rules, intellectual property law and practices of Uganda and internationally.
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page v IWMDP-MoWE

KEY ESIA TEAM AND DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE
NEMA CERTIFIED AUDITORS

I Paul Kijobo Musali, declare that I am an independent consultant and have
Dr. Paul Kijobo Musali no business, financial, personal or other interest in the Integrated Water
CC/EIA/115/2023 Management and Development Project (IWMDP), in respect of which I was
appointed to lead the consulting team in undertaking the Environmental and
Team Leader; Social Impact Assessment study for the proposed Large Solar powered
Environmental safeguards, Waste piped water supply system and Sanitation facilities in Gulinya Rural Growth
Management and Pollution Control. Centre in Adjumani District, other than fair remuneration for work performed
in connection with the activity. There are no circumstances that compromise
Report Preparation/ Format and the objectivity of my performing such task.
Quality Control
SIGNATURE:
I John Kameri Ochoko, declare that I am an independent consultant and
Dr. John Kameri Ochoko have no business, financial, personal or other interest in the Integrated
CC/EIA/150/2023 Water Management and Development Project (IWMDP), in respect of which
I was appointed to provide input into the Environmental and Social Impact
Natural Resources Management Assessment study for the proposed Large Solar powered piped water supply
system and Sanitation facilities in Gulinya Rural Growth Centre in Adjumani
Report Preparation/ Format and District, other than fair remuneration for work performed in connection with
Quality Control the activity. There are no circumstances that compromise the objectivity of
my performing such task
SIGNATURE:
Norah Amwewo I Norah Amwewo, declare that I am an independent consultant and have
CC/EIA/281/2023 no business, financial, personal or other interest in the Integrated Water
Management and Development Project (IWMDP), in respect of which I was
Sociologist appointed to provide input into the Environmental and Social Impact
Assessment study for the proposed Large Solar powered piped water supply
system and Sanitation facilities in Gulinya Rural Growth Centre in Adjumani
District, other than fair remuneration for work performed in connection with
the activity. There are no circumstances that compromise the objectivity of
my performing such task.
SIGNATURE:
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page vi IWMDP-MoWE

Percis Namukasa I Percis Namukasa, declare that I am an independent consultant and have
Biodiversity Specialist appointed to provide input into the Environmental and Social Impact
Flora and Fauna system and Sanitation facilities in Gulinya Rural Growth Centre in Adjumani
District, other than fair remuneration for work performed in connection with
SIGNATURE:
Dismas Ongwen I Dismas Ongwen, declare that I am an independent consultant and have
Archaeologist appointed to provide input into the Environmental and Social Impact
Archaeological, Cultural and Historical system and Sanitation facilities in Gulinya Rural Growth Centre in Adjumani
heritage concerns. District, other than fair remuneration for work performed in connection with
SIGNATURE:
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page vii IWMDP-MoWE

CONSULTING FIRM DECLARATION

This report on the Environmental and Social Impact Assessment study for Large Solar powered piped water supply
system and Sanitation facilities in Pangira Rural Growth Centre, Lokung Sub county Lamwo District was prepared
by a team from Pinnacle Enviro Consult and other associate experts under the auspices of Pinnacle Enviro
Consult.
The report has been prepared with reasonable skills, care, and diligence in accordance with The National
Environment Act, 2019, The National Environment (Environment and Social Assessment) Regulations, 2020 and
WB Environmental and Social Safeguard Policies.
I the undersigned, on behalf of Pinnacle Enviro Consult, certify that the information and given particulars presented
in this report are correct to the best of my knowledge.
John Kameri Ochoko (Ph.D)

Chief Executive Officer/MD
Pinnacle Enviro Consult
P.O. Box 22546, Kampala.
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page viii IWMDP-MoWE

DECLARATION BY DEVELOPER
I Eng. Olweny Lamu on behalf of Ministry of Water and Environment, confirm that we have read and understood
the contents of Environmental and Social Impact Statement and we agree to undertake all the recommendations
and all aspects of monitoring in order to protect the environment from any form of pollution, social-unrest and
degradation resulting from for the proposed Large Solar powered piped water supply system and Sanitation facilities
in Pangira Rural Growth Centre, Lamwo District, and its related operations.
Signed on;
____________________________________________
Date: ………………………..
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page ix IWMDP-MoWE

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DOCUMENT CONTROL ............................................................................................................................................................................. iii
CITATION ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... v
KEY ESIA TEAM AND DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE ................................................................................................................. vi
CONSULTING FIRM DECLARATION ...................................................................................................................................................... viii
DECLARATION BY DEVELOPER.............................................................................................................................................................. ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................................................................................................... x
LIST OF FIGURES .................................................................................................................................................................................... xvi
LIST OF TABLES ..................................................................................................................................................................................... xvii
LIST OF ACRONYMS ............................................................................................................................................................................... xix
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................................................................ xx
1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Background.............................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Overview of the Proposed Pangira (RGC) Water Supply System and Sanitation Facilities ............................................. 1
1.2.1 Water Supply System ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2.2 Sanitation Facilities ............................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Project Objectives ................................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3.1 Specific Objective ................................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.4 The need for Environmental Impact Assessment ................................................................................................................ 2
1.5 Objectives of the ESIA ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
1.6 Structure of the ESIA Report .................................................................................................................................................. 3
2 THE PROJECT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Project Proponent and Cost estimates ................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.1 Proponent and Contacts: ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1.2 Estimated Project Cost ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Project Location ...................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 Project area of influence ....................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3 Water demand in the project area .......................................................................................................................................... 7
2.4 Proposed Water Supply .......................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1 Water Source ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8
2.4.2 Water Treatment Process ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.4.3 Structures at the Pump House .............................................................................................................................................. 9
2.4.4 Borehole Pump and Pumping Transmission Mains .............................................................................................................. 9
2.4.5 Treated Water Pump Mains ................................................................................................................................................ 11
2.4.1 Water office block ............................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.4.2 Energy and Power Provisions ............................................................................................................................................. 16
2.4.3 Storage Reservoir ............................................................................................................................................................... 16
2.4.4 Distribution Network ............................................................................................................................................................ 17
2.4.5 Disinfection Facilities .......................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.4.6 Access roads ...................................................................................................................................................................... 19
2.4.7 Transmission and Distribution Network .............................................................................................................................. 19
2.4.8 Power supply ...................................................................................................................................................................... 20
2.5 Sanitation ............................................................................................................................................................................... 21
2.5.1 Individual Household Facilities ........................................................................................................................................... 21
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page x IWMDP-MoWE

2.5.2 Design of Public and Institutional Toilets ............................................................................................................................ 21

2.5.3 Toilets in Public Places ....................................................................................................................................................... 23
2.6 Auxiliary facilities .................................................................................................................................................................. 23
2.6.1 Camp sites .......................................................................................................................................................................... 23
2.6.2 Key equipment and materials sources ................................................................................................................................ 23
2.6.3 Waste handling and disposal .............................................................................................................................................. 24
2.7 Project management ............................................................................................................................................................. 24
2.7.1 Labour force ........................................................................................................................................................................ 24
3 ENVIORNMENT AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY .................................................................................. 25
3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................ 25
3.2 General Approach ................................................................................................................................................................. 25
3.3 Scoping study ........................................................................................................................................................................ 26
3.3.1 Terms of Reference ............................................................................................................................................................ 26
3.4 Methodology .......................................................................................................................................................................... 27
3.4.1 Document Review ............................................................................................................................................................... 27
3.4.2 Socio-economic Survey ...................................................................................................................................................... 28
3.4.3 Biodiversity Assessment-Fauna ......................................................................................................................................... 33
3.5 Impact identification and analysis ....................................................................................................................................... 38
3.5.1 Determining Impact Significance ........................................................................................................................................ 38
4 POLICY, LEGAL AND REGULATORY FRAMEWORK REVIEW ................................................................................................... 42
4.1 National Legislation and Regulations ................................................................................................................................. 42
4.1.1 Policies and Plans applicable to the Project ....................................................................................................................... 42
4.1.2 Laws applicable to the proposed project ............................................................................................................................ 46
4.1.3 Regulations and Standards applicable to the proposed project ......................................................................................... 50
4.2 Requisite Permits, Licenses and Authorizations ............................................................................................................... 52
4.3 International Agreements, Protocols, Conventions and Others ....................................................................................... 55
4.3.1 The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD): .................................................................................................................. 55
4.3.2 The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (CITES): .................................. 55
4.3.3 The Ramsar Convention on Wetlands, 1971: ..................................................................................................................... 55
4.3.4 United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), 1992 .................................................................. 55
4.3.5 Strategic Approach to International Chemicals Management (SAICM) .............................................................................. 55
4.4 World Bank Operational Policies (OPS) .............................................................................................................................. 56
4.5 World Bank EHS guidelines ................................................................................................................................................. 57
4.5.1 WBG EHS Guidelines: water and sanitation ....................................................................................................................... 57
4.5.2 WBG EHS Guidelines: Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality .......................................................................................... 58
4.5.3 WBG EHS Guidelines: Waste Management ....................................................................................................................... 59
4.5.4 WBG EHS Guidelines: Hazardous Materials Management ................................................................................................ 59
4.5.5 WBG EHS Guidelines: Construction and Decommissioning .............................................................................................. 59
4.6 Gap Analysis between World Bank Safeguards Policies and Uganda’s Environmental and Social requirements (as
adopted and updated from the IWMDP ESMF (2018) and UCSAP ESMF (2022) ............................................................................ 60
4.7 Institutional Framework ........................................................................................................................................................ 68
4.7.1 Ministry of Water and Environment (MWE) ........................................................................................................................ 68
4.7.2 National Environment Management Authority .................................................................................................................... 68
4.7.3 Ministry of Lands, Housing and Urban Development ......................................................................................................... 68
4.7.4 Ministry of Gender Labour and Social Development .......................................................................................................... 69
4.7.5 Uganda Wildlife Authority ................................................................................................................................................... 69
4.7.6 Department of Museums and Monuments (Ministry of Trade, Tourism & industry) ........................................................... 69
4.7.7 Ministry of Works /Uganda National Roads Authority ......................................................................................................... 69
4.7.8 Lamwo District Local Government ...................................................................................................................................... 69
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xi IWMDP-MoWE

5 BIOPHYSICAL AND SOCIO-ECONOMIC BASELINE .................................................................................................................... 71

5.1 Physical Environment ........................................................................................................................................................... 71
5.1.1 Topography......................................................................................................................................................................... 71
5.1.2 Geology and Soils ............................................................................................................................................................... 72
5.1.3 Climate ................................................................................................................................................................................ 75
5.1.4 Air Quality ........................................................................................................................................................................... 81
5.1.5 Noise baseline condition ..................................................................................................................................................... 83
5.2 Biological Environment ........................................................................................................................................................ 84
5.2.1 Land Cover/Land Use ......................................................................................................................................................... 84
5.2.2 Vegetation Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 85
5.2.3 Fauna .................................................................................................................................................................................. 88
5.3 Socio-Economic .................................................................................................................................................................... 94
5.3.1 Location .............................................................................................................................................................................. 94
5.3.2 Population and Demographics ............................................................................................................................................ 96
5.3.3 Household Access to Income and Utilisation .................................................................................................................... 101
5.3.4 Possession of Specialised Skills and Technical Training ................................................................................................. 104
5.3.5 Practice of Keeping Records ............................................................................................................................................ 105
5.3.6 Financial Services and Credit Utilisation .......................................................................................................................... 105
5.3.7 Ownership of Physical Assets .......................................................................................................................................... 105
5.3.8 Dwelling Ownership and Physical Condition .................................................................................................................... 106
5.3.9 Household and Community Gender Dynamics ................................................................................................................. 107
5.3.10 Sources Energy and Purpose ...................................................................................................................................... 108
5.3.11 Access to Land, Land Tenure, Ownership and Land Use ........................................................................................... 109
5.3.12 Natural Resources Access ........................................................................................................................................... 111
5.3.13 Access to Water and Utilisation of Water ..................................................................................................................... 111
5.3.14 Household Sanitation, Hygiene and Disease Burden .................................................................................................. 116
5.3.15 Access to social services ............................................................................................................................................. 118
5.3.16 Land Take and Acquisition ........................................................................................................................................... 120
5.3.17 Physical Cultural Resources (PCR) ............................................................................................................................. 123
6 STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION AND PROJECT DISCLOSURE ............................................................................................ 128
6.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................................................... 128
6.2 Objectives of Stakeholder Engagement, Consultation, and Participation ..................................................................... 128
6.2.1 Aim of stakeholder engagement ....................................................................................................................................... 128
6.2.2 Specific objectives ............................................................................................................................................................ 128
6.3 Principles for Effective Stakeholder Engagement ........................................................................................................... 129
6.4 Stakeholder Engagement Plan ........................................................................................................................................... 129
6.5 Standards for Consultation ................................................................................................................................................ 131
6.6 Issues, Concerns and Recommendations raised ............................................................................................................. 132
6.6.1 National Level Consultations ............................................................................................................................................ 132
6.6.2 Consultation with Lamwo District Authorities .................................................................................................................... 135
6.6.3 Consultations with Lokung Sub-County ............................................................................................................................ 136
7 IDENTIFICATION AND ANALYSIS OF PROJECT ALTERNATIVES ........................................................................................... 143
7.1 Water Source Alternatives .................................................................................................................................................. 143
7.1.1 Surface Water source ....................................................................................................................................................... 143
7.1.2 Ground water source ........................................................................................................................................................ 143
7.2 Alternative Power Supply Analysis ................................................................................................................................... 143
7.2.1 Option 1 - HEP Supplementary Option ............................................................................................................................. 143
7.2.2 Option 2 - Generator Power Supplementary Option ......................................................................................................... 144
7.2.3 Power Option Comparison ................................................................................................................................................ 144
7.3 Alternative Assessment for Sanitation Facilities ............................................................................................................. 145
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xii IWMDP-MoWE

7.3.1 Central Sewerage System ................................................................................................................................................ 145

7.3.2 On-Site Sanitation Systems .............................................................................................................................................. 145
7.4 No Project Alternative ......................................................................................................................................................... 145
8 ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIAL IMPACT ANALYSIS, MITIGATION AND ENHANCEMENT MEASURES .................................. 147
8.1 Pre-construction Phase Positive Impacts ......................................................................................................................... 148
8.1.1 Building Community Cohesion and Positive Exposure to Development Actions .............................................................. 148
8.1.2 Employment ...................................................................................................................................................................... 148
8.2 Pre-Construction Phase Negative Impacts ....................................................................................................................... 148
8.2.1 Community Anxiety ........................................................................................................................................................... 148
8.3 Construction Phase Positive Impacts ............................................................................................................................... 149
8.3.1 Employment Engagement for Local Labour ..................................................................................................................... 149
8.3.2 Skills and Technology Transfer. ....................................................................................................................................... 149
8.3.3 Short-term business opportunities for women .................................................................................................................. 150
8.4 Construction Phase Negative Impacts .............................................................................................................................. 150
8.4.1 Expropriation of land and Demolition of Properties thereon ............................................................................................. 150
8.4.2 Loss of Vegetation Cover and Habitat for Wildlife ............................................................................................................ 151
8.4.3 Introduction of Invasive Plant Species .............................................................................................................................. 152
8.4.4 Increased Runoff and Soil Erosion ................................................................................................................................... 153
8.4.5 Generation of Construction Waste .................................................................................................................................... 154
8.4.6 Haulage of Construction Materials .................................................................................................................................... 156
8.4.7 Noise and Vibrations ......................................................................................................................................................... 157
8.4.8 Air Pollution ....................................................................................................................................................................... 158
8.4.9 Public Health and Safety Impacts ..................................................................................................................................... 159
8.4.10 Sexual and Gender Based Violence (SGBV)............................................................................................................... 160
8.4.11 Impacts on Violence Against Children (VAC) .............................................................................................................. 161
8.4.12 Impacts on Cultural Heritage ....................................................................................................................................... 161
8.4.13 Occupational Health and Safety Risks ......................................................................................................................... 162
8.5 Operation and Maintenance Phase Positive Impacts ...................................................................................................... 165
8.5.1 Improved Access to Safe Water ....................................................................................................................................... 165
8.5.2 Labour and Time Saving ................................................................................................................................................... 166
8.5.3 Improved Community Health ............................................................................................................................................ 166
8.5.4 Improved Gender Benefits. ............................................................................................................................................... 167
8.5.5 Increased enrolment and Improved Attendance in Education Institutions ........................................................................ 168
8.6 Operation and Maintenance Phase Negative Impacts ..................................................................................................... 168
8.6.1 Impacts on Underground Water Resources ..................................................................................................................... 168
8.6.2 Disposal of Sludge from Sanitary Facilities ...................................................................................................................... 169
8.6.3 Unhygienic and Poor use leading to Spread of Communicable Diseases ........................................................................ 170
8.6.4 Impact on Household Incomes and Gender challenges ................................................................................................... 170
8.7 Cumulative Impacts............................................................................................................................................................. 173
8.7.1 Valued Environment and Social Components .................................................................................................................. 173
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING PLAN .......................................................................... 174
9.1 Phases of Implementation .................................................................................................................................................. 174
9.2 Integration of Safeguards into Contracts .......................................................................................................................... 174
9.2.1 Bill of Quantities ................................................................................................................................................................ 174
9.2.2 Procurement of the Contractor ......................................................................................................................................... 174
9.2.3 Staffing .............................................................................................................................................................................. 175
9.2.4 ESMP Monitoring and Reporting ...................................................................................................................................... 175
9.2.5 Decommissioning and Restoration of Disturbed Areas .................................................................................................... 175
9.3 Contractor Management Plans........................................................................................................................................... 175
9.3.1 Labour Force Management Plan ...................................................................................................................................... 176
9.3.2 Quality Management Plan ................................................................................................................................................ 176
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xiii IWMDP-MoWE

9.3.3 Runoff and Erosion Control Plan ...................................................................................................................................... 176

9.3.4 Waste Management Plan ................................................................................................................................................. 177
9.3.5 Occupational Health and Safety Plan ............................................................................................................................... 177
9.3.6 Handling of Chemicals and Other Potentially Harmful Materials ...................................................................................... 178
9.3.7 Emergency Response Plan .............................................................................................................................................. 179
9.3.8 Security Management Plan ............................................................................................................................................... 180
9.3.9 Community Health and Safety Plan .................................................................................................................................. 180
9.3.10 Stakeholder Communications and Engagement Plan (SEP) ........................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
9.3.11 HIV/AIDS Management Plan ....................................................................................................................................... 180
9.3.12 Child Protection and Management Plan ...................................................................................................................... 180
9.3.13 Archaeological and Cultural heritage resource reporting plan ..................................................................................... 181
9.3.14 Decommissioning/ Site Restoration Plan ..................................................................................................................... 183
9.3.15 Stakeholder Engagement Plan .................................................................................................................................... 184
9.3.16 Costed Environmental and Social Mitigation Plan Matrix ............................................................................................ 188
9.4 Environmental and Social Monitoring Programme .......................................................................................................... 214
9.4.1 Rationale for Monitoring .................................................................................................................................................... 214
9.4.2 Scope of Environmental and Social Monitoring ................................................................................................................ 214
9.4.3 Monitoring Activities and Processes ................................................................................................................................. 214
9.4.4 Environmental and Social Management Plan Reviews .................................................................................................... 217
9.4.5 Environmental and Social Compliance Audit .................................................................................................................... 217
9.4.6 Approval of the ESMP Activities ....................................................................................................................................... 218
9.4.7 Enforcement of Compliance ............................................................................................................................................. 218
9.5 Operation Phase Monitoring .............................................................................................................................................. 218
9.5.1 Water Supply Plan ............................................................................................................................................................ 218
9.5.2 Monitoring operational sanitation Facilities ....................................................................................................................... 218
9.6 Roles and Responsibilities in ESMP Implementation ...................................................................................................... 219
9.6.1 Role of Supervising Consultant ........................................................................................................................................ 220
9.6.2 Roles of Contractor During Project Implementation ......................................................................................................... 220
9.6.3 Key Human Resource Requirement for ESMP Implementation ....................................................................................... 221
9.7 Capacity Building ................................................................................................................................................................ 222
9.8 Grievance Redress Mechanism ......................................................................................................................................... 222
9.8.1 Worker’s Grievance Redress Mechanism ........................................................................................................................ 223
9.8.2 Grievance management structure .................................................................................................................................... 227
9.8.3 The World Bank’s Grievance Redress Service (GRS) ..................................................................................................... 232
10 KEY RECOMMENDATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS ................................................................................................................. 235
10.1 Conclusions ......................................................................................................................................................................... 235
10.2 Recommendations .............................................................................................................................................................. 236
REFERENCES ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 237
APPENDICES........................................................................................................................................................................................... 239
Appendix 1; NEMA Approval of ToR ................................................................................................................................................ 239
Appendix 2: Project Layout drawings .............................................................................................................................................. 242
Appendix 3: Water Supply Design Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 243
Appendix 4: Equipment and Materials ............................................................................................................................................. 244
Appendix 5: Water Quality Test Certificates ................................................................................................................................... 245
Appendix 6: Flora species encountered in the assessment .......................................................................................................... 247
Appendix 7: Avifauna Species List .................................................................................................................................................. 250
Appendix 8: Record of stakeholder engagement ........................................................................................................................... 252
Appendix 9: Land ownership documents ........................................................................................................................................ 265
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xiv IWMDP-MoWE

Appendix 10; Project Valuation certificate ...................................................................................................................................... 265

Appendix 11: Receipt of 30% Administration fee on submission of the ESIS ............................................................................. 266
Appendix 12: GRM FORMS ............................................................................................................................................................... 267
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xv IWMDP-MoWE

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2.1: Map showing the location of the Proposed Project area in Pangira, Lamwo Districts. ............................................................... 6
Figure 2.2: Spatial locations of the major components of the project in Pangira, Lamwo Districts. .............................................................. 7
Figure 2.4: Project Water Source Sites ........................................................................................................................................................ 8
Figure 2.5: Water Treatment Process. .......................................................................................................................................................... 9
Figure 2.6: Proposed site for storage reservoir at Latida village, Pawor Parish ......................................................................................... 16
Figure 2.7: Proposed Water Supply Schematics ........................................................................................................................................ 18
Figure 2.8: Access roads to the two different boreholes in Pangira RGC................................................................................................... 19
Figure 2.9: The transmission and targeted distribution mains within Pangira RGC .................................................................................... 20
Figure 2.10: VIP School Toilet for Boys ...................................................................................................................................................... 22
Figure 2.11: VIP School Toilet for Girls....................................................................................................................................................... 22
Figure 2.12:: VIP School Toilet for Staff...................................................................................................................................................... 22
Figure 2.13: Layout of public toilet at Pangira RGC.................................................................................................................................... 23
Figure 3.1: Summary of EIA process in Uganda (Source: NEMA, 2020) ................................................................................................... 25
Figure 3.2: A= Consultations at Lokung Sub County HQs, B= Consultations meeting in Pagada 1 village ............................................... 30
Figure 3.3: Archaeological survey and examining of the grinding hollows in Pagada 1 ............................................................................. 31
Figure 3.4: A recent pit excavation examined for archaeological strata in Pagada 2 village ...................................................................... 32
Figure 3.5: Biodiversity Sampling Points overlaid on google map of Pangira project area ......................................................................... 34
Figure 5.1: Map of Pangira RGC showing the Topography ........................................................................................................................ 71
Figure 5.2: Pictures showing topography of the Project Area ..................................................................................................................... 72
Figure 5.3: Maps of Pangira showing the Geology and Soil types ............................................................................................................. 73
Figure 5.4: Average Monthly Rainfall for Lamwo ........................................................................................................................................ 76
Figure 5.5: Mean Minimum and Maximum Temperatures for Lamwo ........................................................................................................ 76
Figure 5.6: Hours of Day and Twilight......................................................................................................................................................... 77
Figure 5.7: Humidity for Lamwo .................................................................................................................................................................. 77
Figure 5.8: Average Incident Shortwave Solar Energy for Lamwo ............................................................................................................. 78
Figure 5.9: Plant-Life Composition of the Project Area ............................................................................................................................... 86
Figure 5.10: Shows the general Species Distribution within the project area ............................................................................................. 89
Figure 5.11: Images of Herptiles encountered in the Field ......................................................................................................................... 92
Figure 5.12: Map of layout of the proposed infrastructure system for Pangira RGC. ................................................................................. 95
Figure 5.13: Population density (people/km2) of the project area ............................................................................................................... 96
Figure 5.14: Population density (people/km2) of the project area .............................................................................................................. 97
Figure 5.15: Percentage of migrants by number of years lived in the project area..................................................................................... 97
Figure 5.16: Percentage of respondents by household size ....................................................................................................................... 99
: Figure 5.17: Population pyramid of the project area by gender. Source UBOS 2014 ............................................................................ 100
Figure 5.18: Percentage of responses by social networks in the project area......................................................................................... 108
Figure 5.19: Percentage of respondents by type and number of livestock owned ................................................................................... 111
Figure 5.20: Factors leading to the non-functionality of water sources in Lamwo District ........................................................................ 112
Figure 5.21: Household use of water per day ........................................................................................................................................... 115
Figure 5.22: Response by water quality rating in the project area ............................................................................................................ 115
Figure 5.23: Percentage of response by problems associated with the water sources ............................................................................ 116
Figure 5.24: Percentage of diseases affecting the district ........................................................................................................................ 118
Figure 5.25: Percentage of responses by problems affecting access to healthcare services .................................................................. 119
Figure 5.26: 1st Borehole in Pangira at coordinates E 463596 398748N .................................................................................................. 120
Figure 5.27: The proposed storage site for Pangira at coordinates E464 443 N 400410 ......................................................................... 121
Figure 5.28: Test pit excavation in Pagada 1............................................................................................................................................ 123
Figure 6.1: Group picture (MWE staff & Consulting Team) after meeting the Lamwo District team led by CAO (in necktie) ................... 136
Figure 6.2: Consultative meeting with Pangira community members ....................................................................................................... 140
Figure 6.3: The Charmian Lokung SC introducing the consulting team to the community members ....................................................... 141
Figure 9.1: Workers’ grievance management process flow chart ............................................................................................................ 228
Figure 9.2: Community grievance management process flow chart ......................................................................................................... 233
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xvi IWMDP-MoWE

LIST OF TABLES
Table 1.1: ESIA Report Structure ................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Table 2.1: Summary of Demand Calculations .............................................................................................................................................. 8
Table 2.2: Details of water sources .............................................................................................................................................................. 8
Table 2.3: Raw Water Pump Details ............................................................................................................................................................. 9
Table 2.4: Raw and Clear Water Pumping Main Details............................................................................................................................. 11
Table 2.5: Reservoir Storage Capacity ....................................................................................................................................................... 16
Table 2.6: Pangira Distribution Mains ......................................................................................................................................................... 20
Table 2.7: Summary of School Toilet Design .............................................................................................................................................. 21
Table 3.1: Aspects highlighted by NEMA for consideration ........................................................................................................................ 26
Table 3.2: Biodiversity Sampling Points ..................................................................................................................................................... 33
Table 3.3: Categories of birds according to their IUCN status and habitat requirements ........................................................................... 35
Table 3.4: Rating of extent of impacts ........................................................................................................................................................ 38
Table 3.5: Rating impact duration ............................................................................................................................................................... 39
Table 3.6: Rating Impact Magnitude ........................................................................................................................................................... 39
Table 3.7: Impact Rating for level of risk or impact ..................................................................................................................................... 39
Table 4.1: Summary of policies and plans applicable to the proposed project. .......................................................................................... 42
Table 4.2: Summary of laws applicable to the proposed project ................................................................................................................ 46
Table 4.3: Summary of regulations and standards applicable to the proposed project .............................................................................. 50
Table 4.4: Requisite Permits and Authorizations during Construction ........................................................................................................ 52
Table 4.7: Summary of how the planned project activities trigger WB OPs................................................................................................ 56
Table 4.5: Summary of Gap Analysis between Uganda and World Bank Safeguards ............................................................................... 62
Table 4.6: Gaps between World Bank and Ugandan legislation applicable to OP 4.12 Involuntary Resettlement .................................... 63
Table 5.1: Test Results of Water Samples from the Two New Borehole .................................................................................................... 80
Table 5.2: Summary of Baseline Particulate Matter Readings for Pangira RGC ........................................................................................ 81
Table 5.3: Summary of Baseline Gas Emissions Readings for Pangira RGC ............................................................................................ 82
Table 5.4: Summary of noise results at measured receptors ..................................................................................................................... 83
Table 5.5: Distribution of Plant Species ...................................................................................................................................................... 86
Table 5.6: Avifauna species Distribution along the survey sites. ................................................................................................................ 89
Table 5.7: Hepertile species within the study area ..................................................................................................................................... 92
Table 5.8: Administrative Units in the Project Area ..................................................................................................................................... 95
Table 5.9 Project area population projections............................................................................................................................................. 96
Table 5.10: Percentage of respondents by highest level of education ..................................................................................................... 100
Table 5.11: Percentage of respondents by sources of household income ............................................................................................... 101
Table 5.12: Average monthly income earned by economic activity .......................................................................................................... 102
Table 5.13: Percentage of respondents by size of household income ..................................................................................................... 102
Table 5.14: Percentage of respondents by household expenditure items ................................................................................................ 103
Table 5.15: Percentage of respondents by monthly amount spent on an item ......................................................................................... 103
Table 5.16: Percentage of respondents by amount of money spent per month ....................................................................................... 104
Table 5.17: Percentage of respondents by self-employment activities and income generated ................................................................ 104
Table 5.18: Percentage of respondents by specialised skills possessed ................................................................................................. 105
Table 5.19: Percentage of respondents by physical assets owned .......................................................................................................... 106
Table 5.20: Percentage of respondents by condition of dwelling owned .................................................................................................. 106
Table 5.21: Percentage of responses by intra-household division of labour ............................................................................................ 107
Table 5.22: Percentage of responses by source of household energy and purpose ................................................................................ 108
Table 5.23: Percentage of responses by type of land tenure ................................................................................................................... 110
Table 5.24: Summary of point water sources by Sub County with a focus on Lokung Sub-County ......................................................... 112
Table 5.25: Number of water sources and distance to the source as of 30 th June 2020 .......................................................................... 114
Table 5.26: Percentage of responses by diseases suffered by household members............................................................................... 117
Table 5.27: Number of responses by reasons for not seeking health services ........................................................................................ 119
Table 5.28 School in the project area of Pangira RGC ............................................................................................................................. 120
Table 5.29: Showing detailed identified Cultural heritage resources ........................................................................................................ 125
Table 5.30: Summary of Baseline Cultural Heritage Sites recorded......................................................................................................... 127
Table 6.1: Summary of the Stakeholder Consultation Process ................................................................................................................ 130
Table 6.2: Consultations with Lokung Sub-County ................................................................................................................................... 136
Table 7.1: Option 1- Power Consumption Costs ....................................................................................................................................... 144
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xvii IWMDP-MoWE

Table 7.2: Option 2- Power Consumption Costs ....................................................................................................................................... 144

Table 7.3: Power Option Comparison ....................................................................................................................................................... 144
Table 9.1: Archaeological and Cultural Resource reporting plan.............................................................................................................. 182
Table 9.2: Stakeholder mapping (Interest, Power & Influence Grid)......................................................................................................... 186
Table 9.3: Environmental and Social Mitigation Plan Matrix ..................................................................................................................... 188
Table 9.5: Institutions Mandates on the Project ........................................................................................................................................ 219
Table 9.6: Key Human Resource Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 221
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xviii IWMDP-MoWE

LIST OF ACRONYMS
AIDS Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome
EHS Environment Health and Safety
ESIA Environmental and Social Impact Assessment
ESMP Environmental and Social Management Plan
FDG Focus Group Discussions
GBV Gender Based Violence
GRC Grievance Redress Committee
GRM Grievance Redress Mechanism
HC Health Centre
IUCN International Union for the Conservation of Nature
IWMDP Integrated Water Management and Development Project
KII Key Informant Interview
MBGL meters below ground level
MoGLSD Ministry of Gender, Labour and Social Development
MWE Ministry of Water and Environment
MoH Ministry of Health
NEMA National Environment Management Authority
NUWS Northern Umbrella of Water and Sanitation
NGOs Non-Government Organization
OHS Occupational Health and Safety
OPM Office of the Prime Minister, Government of Uganda
PCR Physical Cultural Resources
PLA Participatory Learning & Action
RAP Resettlement Action Plan
RGC Rural Growth Centre
RWC Refugee Welfare Council
SEA/SH Sexual Exploitation and Abuse and Sexual Harassment
SEP Stakeholder Engagement Plan
ToR Terms of Reference
UNESCO United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization
UNHCR United Nations High Commission for Refugees
UTM Universal Transverse Mercator
VECs Valued Environmental Components
WASH Water, Sanitation and Hygiene
WCS Wildlife Conservation Society
UCSAP Uganda Climate Smart Agricultural Project
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xix IWMDP-MoWE

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
General Overview
The World Bank has extended credit to the Government of Uganda through the Ministry of Water and Environment
(MWE) towards implementation of the Integrated Water Management and Development Project (IWMDP). The
Project seeks to improve access to water supply and sanitation services, capacity for integrated water resources
management and improve the operational performance of service providers in identified project areas. In particular,
under Component 1.2, IWMDP provides support to Refugee and Host Communities, with financing from the IDA
18 Refugees Sub-Window. The sub-component supports activities designed to improve the sustainable provision
of water supply and sanitation services to refugee settlements and host communities. The sub-component’s target
districts are: Yumbe, Arua, Moyo (including Obongi district newly created from Moyo), Adjumani in West Nile,
Lamwo in Northern Uganda and Lamwo in Northern Uganda, where about 70 percent of the refugees in Uganda
are being hosted.
In order to address the water supply and sanitation gap in Adjumani and Lamwo Districts, 6 solar powered piped
water supply systems and 20 toilets have been proposed in project sites of Arra, Gulinya Junction and Arinyapi in
Adjumani District and Agoro, Padibe West, and Pangira in Lamwo District. These facilities will be constructed in
schools, health facilities, and administrative centres in the selected districts.
The main components of the Large Solar piped water systems will include; a production well as a water source, a
raw water pumping main to a reservoir, an elevated storage reservoir on a steel tower, Solar Pumps, Solar Panels,
chlorine dosing unit, pump motor, pump house, distribution network, and service connections
Pangira Solar Water Supply and Sanitation Project
Pangira RGC is one of the sites selected to host one of the Large Solar piped water systems and sanitation facilities.
This will comprise of a Solar Powered Piped Water Supply System together with Sanitation Facilities located at
selected sites. The project comprises of two boreholes, DWD77396 (30 m3/h) located in Pagada Village, Pangira
Parish and, DWD77397 (18 m3/h) also located in Pagada Village, Pangira Parish in Lokung Sub- County. The
proposed RGC project area will comprise the core villages of Pagada, Alikongo West, Alikongo Central, Ngol Pac,
Lik Olony, Licwar West, Licwar Central and Kila Kony paco which form part of Licwar and Pangira Parishes.
The proposed solar powered water supply system in addition to the identified boreholes shall be comprised of
submersible pumps, a raw water pumping main, construction of a 137 m3 /day capacity treatment plant, and a
Combined Treated Pumping Main from the WTP to the reservoir tank. The water supply system design shall further
include construction of a new 623 m storage reservoir, a distribution network for the project area and creating new
consumer Connections.
Sanitation Facilities
The project has a sub component on sanitation targeting improvement of toilet facilities at the household level and
construction of toilet facilities at selected places in Pangira RGC. At the household level the project will encourage
through local authorities’ individual households to construct on-Site Sanitation systems mainly improved pit latrines
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xx IWMDP-MoWE

and septic tanks that can be progressively upgraded with time. Public and institution level interventions in sanitation
are centered on the construction of 1No. 8 stance water borne public toilet facility whose location will be determined
during construction and 4No 5 stance VIP facilities plus 1No. 4stance VIP toilet for staff in Pangira Primary School.
All facilities shall be fully equipped with hand washing facilities. Other facilities for management of menstrual pads,
sludge management among others are detailed in the section on project description.
Specific Project Objectives
The specific objectives of the project include:
 To increase safe water access in Pangira Rural Growth Centre and settlements.
 To improve sanitation status in the community.
 To improve agro-production productivity through micro irrigation
 To conserve and restore water source catchments
Policy, Legal Framework and Institutional Arrangements
The project will be guided by policies across a range of sectors with a bearing on water abstraction, supply and
sanitation. A review of water and environment sector policies, energy and minerals, conservation, land and land
use provisions, health laws, labour and social development, employment laws among others have been reviewed.
The section also handles the World Bank Operational Safeguards together with International Conventions,
agreements, protocols and declarations.
ESIA Methodology
Documentation of baseline conditions within the direct and indirect impact area has used relevant thematic
methodologies. Biophysical baseline data was obtained through literature review, field biological surveys based on
appropriately selected samples and on-site air quality and noise measurements. Socioeconomic baseline has also
been collected using a socio-economic survey based on a combination of questionnaires and interviews.
Participatory tools including Focus Group Discussions, open consultative meetings have also been used to
document baselines of the project area.
Identification of impacts has followed the project life cycle using a checklist supplemented by professional judgment.
Evaluation of impact significance has used a modified approach. Identified risks and impacts were evaluated by
first determining the “level of risk or impact”, rated based on defined extent, duration, and magnitude, as the
evaluation criteria. The level of risk or impact was then assessed against the probability (likelihood) of occurrence
to determine its level of significance.
Biophysical and Socioeconomic Baseline Conditions
The topography of the project area is characterized by extensive flat landscapes. Lamwo district is characterized
by a very extensive flat plain punctuated with low lying hills superimposed on an extensive rolling plain to the
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xxi IWMDP-MoWE

North. Broad shallow valley landscapes spate the hilly clusters on which extensive shrubby/scrubby tree vegetation
has developed. To the north of the project area, a variegated landscape is visible with gently rolling plains merging
into clustered hilly landscapes graduating into circular elongated ridges. This spectacular topography is a result of
a combination of a complex geology and ancient denudation processes that have produced a series of magnificent
landscapes associated with rifting and volcanic activity in East Africa.
Geologically Pangira site lies within the greater Aswa Zone located within the Basement Complex or Gneissic-
Granolithic Complex comprising of undifferentiated gneisses of Precambrian age made up of granulite and
amphibolite facies rocks of both sedimentary and volcanic origin. Rocks in this belt include granitic gneisses and
well foliated dark gneisses containing biotite and hornblende with several amphibolite dykes. Other rocks have
been identified as banded gneisses, granodiorites and migmatites.
Lamwo experiences a unimodal climatic regime with an extended dry season and a prolonged wet season. The
wet season stretches from March through May to early August. However, changing climatic patterns have affected
this long-established seasonal rainfall distribution. Temperatures are high throughout the year picking at the climax
of the dry season in December to January.
The biological environment of the project area is broadly characteristic of the Northern Savanna belt of Uganda
with anthropogenic modification being limited to the isolated cluster settlements. The proposed Pangira Solar Water
Supply project is located in a largely savanna mosaic of bush lands and thickets graduating into extensive
woodlands towards the low lying and undulating hills. Vegetation is mainly native grasses Herphennia ruffa
Intermittent cultivation of annual crops has generally modified the grassland/thickets savanna especially near
settlements especially in the project area
Pangira which constitutes the project areas is described as a Rural Growth Center characterized by cluster linear
settlements radiating along the main roads, tracks and paths. Settlement structures within the town are a
combination of burnt brick walls and corrugated iron sheets, mud and wattle walls roofed with corrugated iron
sheets. However, away from the trading center, mud grass thatched huts a dominant. Demographic characteristics
in Pangira show a young population with people in the 0-16-year category being the majority while people above
50years are quite few. Households are medium sized with an average of 5 people per household. Of the sampled
households, 78.2% live in temporary structures while 21.7% reside in permanent and Semi-permanent structures.
Access to social services including portable water is low. Baseline survey established that 23% of the population in
the project area access a safe water point with in a distance of 2km and beyond. 52.8% of sampled households
spend 50,000/= per month on average implying a large percentage of the population can afford to pay for metered
connections though a good number earning less than 50,000/= may require separate arrangements to access
water.
Levels of sanitation are generally low with access to pit latrines standing at a coverage of 78% though conditions
vary from extremely elementary and in poor state to those that are regularly cleaned. Waste management is equally
dismal with no clear domestic waste management system being recorded apart from abandonment of wastes on
heaps near homesteads.
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xxii IWMDP-MoWE

Stakeholder Consultations
Stakeholder consultation and project disclosure were undertaken from the month of November 2022 to March 2023,
further consultations shall be carried through the construction phase. Engagement and project disclosure has
focused on national level, Lamwo District Local Government and the project beneficiary communities. Stakeholder
were availed all project information using appropriate fora. Key concerns raised from these consultative forums
were graded depending on the levels. District level concerns were mainly targeted at modalities for project
implementation and transparency. The question of observing project timelines and monitoring by Lamwo District
Local Government were among the issues emphasized at that level, Lower level local authorities raised similar
issues especially at Lokung Sub-County though budgetary provisions to enable the Local teams was highlighted.
Community stakeholder engagements have been accomplished, the range and diversity of issues raised reflected
the high level of interest in the project. Critical are aspects of availability of water throughout the year including
during the dry season. This was appreciated since watering livestock will now be a lot easier. Improvement and
provision of public toilets was appreciated since it will reduce on open defecation prevalent within Pangira.
Communities presented their requests for consideration on employment during the construction phase. Issues of
compensation and valuation procedures were amply explained by the consulting team. Modalities for accessing
water either through community stand pipes, household connections among others were explained and
appreciated.
Identification and Analysis of Environment and Social Impacts
The ESIA has identified and analyzed several environment and social impacts associated with the large scale solar
powered water supply and sanitation project. Both positive and negative impacts anticipated during the different
project phases are analyzed, while mitigation measures meant to either avoid, reduce, compensate or offset
negative impacts are presented, enhancement measures for positive impacts have also been identified and
discussed. Key positive environment and social impacts identified align to the project benefits and objectives, they
thus include temporary short term employment, income realized from sourcing construction materials, skills and
technology transfer to local youths and short term gender benefits associated with availability of markets for local
food products. The long term positive impacts meant to transform the community and accelerate rural development
in Pangira include improved access to clean water, community health improvement, savings in labour and time,
enhancement in savings, gender benefits, improvement in education access and outcomes among others.
However, Pangira large scale solar water supply and sanitation project will be associated with a range of benign
negative impacts throughout the different phase that if not appropriately mitigated have the potential to derail project
intended benefits. The construction phase will be associated with limited expropriation of land and properties
thereon. Failure to implement a Resettlement Action Plan, will ignite resentment by those affected. Loss of
vegetation will have predicted to occur though this is an impact of minor significance since no endangered or
species of conservation significance was identified. Construction activities will have the potential for introduction of
exotic plant species which may end up out competing existing plant species with adverse ecological consequences.
The proposed solar powered water supply and sanitation project will further have the potential to induce localized
runoff and consequent soil erosion, generate both construction and domestic waste, trigger impacts associated
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xxiii IWMDP-MoWE

with haulage of construction material, public health and safety risks especially due to ponding of surface water
created by poorly managed trenching.
During the project operation phase, the potential for air and noise pollution exists. The use of diesel powered
generators to supplement solar energy will significantly contribute to noise and air pollution. Environmental
consequences of such energy combination option will have to be carefully evaluated and managed as indicated in
this ESIA report. The project will impact ground water resources, any attempt to abstract beyond the sustainable
quantities due to unforeseen demand, will definitely exhaust underground aquifers. Poorly managed public facilities
will have the potential to spread water borne sanitation diseases, should users of the facilities in the school and the
public facility in the trading center fail to adhere to simple basic user guidelines, such facilities may become “super
disease spreaders” hence eliminating or severely curtailing the benefits of supplying water to the community.
Construction Environment and Social Management and Monitoring Plans (CESMMP)
An Environment and Social Management and Monitoring Plan (ESMMP) has been prepared. The summary plans
give the intentions and purpose of having such plans, these will be elaborated by the contractor before project
commencements most likely during the mobilization phase. Key plans presented include plans for management
of: labour force, runoff and soil erosion, wastes, Occupational Health and Safety, Handling of Chemicals and other
potentially hazardous materials, Emergency Response, community health and safety. Other plans outlined here
and to be elaborated by the contractor include HIV/AIDS management plan, Gender Mainstreaming plan and child
protection plans. The project is further expected to elaborate the chance findings and Grievance Redress
Mechanism.
Environment, Social, Health and Safety Design Considerations that have informed the Project Design.
The Environment and Social Impact Assessment studies have documented detailed aspects of the environment
and social economic baseline with an aim of elaborating impacts associated with the design. Following impact
analysis, the following ESHS aspects have been identified to inform the project design;
 Selection of the most viable sources of energy to power project pumps

 Safe disposal of household and institutional sewage management
 Mitigate impacts on local ecology through appropriate trenching
 Mitigate depletion and pollution of underground water resources
 Disposal of sewage sludge from institutional facilities
Conclusions and Recommendations
The ESIA report presents a section on conclusions derived from the assessment and further recommends specific
to project sustainability actions
Conclusions
The proposed water supply and sanitation project in Pangira Sub County, Lamwo District will certainly enhance
socioeconomic development in the project area. The project design and operations shall benefit a range of project
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xxiv IWMDP-MoWE

beneficiaries within the Pangira RGC. Improved water availability in the community and construction of sanitation
facilities are meant to unlock the vicious cycle of the spread of disease and low productivity in the area. The project
will hence entail accelerated development with key milestones in education, health, settlement and agro production
among others being anticipated. Access to water and improvements in sanitation will come with greater gender
benefits, women and girls will realize improved hygiene and hence productivity in all sectors. Participation in
decision making and support to family livelihood strategies will be added benefits.
However, the project will be associated with benign negative impacts that will require mitigation such that project
benefits are fully realized. The level of impacts shall be moderated by the fact that the projects are linear impacting
a narrow corridor through largely modified flat landscapes. Important negative impacts triggered by the project and
have received attention in this ESIA that if not well mitigated may encumber project sustainability include; social ills
of construction labour, gender impacts, occupational health and safety and land take and expropriation of land and
properties thereon. Other less critical impacts will be on management of pit latrine sludge, increased runoff and
erosion at worksites, construction waste among others.
Based on the assessment contained in this document, most of the anticipated negative impacts will be reversible,
localized, short-term and can be mitigated through implementation of an Environmental and Social Management
and Monitoring Plan. With a strong environment and social safeguards team in place and a responsive contractor
implementation of mitigation measures contained in here and further as demanded from time to time by regulatory
agencies and MWE, the project will remain largely sustainable.
Recommendations
Based on the results of the ESIA, the team recommends the approval of the proposed project and its components
for implementation on condition that the recommended mitigating measures are implemented, and as any other
stakeholders may recommend in the course of review of this report or following an audit. The team further
recommends that the following be undertaken during the course of project implementation:
a) Ministry of Water and Environment carries out a comprehensive Resettlement Action Plan to cover all
project components
b) The contractor shall be required to produce a Contractor’s Environment and Social Management Plan (C-
ECMP) before commencement of project operations.
c) All infrastructure servicing the project especially power lines follow the same corridor as the transmission
mains
d) An annual audit is performed on all project components
e) Monitor water abstraction rates at the two boreholes to ensure sustainable yield.
f) Ensure that all categories of households within the community are served by appropriate type of supply.
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xxv IWMDP-MoWE

1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
The World Bank has extended credit to the Government of Uganda towards implementation of the Integrated
Water Management and Development Project (IWMDP). The Project seeks to improve access to water supply
and sanitation services, capacity for integrated water resources management and improve the operational
performance of service providers in identified project areas. In particular, under Component 1.2, IWMDP
provides support to Refugee and Host Communities, with financing from the IDA 18 Refugees Sub-Window.
The sub-component supports activities designed to improve the sustainable provision of water supply and
sanitation services to refugee settlements and host communities. The sub-component’s target districts are:
Yumbe, Arua, Moyo (including Obongi district newly created from Moyo), Adjumani in West Nile, Lamwo in
Northern and Lamwo in Central Uganda, where about 70 percent of the refugees in Uganda are being hosted.
In order to address the water supply and sanitation gap in Adjumani and Lamwo Districts, 6 solar powered
piped water supply systems and 20 toilets have been proposed in project sites of Arra, Gulinya Junction and
Arinyapi in Adjumani District and Agoro, Padibe West, and Pangira in Lamwo District. These facilities will be
constructed in schools, health facilities, and administrative centres in the selected districts. Each district will
receive 10 sanitation facilities. These water supply and sanitation infrastructure will be implemented as part of
the strategy to improve access to clean water, improved sanitation and hygiene in the refugee settlements and
host communities. The main components of the Large Solar piped water systems will include; a production well
as a water source, a raw water pumping main to a reservoir, an elevated storage reservoir on a steel tower,
Solar Pumps, Solar Panels, chlorine dosing unit, pump motor, pump house, distribution network, and service
connections.
1.2 Overview of the Proposed Pangira (RGC) Water Supply System and Sanitation Facilities
The proposed RGC project area will comprise the core villages of Pagada, Alikongo West, Alikongo Central,
Ngol Pac, Lik Olony, Licwar West, Licwar Central and Kila Kony paco which form part of Licwar and Pangira
parishes.
1.2.1 Water Supply System
Pangira RGC project comprises of a Solar Powered Piped Water Supply System together with Sanitation
Facilities located at selected sites. The project comprises of two boreholes, DWD77396 (30 m³/h) located in
Pagada village, Pangira parish and, DWD77397 (18 m³/h) also located in Pagada village, Pangira parish in
Lokung Sub-county.
The project includes installation of two submersible pumps, a raw water pumping main, construction of a 317/d
capacity treatment plant, and a Combined Treated Pumping Main from the WTP to the reservoir tank. The
water supply system design shall further include construction of a new storage reservoir, a distribution network
for the project area and creating new consumer Connections.
Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page 1 IWMDP-MoWE

1.2.2 Sanitation Facilities
Individual Households
The project will encourage through local authorities’ individual households to construct on-Site Sanitation
systems mainly improved pit latrines and septic tanks that can be progressively upgraded with time. These
systems are easier for authorities to begin enforcing now and in future make it easier to simply connect to a
central sewerage system whenever development conditions permit. Households shall be encouraged to adopt
a system that suits their income levels.
Public and Institutional Facilities
The feasibility report recommended and presented designs for a public toilet facility at Pangira Primary School
in Lokung Sub County, Licwa parish. The facility has been design to achieve a loading capacity of one stance
for every 40 pupils. The proposed facility will comprise of four (4) VIP toilet blocks of (5) stances two for boys
and girls and one (1) stance VIP toilet block for staff all fully equipped with hand washing facilities. Other
facilities for management of menstrual pads, sludge management among others are detailed in the section on
project description.
1.3 Project Objectives
The aim of the refugee and host community water project component is to improve the sustainable provision of
safe water and sanitation services to the host communities and refugee population in the refugee hosting
districts in West Nile and Northern Uganda; through provision of sustainable safe water and sanitation services,
management and protection of water source catchments. The selected project sites should serve at least 30%
refugee communities and 70% host communities.
1.3.1 Specific Objective
The specific objectives of the project include:
 To increase safe water access in Pangira Rural Growth Centre and settlements.
 To improve sanitation status in the community.
 To improve food productivity through micro irrigation.
 To conserve and restore water source catchments.
1.4 The need for Environment and Social Impact Assessment
The implementation of the Pangira Water Supply Scheme will be associated with a number of Environment and
Social Impacts that require an Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA). The filth schedule of the
National Environment Act No. 5 of 2019 as amended, lists projects for which Environmental and Social Impact
Assessment is mandatory. This project is therefore subject to all the requirements of the NEA No 5 of 2019.
The Act requires that identified impacts and risks are appropriately mitigated following the mitigation hierarchy.
The Proposed project falls under Category B of the World Bank OP4.01. The project will trigger impacts on
natural habitats though limited in magnitude and are site specific as opposed to category A. Identified and

analysed impacts can be mitigated at a low cost and are reversible. The proposed project design shall further
trigger the following World Bank Operational Policies and Bank Procedures.
 OP 4.04 - Natural Habitats

 OP 4.11 - Physical Cultural Resources
 OP 4.12 - Involuntary Resettlement.
1.5 Objectives of the ESIA
The main objective of the Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) is to identify the sensitive
elements existing in the project environment, determine the project components likely to affect the environment
assess the importance of such impacts and recommend mitigation measures and actions.
Specifically, and in accordance with the National Environment Act 5 of 2019, specific objectives are to:
a) To document the existing biophysical and socio-economic baseline conditions of the proposed direct
and indirect project impact area;
b) To identify all possible positive and negative environmental and social impacts likely to result from the
proposed construction of Pangira Rural Water Scheme
c) To evaluate the significance of all negative impacts associated with the proposed project and prescribe
appropriate mitigation measures; and
d) To develop an Environmental and Social Management Plan to guide implementation of the construction
of the proposed Rural Water Supply Scheme and sanitation improvement.
1.6 Structure of the ESIA Report
Table 1.1: ESIA Report Structure
Chapter Highlight on section content

Executive Executive Summary of the project and its activities, ESIA study methods, key findings and
Summary impacts as well as proposed mitigation measures.
Chapter 1 Introduction with details of project background, objective, justification and categorization of
the Project.
Chapter 2 Project description which gives details of project components, location, and the proposed
project activities, area of influence, project management, project proponents and cost
estimates.
Chapter 3 Description of ESIA approach and methodology

Chapter 4 Outline of different laws, policies, regulations and international guidelines and conventions
relating to implementation activities of the proposed project as well as ESIA study.
Chapter 5 Description of Biophysical and Socioeconomic baseline information of the project area
Chapter 6 Public consultation and stakeholder engagement processes and the outcomes of such
meetings
Chapter 7 Analysis of project alternatives, a comparison of the options and their significance
Chapter 8 Description and evaluation of the project anticipated environmental and social impacts and
their mitigation measures
Chapter 9 The Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) as well as the Environmental and
Social Monitoring Plan
Chapter 10 Conclusion and Recommendations
Chapter 11 References
Chapter 12 Annexes

2 THE PROJECT DESCRIPTION

The proposed Pangira Rural Water Scheme will be comprised of a number of components that constitute the
entire RGC water scheme. The key project components include the water supply, power source, distribution
network and sanitation facilities. These key components are further divided into sub components.
2.1 Project Proponent and Cost estimates
2.1.1 Proponent and Contacts:
The Permanent Secretary

Ministry of Water and Environment,
Directorate of Water Development,
Rural Water Supply Department
Plot 3-7, Kabalega Crescent Road,
P.O. Box 20026, Kampala.
Email: [email protected] / [email protected]
Telephone: +256 41 4505942
2.1.2 Estimated Project Cost
The project has a Capital Investment Cost Estimate of Ugx 5,318,416,825 (Exclusive of VAT and Contingency).
2.2 Project Location
Pangira RGC is located in Lokung sub-county, Lamwo District. The sub-county is bordered by South Sudan to
the North and Palabek Kal to the West, Agoro and Paloga sub-counties to the East and Lamwo Town Council
to the South. The RGC is located approximately 13 km by road from Lamwo District Local Government Offices
along the Lamwo-Padibe-Lokung road. The coordinates of Pagira RGC are, 577861.23 m E, 081491.16 m N.
Pangira RGC is sparsely settled rural trading Centre characterized by a diverse activity portfolio including petty
trade in common household goods.

Figure 2.1: Map showing the location of the Proposed Project area in Pangira, Lamwo Districts.

2.2.1 Project area of influence
The proposed project area will influence the core villages of Pagada, Alikongo West, Alikongo Central, Ngol
Pac, Lik Olony, Licwar West, Licwar Central and Kila Kony paco which form part of Licwar and Pangira
Parishes. The town centre is where most of the commercial activities take place and consists mainly of shops,
a daily market, a police station, bars and schools.
According to the National Population and Housing Census 2014, the annual population growth rate for Lamwo
district is 1.3 with an average household size of 4.8 for Lokung sub-county. A number of villages from Licwar
and Pangira Parishes have been selected to benefit from the project. It should be noted that the proposed
project area had a projected population of 4,004 residents in 2022 and have been considered fully for the water
supply project.
Figure 2.2: Spatial locations of the major components of the project in Pangira, Lamwo Districts.
2.3 Water demand in the project area
In the design, the system will be sized on the basis of the maximum day water demand of 382 m³/day which
will serve a population of 7,912 by 2044. The design demand determination and the water supply calculations
are summarized in Table 2.1 below.

Table 2.1: Summary of Demand Calculations
Year 2022 2024 2029 2034 2039 2044

Served Popn. 5,997 6,153 6,552 6,978 7,431 7,912
Domestic (m3/d) 134 138 147 156 166 177
Govt/Inst (m3/d) 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ind/Com (m3/d) 29 29 31 33 35 38
UFW (m3/d) 45 46 49 52 55 59
ADD (m3/d) 223 229 243 259 276 294
MDD (m3/d) 290 297 316 337 359 382
2.4 Proposed Water Supply
2.4.1 Water Source
The design of the proposed water source will be sized on the basis of the maximum day water demand of
382m3/day estimated for Pangira RGC. The feasibility has identified underground water as the most
sustainable source. The project comprises of two boreholes, DWD77396 (30 m³/h) located in Pagada 1 Village,
Pangira Parish and, DWD77397 (18 m³/h) also located in Pagada 2 village, Pangira Parish in Lokung Sub-
county.
Table 2.2: Details of water sources
Village Borehole Yield GPS Coordinates Pump Capacity Daily (12 hours
pumping regime)
Pagada 1 Village DWD77396 (30 m3/hr) E 463596; 398748N Head 80m, Flow 30.0 m3/hr 117.6
Pagada 2 Village DWD77397 (18 m3/hr) E 463883; 398980N Head 85m, Flow 18.0 m3/hr 127.0 244.6
Source: MWE, Feasibility Study and Design Report, 2022
Pagada 1 Borehole DWD 77386 Pagada 2 Borehole DWD 77387
Figure 2.3: Project Water Source Sites

2.4.2 Water Treatment Process
The design proposes a full scale treatment process to address removal of excess iron and achieve minimum
standards. This means that the water needs to be treated so that this excess is removed. The treatment process
will comprise of Aeration, Sedimentation, Rapid Gravity Filtration, and Chlorination.
AERATION
DISINFECTION
SEDIMENTATION
FILTRATION
PORTABLE WATER
Figure 2.4: Water Treatment Process. STORAGE
2.4.3 Structures at the Pump House
The structures shall have the following characteristics.
 The pump houses are to be made in block work.

 The pump houses and all necessary auxiliary facilities are envisaged to fit on a size of land of
about 1900 m².
 Fencing in chain link of about 120 m with 1No double leaf access gate.
 The pump houses will contain the associated pipework, fittings and electrical switch gear. A
single roomed 3.0 m X 3.0 m floor area pump attendant and guard house with a drainable VIP
toilet will also be constructed at the borehole sites.
2.4.4 Borehole Pump and Pumping Transmission Mains
The pump for the production well and size of the transmission mains up to the water treatment plant were
designed using Hazen-Williams Formula and a spread sheet was used to design the main requirements in the
design year 2044. The details of the calculation for the design of the borehole pumps and the main sizing is
summarized in 7.2 below.
Table 2.3: Raw Water Pump Details
Borehole Number BH1-77397 BH2-77396

Pagada Village Pagada Village
Test Pump Yield (m3/hr) 18.00 30.0
Borehole Yield to be Used (m3/hr) 18.00 30.00
Hours of Pumping (hr) 8.0 8.0
Efficiency Pump (%) 60.0% 60.0%
Efficiency Motor (%) 80.0% 80.0%


Total Daily Delivery (m3/day) 144 240
Pumping Main Section No. 01 (From Pump Installation Point to Ground Level at Borehole)
Ground Level at Borehole (m AMSL) 983.890 988.790
Pump Installation Depth in Borehole (m BGL) 75.000 75.000
Cwh 140 140
Pipe Details OD90 HDPE PN10 OD110 HDPE PN10
Pipe Diameter ND (mm) 79.20 96.80

Pipe Diameter ND (m) 0.079 0.097
Flow in Pipe (m /hr)
3 18.000 30.000
Flow in Pipe (m3/s) 0.005 0.008
Velocity (m/s) 1.01 1.13
Length of Pipe Section No. 01 (m) 75.00 75.00
Friction Loss (m) 1.08 1.04
Fittings losses - 10% (m) 0.11 0.10
Total Headloss in Section 01 (m) 1.2 1.1
Pumping Main Section No. 02 (From Ground Level at Borehole toInlet Level at WTP)
Ground Level at WTP (m AMSL) 992.150 992.150
Static Lift (m) 8.260 3.360
Cwh 140 140
Pipe Details OD90 HDPE PN10 OD110 uPVC PN10

Flow through pipe section 02 (m3/hr) 18.000 30.000
Flow through pipe section 02 (m3/s) 0.005 0.008
Chainage at WTP 0+060 0+020
Chainage at Borehole 0+000 0+000
Total Headloss in Section 02 (m) 1 0
Total Pumping Head from Borehole to Reservoir
Total Static Head from Borehole Installation Point to WTP 83 78
Total Headloss from Borehole Installation Point to WTP 2 1
Total Pumping Head from Borehole to Reservoir 85 80
Summary of the Design
Total Length of Transmission
OD90 HDPE PN10 (m) 75
Capacity of pump in each borehole
Head (m) 85 80
Flow (m3/hr) 18.0 30.0
Power (kW) 8.7 13.6


Source: Project estimates.
The borehole will have a riser main with the following characteristics:
a) Flow of 30 m³/h at 80m head for newly drilled well BH2-77396 of 30 m³/h maximum yield;
borehole riser pipe of OD110 HDPE PN10, 75 m long; and pumping main of OD110 uPVC
PN10, 20 m long up to the water treatment plant that will be located about 20 meters from
the borehole site.
b) Flow of 18m³/h at 85m head for newly drilled well BH1-77397 of 18 m³/h maximum yield;
borehole riser pipe of OD90 HDPE PN10, 75 m long; and pumping main of OD90 HDPE
PN10, 180 m long up to the water treatment plant located at the BH2 DWD77396 site.
The structures shall have the following characteristics

 The pump houses are to be made in block work.
 The pump houses and all necessary auxiliary facilities are envisaged to fit on a size of land
of about 1900 m².
 Fencing in chain link of about 120 m with 1No double leaf access gate.
 The pump houses will contain the associated pipework, fittings and electrical switch gear. A
single roomed 3.0m X 3.0 m floor area pump attendant and guard house with a drainable VIP
toilet will also be constructed at the borehole sites.
2.4.5 Treated Water Pump Mains
The treated water pumping mains shall be, OD110 uPVC PN10 of length 800 m. The characteristics of the
pumps for delivering water to the reservoir are provided in the Table 2.4.
Table 2.4: Raw and Clear Water Pumping Main Details
Parameter Backwash Pumps Clear Water Pumping Main

Demand- 2044 (m3/day) 19.20 382.00
Treatment Plant Use (5%) (m3/day) 0.00 0.00
Total Amount of Water Abstracted (m3/day) 19.20 384.00
Hours of Pumping (hr) 8 8
Efficiency (%) 70.0% 70.0%
Required Delivery (m3/hr) 2.40 48.00
Required Delivery (m3/s) 0.0007 0.0133
Pump Installation Level (m amsl) 986.490 986.490
Inlet Level at Tank (m amsl) 992.150 1036.260
Hazen Williams Coefficient, Cwh (C) 140 140
Velocity (m/s) 0.401 0.812
Flow in Pipe (m3/s) 0.0007 0.0133
Length of Pipe (m) 300 1843


Total Friction Loss (m) 1.5 8.7
Total Head (m) 7.3 59.3
Head Used (m) 8 60
Power (kW) 0.1 11.2
Summary
No. of Pumps 1.0 1.0
Capacity of each pump
Head (m) 8.0 60.0
Flow (m3/hr) 2.4 48.0
Source: Project Estimates
2.4.1 Water office block
The water office block will be constructed at a location with GPS coordinates 36N 0463808, 0399268 within the
project area at trading centre, for running the day to day operations of the water supply system. The building
will also host Workshop and offices, Chlorine store and General store. The water office block will consist of a
reception area and operations office furnished with working benches, shelves and lockable cabinets.


Figure 2.3 Site Layout for Pangira Water Source

Figure 2.4 Ground Floor Plan for Pangira

2.4.2 Energy and Power Provisions
Pangira Water Supply Scheme shall the powered by a combination of Hydroelectric Power and solar power.
This power requirement includes the supply and installation of 200 solar panels on an area of 300 square
meters and auxiliary equipment, a 75 kVA capacity 3 phase pole mounted transformer for the pump houses
and treatment plant works and the extension of the overhead power lines of 3 km with 3 line conductors.
2.4.3 Storage Reservoir
The storage reservoir will be located in Latida village, Pawor Parish, Lokung sub county Lamwo District. The
specific site is at GPS coordinates E464443 N400410. The Pangira scheme is estimated to hold the required
storage capacity as computed at 30% of the maximum day demand. The required storage capacities for the
subsystems are 115 m³ for Pangira RGC. However, a tank of 131 m³ has been adopted due to the fact that the
115 m³ does not exist on the market. It is recommended to place each of the pressed steel tanks on a 15 m
high steel tower due to the topography of the project area and the low pressures experienced in the far reaches
of the distribution network.
The reservoir’s storage capacity at various stages of the design period is reflected in Table 2.4 below
Table 2.5: Reservoir Storage Capacity
Storage
Item
2022 2024 2029 2034 2039 2044
MD Demand- m3/day 290 297 316 337 359 382
Storage Capacity (m3) 131 131 131 131 131 131
Hours of Storage 11 11 10 9 9 8
Storage Capacity (%) 45% 44% 41% 39% 37% 34%
Figure 2.5: ESIA and RAP team at the proposed water storage center in Latida village, Lokung subcounty

2.4.4 Distribution Network
The network has been designed for those areas with defined access roads but the possibility of extending it
was catered for since the project area is expected to expand. Consequently, the smallest size of pipe chosen
is OD 50 HDPE. Pipes smaller than this will be laid as network intensification lines.

Figure 2.6: Proposed Water Supply Schematics

2.4.5 Disinfection Facilities
Disinfection of the treated water from the boreholes at the treatment plant will be made by the installation
of chemical dozers at the chemical house to feed into the contact tank accordingly. A pipe manifold will
be constructed to receive the water from the borehole before disinfection is effected prior to entry into the
tank. A chemical house will be constructed adjacent to the reservoir to house the doser and serve as a
chemical storage, mixing and dosing place.
2.4.6 Access roads
Access to majority of the project components will be gained through existing public roads, given their
convenient location in closed proximity to the existing road network. However, some components, not
located in close proximity to the existing road network, which have been identified to require access roads
will be acquired. The land tenure system in the area is customary which will necessitate compensation
due to the land take as captured in the project RAP Report.
Figure 2.7: Access roads to the two different boreholes in Pangira RGC
2.4.7 Transmission and Distribution Network
Water will be pumped from the boreholes using independent transmission mains into the storage
reservoir. From there, the distribution network will be fed by gravity from the storage reservoirs. The
network has been designed for those areas with defined access roads but the possibility of extending it
was catered for since the project area is expected to expand. Consequently, the smallest size of pipe
chosen is OD 50 HDPE. Pipes smaller than this will be laid as network intensification lines. The
distribution area is mainly comprised of a heavily settled hamlet hosting local government facilities,
commercial properties, residences and communal areas. Population density is high pursuing multiple
economic activities among which are included crop cultivation, livestock raising, retail trade, trade-in agro-
products, and provision of services among others.

Figure 2.8: The transmission and targeted distribution mains within Pangira RGC
Table 2.6: Pangira Distribution Mains
No. Pipe Material Length (m)

1 OD160 uPVC PN10 30
2 OD110 uPVC PN10 3,520
3 OD75 HDPE PN10 410
4 OD63 HDPE PN10 200
5 OD50 HDPE PN10 8,858
Total 13,018
Source: Project Estimate
2.4.8 Power supply
Since Solar power is the primary source of power for Pangira RGC water supply system, assessments
have been made to establish a secondary power source to power the system in cases where solar will
be down due to bad weather and other unforeseeable circumstances. This power requirement includes
the supply and installation of 200 solar panels on an area of 300 square meters and auxiliary equipment,
a 75 kVA capacity 3 phase pole mounted transformer for the pump houses and treatment plant works
and the extension of the overhead power lines of 3 km with 3 line conductors. The secondary power
option should be able to power the system for the required pumping time in the ultimate year (8 hrs).
According to the feasibility report, Solar and hydroelectric power provides the best power option to be
utilised by the water supply system for Pangira RGC due its low daily operation costs as compared to

generator power which has high daily operation costs. The HEP power option will include the extension
of power for 1 km from Pangira Trading centre to Pagada the source points. Supply and installation of a
50kVA 3-phase transformer and all accessories for both the borehole sites and water treatment plant
since they are within a radius of 400 meters from each other will be required.
2.5 Sanitation
The feasibility report recommends onsite sewerage management systems as opposed to offsite systems
given the existing and predicted near future community and household parameters.
2.5.1 Individual Household Facilities
The design recommends two types of facilities for individual household thus;
a) Septic tank system for the medium-income group i.e. households with house connections. The
dimension of individual septic tanks shall be determined by the household characteristics at the
time of construction and site conditions.
b) Improved pit latrines are recommended for the low-income groups i.e. households with yard taps
and those who will use public stand posts
2.5.2 Design of Public and Institutional Toilets
The design team adopted the criteria below for the design of public and institutional toilets:
 Public toilets have been designed at a loading of 35 users per stance while for institutions
(Pangira Primary School) a loading of 40 pupils per stance has been adopted.
 All public toilets shall have a urinal stance in the male’s section.
 Large toilet blocks shall have 1 washroom each in male and female sections respectively.
Table 2.7: Summary of School Toilet Design
Source: Feasibility Report

Figure 2.9: VIP School Toilet for Boys
Figure 2.10: VIP School Toilet for Girls
Figure 2.11:: VIP School Toilet for Staff

2.5.3 Toilets in Public Places
The feasibility proposes construction of one six (6) stance waterborne toilet to be located at Pangira RGC.
A layout out of the toilet facility is shown in the figure 2.12 below.
Figure 2.12: Layout of public toilet at Pangira RGC
2.6 Auxiliary facilities
2.6.1 Camp sites
It will be necessary for the contractor to establish workers camp to provide accommodations for experts
that might come outside the project area as well as project offices for the contractor and supervising
consultants. Other facilities within the camp shall include: parking yard, material storage yard, kitchen,
sanitary facilities, site clinic etc. The identification, selection, construction and operation shall be in line
with the provisions in NEA 2019 and other relevant statutory requirements. All the auxiliary facilities shall
be subjected to independent and comprehensive Environmental and social impact assessment and
approvals shall be secured.
2.6.2 Key equipment and materials sources
Where there is need for local materials such as water, sand, aggregates and gravels, the contractor shall
be required to get from legally existing and authorized sources locally. A full and detailed equipment and
materials list is herein appended as Appendix 4 to this report indicating the different quantities and
specifications of each.

2.6.3 Waste handling and disposal
During the construction, the contractor shall generate both hazardous and non-hazardous wastes
including vegetation stripped from site, soil excavated from foundation sites, packaging waste (cement
bags, paper, polythene sheets, and wood pallets), metal scrap, wire cuttings, wooden planks, polyethene
sheets, PET water bottles, empty paint and solvent containers and waste oil from construction equipment
or vehicles. Some of the waste materials such as paints, cement, adhesives, waste oil and cleaning
solvents contain hazardous substances. The generated waste must be managed in by a licenced waste
handler in accordance with the national environment (waste management) regulation 2020 and Local
Government Act (Amended) 1997.
2.7 Project management

During construction phase, the project shall have a supervising consultant who shall oversee the
implementation of the project on behalf of the developer. The supervising consultant will have in place
an environmental and social safeguards team comprising of Gender and GBV officer, Health & Safety
officer and environmental safeguards officer, social safeguards officer, among others.
The operation and management option is to handover the water supply system and public sanitation
facilities to the Northern Umbrella of Water and Sanitation (NUWS). Within the decentralization
framework, the experience and capacity of Umbrella organization, applied directly to the management of
the newly constructed facilities will increase the likelihood of sustainable commercial operations and
management of the town systems in the next 5-10 years. The Umbrellas organisation is under the urban
water department of the Ministry of Water and Environment and can effectively plan and manage budgets
agreed within a contract framework. It can use experience gained elsewhere in the past 5-years to extend
services to rural & urban poor areas.
2.7.1 Labour force
For the proposed solar motorized piped water supply project, several staff for the contractor
(approximately 120 workers), Supervising consultant (approximately 12 workers), Stakeholder
Engagement Consultant (approximately 12 workers) and MWE staff (approximately 4 staff) will be
required during the construction phase. The major categories will include key staff, skilled, semi-skilled
and unskilled workers. It’s estimated about 150 workers will be deployed at the project site. The
management of workers will be in accordance with Uganda labour laws, the World Bank safeguards
policies and EHS requirements/guidelines.

3 ENVIORNMENT AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

METHODOLOGY
3.1 Introduction
This section presents the approach to the ESIA and describes the methodology that has been used to
study the physical, biological and socioeconomic baseline conditions and further assess and predict the
significance of impacts resulting from the proposed project actions.
3.2 General Approach
The Environment and Social Impact Assessment has been conducted according to the requirements of
the policy and regulatory framework of Uganda as prescribed in the relevant legal provisions thus the
National Environment Act No 5 of 2019, the National Environment (Environment and Social Assessment)
Regulations 2020 and Manual for EIA guidelines for water sector projects in Uganda 2011. World Bank
Operational Policies have guided the study and consequent impact assessment. The ESIA process as
provided for under National Environment (Environment and Social Assessment) Regulations 2020, is
summarised in Figure 3.1 below.
Figure 3.1: Summary of EIA process in Uganda (Source: NEMA, 2020)

The approach adopted for this study does not divert from the recommended approach by the Authority
and hence the team proceeded as follows:
i. Review of project documents provided by the client

ii. Consultations with the Client and Engineering Design Team
iii. Review of relevant policy and regulatory provisions
iv. Determining the Scope of the Assessment (Scoping study)
v. Review of World Bank Operational Policies and Environment and Social Standards.
vi. Consultations with Key Implementation Stakeholders, discussions with Design team to identify
possible project Alternatives
vii. Desk top studies to gain insight into project area of influence
viii. Field Baseline studies to contextualise and plug information gaps
ix. Impact Identification and significance rating using appropriate matrices
x. Applying the mitigation hierarchy to provide measure that avoid, reduce, offset or compensate
for negative impacts.
3.3 Scoping study

Scoping was carried out between 5th to 10th December 2022. The purpose of the scoping phase was to
identify key sensitivities and those activities with the potential to contribute to, or cause, potentially
significant impacts to environmental and socioeconomic receptors and resources and to evaluate siting,
layout and technology alternatives for the proposed Projects.
This stage determined the most important issues, problems, and alternatives that should be addressed
in further environmental and social analyses. The consultant gathered an initial identification of the
relevant environmental policies, laws, and regulations of Uganda. Also, an initial review of capacity issues
concerning the prevention and mitigation of environmental impacts for individuals (in communities,
professional associations and organizations, policy makers, etc.), for organizations (government
departments, NGOs, private sectors etc.) and as regards an enabling environment (policies, laws,
regulations, incentives, partnerships, etc.) was conducted by the consultant. The output of this stage
facilitated the consultant to develop the tasks for the ESIA through consultation so as to ensure that the
process and output are focused on the key issues.
3.3.1 Terms of Reference
The scoping report formed a basis for development of Terms of reference that define the scope of the
proposed impact assessment. NEMA (see Appendix 1) following a submission made by Ministry of Water
and Environment with guidance from the consultant issued the Terms of Reference approval for this ESIA
study. The Authority granted formal approval to the ToRs, with addition advise to the developer to
consider particular aspects which were addressed in this audit report as guided by the table below;
Table 3.1: Aspects highlighted by NEMA for consideration
No. Aspects highlighted by NEMA for consideration Addressing the

Aspects
(I) Provide a comprehensive description of the proposed solar piped water supply and sanitation See chp.2.3
system, the specific components and associated infrastructure, and the activities that will be

undertaken during both the construction and operational phases of the project and the size of
the work force.
(II) Include in the ESIA report, a hydrological investigative report in regard to the potential impacts of
the project on underground water resources within the proposed project area, and the mitigation See chp. 5.1.4
actions to address such impacts. 8.6.1
(III) Provide a detailed description of the waste streams that will be generated from the activities of
the solar piped water supply and sanitation system, and the measures and equipment that will See chp 8.4.5
be put in place to handle such waste. 8.6.2
(IV) Include, in the report relevant baseline information that is project site -specific, on the soils,
water, air quality and noise, as well as clear -colored photographs depicting the current status of Chap. 5
the project area and the neighboring environs.
(V) Provide clear, colored and well labelled location maps/images (preferably each covering A-3 size
paper) and accurate sets of GPS coordinates are provided in UTM format. Done where
required
(VI) provide a clear and legible copy of the site layout (preferably each covering A-3 size paper) Appendix 2
(VII) Carryout comprehensive consultations with all the relevant key stakeholders including Adjumani
and Lamwo District Local Government authorities, the Directorate of water resources Chp 6.
management (DWRM)particularly in regard to the potential impacts of the proposed project on
water resources in the project area. The views of the stakeholders consulted should be well
documented and appended to the ESIA report.
(VIII) Include in the ESIA report, comprehensive analysis of alternatives /options to the selected Chp. 7
project location, design and technology, among other aspects.
(IX) Carryout a comprehensive evaluation of the negative environmental impacts associated with the
proposed project activities and the relevant mitigation measures to minimize the identified
negative impacts and environmental management/monitoring plans that relate to the identified Chp. 8
environmental impacts of the proposed project.
(X) Make reference to all the relevant provisions of applicable policies, laws, regulations, guidelines
and standards, in particular, the National Environment Act, No.5 of 2019. Chp. 4
(XI) Append to the ESIA report authentic copies of land ownership and acquisition documents. Appendix 9
(XII) Indicate the actual total project (investment) cost including costs of works, machinery/equipment
and land where applicable; and these should be submitted by a certified valuer and valuation Chp. 2.1.2
certificate attached to the ESIA. Appendix 10
(XIII) In line with Regulation 49(2) of the National Environment (Environmental and Social
Assessment) Regulations s.1No 143/2020, pay anon-refundable administration fee of thirty Receipt
percent (30%) of the total fees payable on submission of the Environmental and Social impact attached as
statement. appendix 11
3.4 Methodology
A combination of study methodologies was employed to generate data and information on environmental
and socioeconomic baseline. The following methods have been used to document baselines for this
study.
3.4.1 Document Review
To gain insight on some of the baseline parameters and project characterization, a number of documents
were reviewed as part of ESIA studies and these included:
 Draft Engineering Design Report;

 World Bank Environment and Social Safeguard Policies
 World Bank Operational Policies
 National Environment Act No 5 of 2019;
 National and District level statistics as contained in UBOS Abstracts of 2014, 2016 and
2017;

 Water Sector Policies and Plans

 Catchment Management plans for the project areas among other.
3.4.2 Socio-economic Survey
A socioeconomic survey was undertaken to gain insight into household and community socio-economic
baseline conditions within each of the project sites. Detailed surveys were carried out based on tools
developed by the team. A cross-sectional descriptive method of data collection and analysis was
employed. The main quantitative data collection approach was a survey with the aid of a questionnaire.
Several variables were assessed within the questionnaire which were clustered under major themes that
included; socio-demographic characteristics, household economy and livelihood resources, community
gender dynamics, land access and ownership, community sanitation, hygiene and health, project impacts
among others.
3.4.2.1 Selection of sample size
According to the UBOS population projection of 2019, the population of Pangira Sub-County is estimated
at 20,300 people. Therefore, with a district household size of 5.1 people, it is estimated the number of
households in Pangira Sub-County is projected at 4,060 and of those, 1,104 (0.2719%) households are
located in the 10 core villages that make up Pangira RGC. Therefore, using the Cochran (1963, 1975)
equation, assuming 90% confidence level and 5% level of precision, the sample size of 214 households
was determined.
𝑍 𝑃𝑄
=
𝑒
1.645 × 0.2719 × (1 − 0.2719)
𝑛 =
0.05
2.706025 × 0.2719 × 0.7281
𝑛 =
0.0025
0.53571282459975
𝑛 =
0.0025
𝑛 = 214
However, a total of 199 households were interviewed representing 92.9% of the determined sample. The
households were randomly selected and household heads were targeted and selected as the major
respondents in this survey since they have sufficient required information. In cases where the household
heads were absent their spouses were selected.
3.4.2.2 Sampling procedure for qualitative data collection
Purposive sampling was used to select participants with relevant information to this study. National level
interviews/consultations were undertaken with relevant stakeholders and lead agencies. NEMA was
consulted through a scoping report and proposed Terms of Reference for their review and guidance.
NEMA reviewed and subsequently approved the Tors for this study. The Ministry of Gender Labour and

Social Development, Office of the Prime Minister (Department of Refugees) and Uganda National Roads
Authority (UNRA) were other stakeholders and lead agencies engaged.
The sample at the district level included; the Chief Administrative Office (CAO), LC V Chairman, District
Natural Resources Officer, District Environment Officer, District Community Development Officer, District
Land Officer, District Engineer, District Physical Planner and District Water Officer.
The sub-county sample included: Sub-County Chiefs, Community Development Officers, LC III
Chairpersons and area council representatives of parishes traversed by the scheme.
3.4.2.3 Methods of Socio-economic Data Collection
The methods described in this section were used during data collection.
 Community meetings. One community meeting was held in Pagada village. This
technique involved small groups of respondents (usually 6 - 12 respondents) who were
interviewed together in a common location. The meeting had fifteen (15) participants. Of
those, 12 are male while 3 are female. The interviewers led the discussions and ensured
that every person had an opportunity to respond. Community meetings allowed deeper
examination of complex issues than other forms of survey research.
 Focus Group Discussions: Three focus group discussions were carried out; one during
the reconnaissance and two during the detailed survey and a total of eighteen people
participated. Of those, fourteen (14) are male while the other four (4) were female. These
were used to enhance data obtained within the selected clusters where interviews and
community meeting were held
 Photography and direct observation. This was used to capture scenarios important to
the study that can sometimes best be explained through visual effects, for example, the
quality of life of residents in the project area can be explained by visually showing the
kind of shelter in which they live. Observation was used by the sociologist to determine
observable variations such as economic activities among others.
 Household surveys. Structured household questionnaires used to generate household
demographic data, livelihood activities, access to water sources, household water use,
distance to nearest service centers (education, health, administrative), gender relations,
migration patterns, ethnicity among other parameters. Basic descriptive analysis of
collected data has been carried out and presented in tabular form to aid description of
various parameters.
3.4.2.4 Cultural Resources Assessment
As per World Bank OP/BP 4.11, Physical Cultural Resources recognized field based study methods for
documentation and protection of cultural heritage were applied together with none field methods in this
particular project. These include:
a) Desktop Survey

A desktop search was undertaken to compile a comprehensive inventory of known sites of cultural
heritage significance within the Study Area. This also aimed at determining the potential of the project
area in regards to archaeological and cultural heritage. The search included the review of available
literature such as published and unpublished papers, records, and historical documents through public
libraries, archives, other government departments such as data and maps from the Department of
museums and monuments. Details of the utilized secondary data sources is provided in the bibliography
part of this report. As the Study Area, Northern Uganda in general has not been adequately studied
before, an archaeological survey was undertaken to define the cultural heritage resources baseline of the
Project area.
b) Community Engagement
In order to make community part of the project, local assistants/guides and local council one leaders were
used during the archaeological survey in the project area. The involvement of the local assistants was
because they are well acquainted with the project area. More importantly, they own the heritage and
hence have full knowledge of physical cultural resources in and around the project area. For this
assessment, a local community member who worked as field guides was able to guide the baseline
survey team to the different components of the project. A list of the persons engaged is herein appended
as appendix 8.
c) Stakeholder consultations and interviews
Consultations were conducted at the district level, Sub County level and Village level. These were inform
of group focused meetings with the affected villages and individuals. The major aim was to note the
people’s concerns in regards to their culture and cultural resources that might be affected by the proposed
development. Consultations were conducted at Lamwo district, Lokung Sub County, Pagada and Latida
villages and the supply area, Pangira trading Centre (see Appendix II). The community members and
leadership at all levels were instrumental in guiding to some of the recorded sites. The information
provided forms part of this report.
Figure 3.2: A= Consultations at Lokung Sub County HQs, B= Consultations meeting in Pagada 1 village
d) Field visit and archaeological Survey

Northern Uganda has not been adequately archaeologically researched in comparison with other parts
of the country. This therefore prompted a pedestrian survey/walking along the project areas and facilities.
This was intended to identify, locate and record any site/object of archaeological significance on the
ground. Systematic survey was applied in areas where visibility was clear. In the bushy part of the project
area with tall grass and trees unsystematic survey was applied. The construction activities would involve
excavation works and therefore potential impact on unknown archaeological deposits may be caused.
The information obtained from the survey is used to evaluate the potential cultural heritage impacts
associated with the Project.
Figure 3.3: Archaeological survey and examining of the grinding hollows in Pagada 1
e) Test Pit Excavations
To determine the presence or absence of any archaeological deposits and the cultural history/settlement
sequence of the area, test pit excavations were conducted. Test pit conducted measured 1x1 m, one test
pit was conducted in Pagada 1 village along the main pipe line from the water source to the reservoir.
This test pit was conducted in an area thought to be of least disturbance from the current human activities
of farming. The test pit was also conducted to test for the best alternative location of the project with
minimum effects on cultural resources. Results of the excavated test pit unit is explained in this report. A
recent cut pit was also examined for archaeological strata near borehole 2 (BH2) but no cultural materials
were recorded.

Figure 3.4: A recent pit excavation examined for archaeological strata in Pagada 2 village
f) Data analysis.
The data collected from the interviews and field-walking surveys was analyzed using the qualitative
method. This provided information on the perception and attitudes of the stakeholders as to the proper
procedures in the conduct of project operations and actions to be taken whenever cultural property is
encountered during project activities. The few recorded archaeological materials were first analyzed in
the field at their depositional context.
g) Report writing
After the data analysis, the cultural heritage assessment report was written containing the Chance Finds
Procedure and contractor code of practice. This report also entails the stakeholder consultations and
baseline condition of the project area
3.4.2.5 Data Quality Control Measures
To ensure the quality of data, firstly the questionnaire was digitised and uploaded on the servers of the
Kobo Collect open kit data collection platform. This platform allowed for designing of the questionnaire to
include automatic skip patterns or logic which helped the research assistants to collect data for only those
questions that apply to a given household.
The survey employed local research assistants who were of graduate level and comprehensively
understood the local language. Recruitment and selection of the research assistants and field assistants
was done emphasising minimum academic qualifications, experience, socio- cultural compatibility and
gender balance. The research assistants were recruited targeting social scientists with knowledge and
experience of socio-economic and behavioural studies using both qualitative and quantitative methods
as well as ability to speak the local language. These were trained in collecting data using electronic
devices (tablets). The sociologist and research assistants also met frequently to review the day’s field
performance, compare notes and to plan for the next day. This was aimed at enhancing reliability and
consistency of the collected data. The data collection exercise was also coordinated and supervised by
the sociologist.

3.4.2.6 Data Management and Analysis
All data collected was reviewed by the research assistants daily before it was uploaded on the server.
Once uploaded on the server, that data was perceived secure and no data loss was registered. To
conduct analysis, the data was downloaded from the server into the SPSS data analysis software which
was used to analyse the data generating descriptive statistics, i.e., frequencies, percentages, means,
among others which were used to write this socio-economic baseline. For qualitative data, thematic and
content analysis methods were used to analyse data collected.
3.4.2.7 Ethical Considerations
The socio-economic baseline survey was conducted in line with the principles of ethical research conduct.
All data collected was organised and stored securely. All participants’ details presented in this report were
authorised by the participants through giving their consent after the purpose and objective of the baseline
survey had been clearly explained to them.
3.4.3 Biodiversity Assessment-Fauna
Baseline biodiversity data was obtained following recognised methods as dictated by professional
standard methods. A biodiversity Survey was conducted targeting both fauna and flora. Sampling points
were established within the project area to represent all key identified habitats. Table 3.1 below presents
biodiversity sampling points.
Table 3.2: Biodiversity Sampling Points
Point No: Coordinate (36N) Elevation (m) General Habitat Description

A1 466696/0398777 1005 Fallow land recovering from bush fire
A2 463635/0398977 1006 Formerly burnt area with dry vegetation
A3 463883/0398983 1104 Heavily grazed land with bare ground patches
A4 466756/0397208 1105 Settlements with cultivated patches. Sena septabilis is
dominant
A5 465463/0397918 4500 Settled site near Potwach Primary school
The site is dominated by Owor (Acholi) palm tree
A6 0462138/0399893 1004 Fallow land dominated by
Mangifera Indica along the pipeline
A7 0461981/0399779 1002 Fallow dominated by Ficus Nantalensis half burnt along
the pipeline
A8 0465128/0400584 1024 Thick dry burnt undergrowth
Dominated by Mangifera Indica along the pipeline
A9 0464124/0399608 1016 Fallow land with clearly no vegetation observed
A10 0461850/0399478 1005 Site dominated by acaia spp but having a bare ground
A11 0463423/0399451 1012 Habitat with a mixture of Kigelia Africana, Ficus

Nantalensis, Mangifera Indica
A12 0463299/0399436 1012 Site dominated by Acacia spp along the pipeline
A13 0486985/0364415 1121 Site dominated by Kigelia Africana along the corridor

Figure 3.5: Biodiversity Sampling Points overlaid on google map of Pangira project area
3.4.3.1 Butterflies
Transect line followed was along the pipeline corridor which was walked at constant pace, recording all
the butterfly species seen on wings. Individuals that were difficult to identify on wings were taken and
stored for further processing. Opportunistic observations were included to help build the species list. Each
of the butterfly species was assigned to one of the ecological categories as described by Davenport
(1996). The major categories considered included forest dependent species (F), forest edge/woodland
species (f), open habitat species (O), widespread species (W), migratory species (M), and wetland
species (S).
3.4.3.2 Herpetofauna (Amphibians and Reptiles)
Assessment of herpetofauna was done using three main methods as described by Heyer et al, 1994;
Fellers and Freel, 1995; Halliday, 1996; and Olson, et al., 1997.
Visual Encounter Surveys (VES): The method constitutes moving through a habitat watching out for,
and recording surface-active herpetofauna species. VES was supplemented by visual searches, by
examining under logs, leaf litter, in vegetation, and crevices. Species encountered were recorded and
where possible photographed.

Audio Encounter Surveys (AES): This method uses the species-specific calls/sounds/advertising calls
made by breeding males. The identity of the amphibian species heard calling and their numbers was
recorded.
Dip netting: Using a dip net, ponds, pools, and streams and other water collection points were dip netted.
Adult amphibians and tadpoles encountered were recorded at GPS coordinates 36N (466696/398777)
Opportunistic Encounters: Herpetofauna species encountered opportunistically while moving in the

project area recorded.
Apart from individuals heard calling, species encountered were handpicked, identified, and where
possible photographed and released at the point of capture. Identification followed field guides by
Sprawls, S. et al., (2002), and Bill Branch (2005).
3.4.3.3 Birds
Timed species Counts (TSC): Counting birds is best done by standard methods (for example, Bibby et
al, 2000, Pomeroy 1992 and many others). Transects were established at the different main areas
designated for construction of the Project components. Along the transects, timed species counts were
conducted to document the bird species heard or seen. The strategy for the surveys was to search for
and conduct the observations in selected areas that still carried some natural vegetation cover. All such
areas that were visited had semi-natural land-cover remaining along the project areas.
All species were recorded, whether detected by sight or sound, and at any distance within the sampled
habitat. Observations were mainly made between 07.00am and 12.00pm when bird activity is high.
Analyses included assessment of likely impacts on various categories of birds, especially those of
conservation concern, and thus contribute to mitigation proposals. GPS coordinates were recorded to
precisely georeferenced the survey sites (Appendix 1 and 3). Occasional reference was made to the
Stevenson and Fanshawe (2002) field guide to identify birds.
In order to simplify data and to produce a meaningful pattern, birds were further categorised using IUCN
and The Bird Atlas criteria as outlined in the table below.
Table 3.3: Categories of birds according to their IUCN status and habitat requirements
Category Description Abbreviation

Forest  Forest specialists FF
 Cannot survive outside the primary forest
 Forest generalists. F
 They can live in the forest and at the forest edge or a
degraded forest
 Don’t live in the forest f
 They come to the forest as ‘visitors’
Water  Species restricted to wetlands/open waters W
 They cannot survive outside an aquatic environment
 Non-specialist water birds often found near water w
 Facultative water birds


Grassland &  They live in grassland habitats NF
Agricultural Cultivation  They are generally widely spread in all habitats but tend to
avoid forests
 They are species that can be found in cultivated areas like
gardens, fallow lands and settlements
Least Concern  Bird species that are listed to be of least concern according LC
to the IUCN red list of threatened species
Vulnerable  Bird species whose populations are listed to be of VU
vulnerability according to the IUCN red list of threatened
species
Near threatened  Bird species that are listed to be nearly threatened numbers NT
according to the IUCN red list of threatened species
Endangered  Bird species that are listed to be endangered in numbers EN
according to the IUCN red list of threatened species
Globally critical  Bird species whose populations are listed to be globally G-CR
critical according to the IUCN red list of threatened species
Regionally critical  Bird species whose populations are listed to be regionally R-CR
critical according to the IUCN red list of threatened species
Globally vulnerable  Bird species whose populations are listed to be globally G-VU
vulnerable according to the IUCN red list of threatened
species
Regionally vulnerable  Bird species whose populations are listed to be regionally R-VU
vulnerable according to the IUCN red list of threatened
species
Globally lower risk,  Bird species that are listed to be globally lower risk, near G-LR/nt
near threatened threatened according to the The Bird Atlas of Uganda
Regionally Near  Bird species that are listed to be regionally near threatened R-NT
threatened according to the The Bird Atlas of Uganda
Globally  Bird species that are listed to be globally endangered in G-EN
Endangered numbers according to the The Bird Atlas of Uganda
Regionally  Bird species that are listed to be regionally endangered in R-EN
Endangered numbers according to the The Bird Atlas of Uganda
Globally range-  Bird species that are listed to be globally range-restricted G-RR
restricted according to the The Bird Atlas of Uganda
Species of regional  Bird species that are listed to be of regional responsibility R-RR
responsibility according to the The Bird Atlas of Uganda
Breeding  Occasional breeder OB
 Resident breeder (Species that are residents and breed RB
from within their permanent locality)
 Resident, breeding not proved but likely R(B)
 Former breeder FB
Migrant Species  Migrant breeder MB

 Migrant, breeding not proved (but likely) M(B)
 Intra-African migrant, breeding AfM/B


 Intra-African migrant, breeding not proved (but likely) AfM/(B)
 Intra-African Migrant, not breeding AfM/NB
 Regular passage migrant PM
 Regular Winter Visitor WV
 Resident non-breeder RN
 Occasional Winter Visitor OW
 Accidental Visitor or vagrant AV
Introduced species  These are species that are not indigenous to Africa I
(Uganda) but were just introduced
Not Evaluated  Bird species whose population status has not yet been NE
evaluated.
3.4.3.4 Habitat
Habitat-type divisions using Britton (1980) and Birds of Africa (1982-1992) were adopted as follows: FF-
Forest specialists; f-Forest visitors; OM-Open habitat migrants; FFH-Highland forest specialists; fH
Highland forest visitors; WM-Widespread migrants; FFL-Lowland forest specialists; fL-Lowland forest
visitors, FM-Forest generalist migrants; F-Forest generalists; A-Aquatic/swamp species.
3.4.3.5 Mammals
Mammals’ surveys were carried out in the project area using three methods:
Direct observation/opportunistic encounters:

All mammals seen or opportunistically sighted while moving in the project area were identified, counted
and recorded;
Use of footprints and/or dung or calls:

Mammal species whose footprints and dung could be recognized was recorded for their presence;
Local consultations:
Residents within the project area were consulted about the presence of mammal species in the area.
Mammal identifications will be based on Kingdon (1974), Delany (1975) and Kingdon et al. (2013).
3.4.3.6 Biodiversity Assessment-Flora
Identification of plant species was done at three locations thus the supply source, along the transmission
mains and at the distribution sites. Sampling points were selected at different intervals to cover all the
identified ecological zones along the transmission mains and then nested quadrats were established at
sampling points.
Site specific vegetation descriptions and classifications were determined based on species dominance
and floral features such as herb, shrub and tree land coverage at each sampling point. At the sampling

points, considerations of 25x25 m plots for woodlands & forest; 10x10 m shrubs, 1x1 herbs/grasses for
swampy & marshy vegetation, thickets and bushy vegetation were adopted.
Plant species were assessed against the IUCN red data lists (IUCN 2019) and nationally threatened
species for Uganda (WCS, 2016) to determine their conservation significance. Where such species were
encountered geo-referenced records were noted. Also of interest was the occurrence of invasive species
in or near the project sites. Species of plants that were not easy to identify in the field were collected as
voucher specimens for taken for identification at Makerere University Herbarium.
3.5 Impact Identification and Analysis

Identification of impacts has followed the project life cycle using a checklist supplemented by professional
judgment. Baseline studies conducted through diverse methods including review of existing thematic
literature, detailed field observations, interviews and consultative meetings. These formed the basis for
detailed field observation, structured interviews and consultative meetings.
3.5.1 Determining Impact Significance
Evaluation of impact significance has followed a modified approach. Identified risks and impacts were
evaluated by first determining the “level of risk or impact”, rated based on defined extent, duration, and
magnitude, as the evaluation criteria. The level of risk or impact was then assessed against the probability
of occurrence to determine its “level of significance”.
Level of risk or impact
To determine the level of risk or impact, the criteria was defined/described as follows:
Extent: the spatial area of occurrence/influence of the impact on the subject environment or size of
community/population or number of people affected, as defined in Table 3.6
Table 3.4: Rating of extent of impacts
Score Biophysical Environment Socio-economic Environment

1 Site (the impact is restricted to the boundaries of the Affects a few individuals within the proposed
project work sites) project area and the potentially affected
communities (Direct area of influence)
2 Local (affecting habitats or land that are within the Entire potentially affected communities (direct
project area, that are of no immediate national or area of influence)
international importance)
3 Sub national (affecting habitats or ecosystems that may Affects populations in Lamwo District
support species of regional importance, impact on an
individual of species that may have a national
designation, but the impact is only on sub national and
not national population).
4 National (effects on local population of species or Affects or raises concern at national level.
ecosystems that have effects on the national population)
5 International (greenhouse gases, transboundary or Affects or raises concern at the international
shared ecosystems, migratory species) level.

Duration: This evaluates the period of contact between the impact and the receptors both biophysical
and socio-economic. The impact could be short term, medium term, or long term and permanent.
Table 3.5: Rating impact duration
Score Duration
1 Temporal (<1 month)
2 Short term (1-6 months)
3 Medium term (More than 6 months – 1 year)
4 Long term (mainly operational impacts that end when the project ends)
5 Permanent (Impacts that may exist after ceasing plant operations/ after decommissioning)
Magnitude: The magnitude of an impact on an environmental or social value is an assessment of the

geographical extent, duration and severity of the impact.
Table 3.6: Rating Impact Magnitude
Score Biophysical Environment Socio-economic Environment

1 Minor (the impact on the environment is not There is no perceptible change to people’s health,
detectable) wellbeing, or livelihood
2 Low (the impact affects the environment in such a People/communities are able to adapt to the
way that natural functions and processes are not impact with relative ease and maintain pre-impact
materially affected) livelihoods
3 Moderate (where the affected environment is People/communities are able to adapt to the
altered but natural functions and processes impact with some difficulty and maintain pre-
continue, albeit in a modified way) impact health, wellbeing, and livelihood status but
only with a degree of support
4 High (where natural functions and processes are People/communities are able to adapt to the
altered however it will temporarily impact with a lot of difficulty and maintain pre-
cease/regenerate) impact health, wellbeing, and livelihood status but
only with a high degree of support
5 Very high (where natural functions and processes Affected people/communities will not be able to
are altered that it will permanently cease) adapt to changes while continuing to maintain pre-
impact health, wellbeing, or livelihood.
Using criteria defined above, the level of risk or impact (L) will be determined by combining its extent (E),
duration (D) and magnitude (M) using the formula:
L = E+D+M. The calculated level of risk or impact will then be scored and rated as shown below
Table 3.7: Impact Rating for level of risk or impact
Score Calculated value Impact Rating

1 3 Negligible
2 4-6 Low
3 7-9 Medium
4 10 and above High
The final “level of significance of risks and impacts” will then be assessed by combining the level of impact
and its Likelihood of occurrence (probability) defined in Table 3.10,

Table 3.6: Rating of probability of occurrence of risks and impacts
Score Likelihood of occurrence Description

(Probability)
1 Not likely The possibility of the impact occurring or materializing is very low as a
result of design or baseline characteristics
2 Low There is a possibility that the impact will occur, however the chance is
much less than 50 percent
3 Medium The chance that the impact will or will not occur is the same.
4 High It is most likely that the impact will occur

5 Very High The impact will occur regardless of the implementation of any prevention
or corrective actions
Significance: The Matrix below presents the criteria for scaling the significance of impacts of the
proposed road project.
Table 3.7 Criteria for scaling impact significance
Impact scale Descriptors

Major a. Irreversible, widespread, covering local, regional, and global indirect influence
area.
b. Will lead to high mortality of important endangered species on site and off site.
c. Exceeds limits set by environmental standards both national and international.
d. Major contribution to known global environmental problem with tangible effects.
e. Causing widespread nuisance both onsite and offsite.
f. Leading to the release of hazardous wastes which lethal effects in the
environment.
g. Permanent loss of livelihoods for entire community.
h. Leaves permanent and irreparable scars on the landscape.
Moderate a. Noticeable effects on the environment which are reversible over the long term
b. Localized degradation of resources restricting potential for further usage
c. Limited effects on locally or globally endangered species with no long-term effects
on their reproduction and migratory behaviors.
d. Increased pollution of water bodies in the short term but drops with time
e. Noise and air pollution above maximum levels accepted in the environment.
f. Disruption of livelihoods in the short term but no long-term effects.
g. Leads to a repairable scar on the landscape but reparable over time
Minor a. Noticeable effect on the environment but returning naturally to original state in the
medium term.
b. Minimum degradation of resources but does not constrain future use
c. Disruption of the behavior of threatened/endangered species but returns to normal
in the short term.
d. Release of periodic particulate matter that is circulated in the short term
e. Intermittent noise nuisance
f. Changes in water and air quality levels not above maximum acceptable limits.
a. No noticeable or limited local effect on the biophysical environment that rapidly
Insignificant returns to its original state.
b. Unlikely to lead to any changes in ambient air and water quality.
c. Unlikely to affect resources in any noticeable way.
d. No anticipated effect on livelihoods
e. Will not change the landscape in any way.

Table 3.8: Impact Significance Matrix
Likelihood of Occurrence
Very High High Medium Low Very Low
5 4 3 2 1
High 4 Major 20 Major 16 Moderate Moderate 8 Minor 4
12
Level of Risk/Impact
Medium 3 Major 15 Moderate Moderate Minor 6 Minor 3

12 9
Low 2 Moderate Moderate Minor Minor 4 Insignificant
10 8 6 2
Negligibl 1 Minor 5 Minor 4 Minor 3 Insignificant Insignificant
e 2 1

4 POLICY, LEGAL, INSTITUTIONAL AND REGULATORY

FRAMEWORK REVIEW
In this chapter, the policies, laws, regulations and institutional framework within which the large scale
solar powered water supply and sanitation project will be implemented are explained. National laws are
explained along with relevant multilateral environmental agreements (MES) to which Uganda is a party.
The section also explains the Key sectoral agencies and institutions with mandate to monitor and enforce
compliance with legal provisions.
4.1 National Legislation and Regulations

The following is a summary of key policy, legal and regulatory requirements that will be relevant to the
proposed project:
4.1.1 Policies and Plans applicable to the Project
Table 4.1: Summary of policies and plans applicable to the proposed project.
Policies or Brief description and its key provisions Relevance in the Project
Plans
The National This policy aims to promote sustainable economic The developer has undertaken an
Environment and social development. ESIA is one of the vital tools ESIA for the proposed project, for
Management the policy advocates to ensure environmental quality which this ESIS has been prepared.
Policy, 1994 and resource productivity on long-term basis. This is
also reaffirmed in the National Environment Act No 5
of 2019 which makes ESIA a requirement for projects
listed in the fifth schedule including water supply
systems.
According to Vision 2040, for Uganda to shift from a
Uganda peasant to an industrialized and largely urban This project will enhance availability
Vision 2040 society, it must be propelled by improved water of portable water to project
supply systems accompanied by improvements in communities and address
sanitation. sanitation challenges both at
household level and in institutions.
The National The goal of the National Equal Opportunities policy is Discrimination and stigmatization,
Equal to provide avenues where individuals and groups’ which acts as a barrier for
Opportunities potentials are put to maximum use by availing equal marginalized and other groups of
Policy 2006 opportunities and affirmative action. people in the project area to
accessing employment and support
The policy objectives amongst others are to: opportunities will be eliminated
 Guide the planning processes, affirmative throughout all project
action, and implementation of programmes implementation phases. This entails
and allocation of resources to all equitable access to services by
stakeholders. workers employed at the project.
 Guide the establishment of legal, policy and Access to piped water will enhance
institutional frameworks of all stakeholders. opportunities to the physical
 Provide a framework for assessing challenged.
responsiveness of programmes and
activities to equal opportunities, in
redressing any imbalances therein.

Plans
 Empower marginalized and vulnerable
groups for their full participation in all
development processes.
Enhance capacity of implementing agencies to
provide quality services with a view to monitoring
compliance with affirmative action and the
constitutional provisions.
The National The overall goal of this policy is to maintain an The proposed water source is near
Policy on optimum diversity of uses and users and a wetland and provisions for
Conservation consideration of other stakeholders when using management of this habitat shall be
and wetland resources. The objectives of this policy followed.
Management include; establishing the principles by which wetland
of Wetland resources can be optimally used now and in future; to
resources end practices, which reduce wetland productivity;
1995 maintaining the biological diversity of natural or semi
natural wetlands; maintaining wetlands functions and
values; and integrating wetlands concerns into the
planning and decision making of other sectors. This
policy outlines guidelines for wetland resource
developers.
The National The objective of the policy is to provide guidance on The proposed large solar water
Water Policy, development and management of the water supply project shall be developed in
1999 resources of Uganda in an integrated and sustainable line with the requirements of the
manner, so as to secure and provide water of policy. Routine monitoring by the
adequate quantity and quality for all social and relevant Directorates shall be
economic needs, with full participation of all carried out in line with their
stakeholders and mindful of the needs of future mandates
generations.
The National The overall goal of this policy is to maintain an The proposed project will have
Policy on optimum and sustainable diversity of uses and users transmission and distribution lines
Conservation and consideration of other stakeholders when using crossing wetlands. Also, some
and wetland resources. The objectives of this policy material source sites might be in or
Management include establishing the principles by which wetland adjacent to wetlands.
of Wetland resources can be optimally used now and in future; to All proposed project implementation
resources end practices, which reduce wetland productivity; activities have to adhere to this
1995 maintaining the biological diversity of natural or semi policy requirements and undertake
natural wetlands; maintaining wetlands functions and proper impact assessment to
values; and integrating wetlands concerns into the ensure adverse impacts on the
planning and decision making of other sectors. This wetland ecosystems are adequately
policy outlines guidelines for wetland resource mitigated.
developers.
National The policy emphasizes early intervention to prevent The contractor in liaison with Local
Policy on re-victimization of and long-term effects for girls, Council officials (especially
Elimination of including interpersonal violence, sexual coercion, Subcounty Community
Gender Based alcohol and drug abuse and mental health problems, Development Officers) will
violence, 2016 reporting cases of violence against children undertake initiatives to do away
immediately. with Gender Based Violence-GBV
cases relating to project
implementation activities.

Plans
The Uganda The land policy addresses the contemporary land All the land acquisition for project
National Land issues and conflicts facing the Country. The vision of components which are to be
Policy, 2013 the policy is: “Sustainable and optimal use of land installed on private land will be
and land-based resources for transformation of conducted following an approved
Ugandan society and the economy” while the goal of Resettlement Action Plan (RAP),
the policy is: “to ensure efficient, equitable and while involvement and discussions
sustainable utilization and management of Uganda’s with UNRA and the District Local
land and land-based resources for poverty reduction, government are required to
wealth creation and overall socio-economic streamline the implementation of
development”. components like transmission pipes
in the road reserve (public land).
National Climate change is a global challenge that requires a The project design needs to ensure
Climate concerted effort by all nations. This National Climate measures are put in place to
Change Change Policy (NCCP) is Uganda’s integrated manage the effects of climate
Policy, 2015 response to climate change. It has been prepared change, while implementation
and designed within the context of the country’s activities will have to ensure the
vision and national development priorities; it provides GHG emissions are kept low and
a clearly defined pathway for dealing with the enhance opportunities for GHG
challenges of climate change within the socio- emissions reduction.
economic context of Uganda, and looks ahead to the
opportunities and benefits of a green economy.
The goal of the policy is to ensure a harmonized and
coordinated approach towards a climate- resilient and
low-carbon development path for sustainable
development in Uganda. The overarching objective of
the policy is to ensure that all stakeholders address
climate change impacts and their causes through
appropriate measures while promoting sustainable
development and a green economy.
The National The goal of the National Equal Opportunities policy is Discrimination and stigmatization,
Equal to provide avenues where individuals and groups’ which acts as a barrier for
Opportunities potentials are put to maximum use by availing equal marginalized and other groups of
Policy 2006 opportunities and affirmative action. people in the project area to
The policy objectives amongst others are to: accessing employment and support
opportunities will be eliminated
a. Guide the planning processes, affirmative action, throughout all project
and implementation of programmes and implementation phases. This entails
allocation of resources to all stakeholders. equitable access to services by
b. Guide the establishment of legal, policy and workers employed at the project.
institutional frameworks of all stakeholders.
c. Provide a framework for assessing
responsiveness of programmes and activities to
equal opportunities, in redressing any
imbalances therein.
d. Empower marginalized and vulnerable groups for
their full participation in all development
processes.
e. Enhance capacity of implementing agencies to
provide quality services with a view to monitoring
compliance with affirmative action and the
constitutional provisions.

Plans
The National This policy establishes the environmental health Environmental health encompasses
Environment priorities of the Government of Uganda and provides a wide range of subjects but in the
Health Policy a framework for the development of services and Ugandan context is concerned
2010 programmes at national and local government levels. primarily with water supply,
It has been developed in support of the National sanitation, and hygiene promotion;
Health Policy and primarily concerns the role of the solid, liquid, hazardous waste
Ministry of Health. However, environmental health is management; air pollution control;
a cross-cutting discipline, and the policy therefore has food safety and hygiene; the control
implications for other departments and agencies. of insect vectors and vermin;
occupational.
Uganda The Uganda Gender Policy mandates the Ministry of The contractor will be encouraged
Gender Policy Gender, Labour and Social Development and other to adopt an equal opportunity
2007 line Ministries to mainstream gender in all sectors. employment policy and to
incorporate gender aspects and
considerations in the recruitment
process for both skilled and non-
skilled labour force as far as
applicable during the project
lifecycle.
The National The policy aims at guiding multi-sectoral approach to In line with this policy, the
HIV/AIDS HIV/AIDS control in the country. Section 3.4 of the contractor in liaison with different
Policy, 2004 policy talks about Impact mitigation at individual to local council and Local government
community level. The policy aims at providing officials such Community
psychosocial and economic support to all those Development Officers and
infected and directly affected by HIV & AIDS. The HIV/AIDS Focal Personnel among
epidemic has severe short- and long-term effects on others will ensure mainstreaming
various population categories on development efforts HIV/AIDS interventions into project
at household, community, sector, and national levels. plans and implementation activities.
The impact on the labour force in the various sectors The measures are aimed at
in communities and households affects productivity, stemming the new infections,
household income and savings. Objective of this curtailing their spread and
section in the policy is to minimize the socio- stigmatization of victims of
economic consequences of HIV & AIDS on the HIV/AIDS among the project
population and promote involvement of the infected workforce and neighbouring
and affected in the development efforts. Subsection I communities
under Policy Strategies it specifically requires
workplace policies in both public and non-public
formal and informal sectors to be appropriately
reviewed to cater for HIV&AIDS prevention & care
issues in the workplace.
National The National Policy on Disability in Uganda aims at With limited skills characteristic of
Policy on promoting equal opportunities for enhanced most PWDs, accessing
Disability empowerment, participation, and protection of rights employment is a major challenge.
2006 of PWDs irrespective of gender, age and type of Most potential employers do not
disability. This is in recognition that PWDs can give chance to PWDs to compete
perform to their full potential given the same for employment even where they
conditions and opportunities irrespective of their have the necessary qualifications
social, economic, and cultural backgrounds. The and experience. During recruitment
Policy is to guide and inform the planning process, of workers to be employed to
resource allocation, implementation, monitoring and undertake construction activities,
some PWDs will apply for some

Plans
evaluation of activities with respect to PWDs jobs and the contactor should give
concerns at all levels. consideration to the PWDs
applicants who qualify for such jobs
The Uganda It provides strategies to enhance the integration of Cultural leaders and local leaders
National culture into development. These strategies include need to be involved and consulted
Culture Policy advocating for culture, ensuring capacity building, during the ESIA process for the
2006 ensuring research and documentation, promoting proposed project activities so that
collaboration with stakeholders, and mobilizing they can help guide the process
resources for culture. These strategies are an integral especially on which natural-
part of the Social Development Sector Strategic historical and traditional collections
Investment Plan (SDIP) whose mission is to create could be preserved based on their
an enabling environment for social protection and cultural importance or historical
social transformation of communities. relevance in the project
implementation process.
The National The plan provides guidance to the nation in delivering The project implementation will
Development the aspirations articulated in Uganda Vision 2040 for follow the ESMP put forward in this
Plan III the period 2020/21 – 2024/25. The Goal of NDPIII is ESIS to ensure sustainable
attaining Increased Household Incomes and utilisation of natural resources and
Improved Quality of Life of Ugandans, under the mitigation of likely impacts on the
theme: “Sustainable Industrialization for inclusive environment.
growth, employment and wealth creation”. NDPII
aims to stop, reduce and reverse environmental
degradation and the adverse effects of climate
change as well as improve utilisation of natural
resources for sustainable economic growth and
livelihood security.
4.1.2 Laws applicable to the proposed project
Table 4.2: Summary of laws applicable to the proposed project
Laws Brief description and its key provisions Relevance in the Project
The The Constitution requires that the project be The proposed project activities will be
Constitution of implemented without endangering human health undertaken while ensuring safe and
the Republic of and the environment. healthy environment is maintained as
Uganda, 1995 provided for in the Constitution.
The National Specifically, its Fifth Schedule lists projects that The proposed project falls under
Environment require mandatory ESIAs to be done before Schedule 5 for projects which require
Act 2019 implementation, hence the need for this ESIA to mandatory ESIAs before implementation,
be prepared for the proposed project. as such, the need to conduct this study.
The Land This Act provides for acquisition of land after its The key consideration regarding this Act
Acquisition Act, valuation and along approved procedures which in the project is to ensure landowners
1965 ensure adequate, fair, and timely compensation to affected by the project are adequately
the landowners. The Act requires that adequate, and timely compensated.
fair, and prompt compensation is paid before
taking possession of land and property. Dispute
arising from the compensation to be paid should
be referred to the court for decision if the Land
Tribunal cannot handle

The Land Act, The Land Act, Cap 227 of 1998 provides for the Proposed project activities will be
Cap 227, of tenure, ownership, and management of land. implemented with the footprint covering
1998 Under Section 44 the Government or the local both private and public land. Therefore,
government shall hold land in trust for the people land acquisition needs to follow the
and protect natural lakes, ground water, natural provisions of the Act.
streams, wetlands and any other land reserved for
ecological purposes for the common good of
Ugandans.
The Physical An Act to consolidate the provisions for the orderly This is a relevant Act to the proposed
Planning Act and progressive development of land, towns, and project activities. Different provision of
2010 other areas, whether urban or rural. In respect of this act will be implemented during the
and every area declared to be a planning area under different phases (construction and
section 5, there shall be a planning committee or operation) of the proposed project.
The Physical planning committees. This planning committee
Planning shall be the municipal council or shall consist of
(Amendment) such persons as the board, after consultation with
Act 2020 any local authority concerned, shall appoint for
town areas and rural areas respectively.
Section 2A of the Amendment provides a right to
clean and health environment. And every
Ugandan has a duty to create, maintain and
enhance a well-planned environment. Any result
of act or omission by any person likely to breach
a physical development plan or physical planning
standard report to relevant authorities or file a civil
suit against any person whose act or omission has
breached or likely to breach a physical
development plan or physical planning standard.
National The Act gives the force of law in Uganda to the The project design needs to ensure
Climate United Nations Framework Convention on measures are put in place to manage the
Change Act, Climate Change, the Kyoto Protocol, and the effects of climate change. When the
2021 Paris Agreement; provides for climate change District Climate Action Plan is developed,
response measures; provides for participation in implementation activities will have to
climate change mechanisms; provides for ensure alignment.
measuring of emission, reporting and verification
of information; provides for institutional
arrangements for coordinating and implementing
climate change response measures; provides for
financing for climate change; and for related
matters.
The Uganda In order to support sustainable utilization of Considering that some of the water pipes
Wildlife Act, wildlife for the benefit of the people of Uganda, the will go through remote section of the
2019 purpose of the Act among others is to provide for countryside involving clearing of
the conservation of wildlife throughout Uganda so vegetation, and excavation of land to
that the abundance and diversity of their species create holes etc, this Act is quite relevant,
are maintained at optimum levels commensurate and relevant provisions should be
with other forms of land use. complied forthwith for project
implementation.
The Historical The Act provides for the preservation and Some objects of cultural and/or historical
Monuments protection of historical monuments and objects of significance might be
Act, 1968 archaeological, paleontological, ethnographical, encountered/affected during project
and traditional interest and for other matters

connected therewith. The Act requires that any implementation and their preservation is
chance finds encountered during project called for by this act.
construction shall be preserved by the
Department of Monuments and Museum in the
Ministry of Tourism, Wildlife and Antiquities.
The Public Under this Act, the Minister may cause to be made The provisions of this Act will be relevant
Health Act, Cap such inquiries as he or she may see fit in relation for the project implementation activities
281 to any matters concerning the public health in any such as construction civil works,
place. When such a directive is made, the person establishment of ancillary facilities such
directed to make the inquiry shall have free as workers camps, material holding
access to all books, plans, maps, documents and areas, equipment storage/parking yards
other things relevant to the inquiry and shall have as well as maintenance of project
in relation to witnesses and their examination and machinery to control incidences of
the production of documents similar powers to occupational health and safety accidents,
those conferred upon commissioners by the among others. Construction activities will
Commissions of Inquiry Act, and may enter and take all possible mitigations to make sure
inspect any building, premises or place, for the that, all impacts to human and
purpose of inquiry. environment are avoided and where not
possible or in case of accident, there will
be compensation.
The Water Act The Act provides for the use, protection and Abstraction of water for the project will
Cap, 152 1997 management of water resources and supply in follow the provisions of the Act including
Uganda. The Water Resources Regulations of obtaining an abstraction permit from the
1998 established under this Act stipulates a DWRM. Any disposal of waste shall also
requirement to apply for a permit to construct, need to be in line with the waste
own, occupy or control any works on or adjacent discharge regulations; proper
the land as per Regulation 10. management of fuel/oil spills is essential
for minimizing chances of water
contamination
The National The Act provides for the conservation, sustainable The project will encourage tree planting
Forestry and management and development of forests for the as part of its integrated catchment
Tree Planting benefit of the people of Uganda. It also provides protection and management measures.
Act, 2003 that the Central Government or local government
shall hold in trust for the people and protect forest
reserves for ecological, forestry and tourism
purposes for the common good of the citizens of
Uganda.
Traffic and Section 119 of the Traffic and Road Safety Act The contractor will ensure that all project
Road Safety stipulates that every person who uses, parks or machinery (construction equipment and
Act, Cap.361 stands a motor vehicle, trailer or engineering plant material haulage fleet) observe traffic and
on any road carelessly or without reasonable road safety procedures including
consideration for other persons using the road observing minimum speed limits, routine
commits an offence. maintenance and observing road signs
among others. Additionally, more safety
measures such as traffic
guides/controllers, humps and road
signage will be adopted to ensure safety
of all road users during project
implementation activities as guided by
this Act.

The Roads Act, The Act prohibits erection of any building or The project developer will apply to the
2019 planting of any trees or placing of pipelines within appointed road authority to carry out
the road reserve except with a written permission activity in the road reserve while also
of an appointed road authority. stipulating measures for restoration upon
completion of project activity.
The The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 2006 The employer (contractor) must protect
Occupational makes provisions for the health, safety, welfare, the health and safety of all project
Safety and and appropriate training of persons employed in workforce by providing them with all
Health Act, workplaces. requisite PPEs, safety training, clean and
2006 healthy work environment, sanitary
conveniences, washing facilities, First
Aid facilities, clean drinking water, and
meals among others throughout the
project implementation phases in
accordance with this act.
The Workers’ The Act outlines matters of compensation for The employer (contractor) must protect
Compensation injuries and accidents as well as the responsibility the health and safety of all project
Act, Cap. 225 of employees to take care of their health and workforce by providing them with all
safety while on the project. requisite PPEs, safety training, clean and
healthy work environment. The Act seeks
to safeguard the workers and ensure that
they are appropriately compensated in
case of injuries resulting from project
implementation activities.
The This Act is the governing legal statutory This Act is relevant in that, it addresses
Employment instrument for the recruitment, contracting, matters of engagement of workers and
Act, 2006 deployment, remuneration, management, and their rights while at work. The contractor
compensation of workers. It provides for matters shall adhere to the provision of this Act for
governing individual employment relationships in all project-related recruit of workforce.
terms of circumstances of provision of labour. It is
quite explicit on matters of forced labour that, no
one should be forced to work, there should be no
discrimination with regard to recruitment process,
and it prohibits sexual harassment in employment.
Children Act The Act defines a child as a person below the age Child labour is to be prohibited during
Cap 59 of 18. It lists the right for children to be with their project implementation activities i.e., no
parents, circumstances under which they should employment of children below 18 years
not, foster care and adoption procedures as well for all the project implementation
as mandates of local authorities and roles of activities.
community.
Domestic The Act provides for the protection and relief of This act gives guidance to the contractor
Violence Act victims of domestic violence; provides for the and their workers on how to handle cases
2010 punishment of perpetrators of domestic violence of domestic violence.
and spells out procedures and guidelines to be
followed by the courts in relation to the protection
and compensation of victims of domestic violence
as well as matters relating to cases of domestic
violence in general.
The Survey Section 23 of the Act also points out In line with the project footprint and land
Act, 1964 compensation for injury done by clearance during requirements, it is necessary to
the act of survey. For the purpose of the undertake land survey for this project, as

topographic survey of the project site this act will guided by the Act and conducted by a
be relevant in this project. registered surveyor authorized by the
commissioner for surveys in Ministry of
Lands, Housing and Urban Development.
Access to The Act aims to promote an efficient, effective, Upon approval of this ESIA Study by
information Act transparent and accountable Government; give NEMA and the World Bank, the report will
2005 effect to article 41 of the Constitution by providing have to be published by NEMA and the
the right to access to information held by organs Project developer on their respective
of the State, other than exempt records and websites to enable stakeholder access to
information; protect persons disclosing evidence the pertinent information.
of contravention of the law, maladministration or
corruption in Government bodies; promote
transparency and accountability in all organs of
the State by providing the public with timely,
accessible and accurate information; and
empower the public to effectively scrutinise and
participate in Government decisions that affect
them.
Section 5 of the Act highlights the right of access
to information and records in the possession of
the State or any public body, except where the
release of the information is likely to prejudice the
security or sovereignty of the State or interfere
with the right to the privacy of any other person.
4.1.3 Regulations and Standards applicable to the proposed project
Table 4.3: Summary of regulations and standards applicable to the proposed project
Regulations or Brief description and its key

Relevance in the Project
standards provisions
The National The National Environment Management The proponent has undertaken this ESIA
Environment Authority (NEMA) issued Environmental study with particular focus on the content
(Environmental Impact Assessment Regulations, 2020, for specified within the First Schedule of these
and Social conduct of ESIAs, which are now part of Regulations.
Assessment) the Environmental Legislation of Uganda.
Regulations,
2020
Water Resources The Regulations apply to motorized water The project implementation will follow the
Regulations, abstraction from boreholes or surface conditions set out in the regulations. The
1998 watercourses or diverting, impounding, or Contractor will be required to abide by
using more than 400m3 of water within a provisions of this law in regard to water usage
period of 24 hours. and conservation during use for construction
civil works and associated project facilities
such material yards, workers’ camps among
others.
The National These Regulations guide on the The some of the proposed project
Environment development procedures to be followed components will cross through wetlands.
(Wetlands, where developments are to be undertaken Likewise, the material source sites might be
Riverbanks and in wetlands, riverbanks, and lakeshores. in or adjacent to wetlands.
Lakeshores


Management) All proposed project implementation activities
Regulations have to adhere to these regulations
2020. requirements and undertake proper impact
assessment to ensure adverse impacts on
the wetland ecosystems are adequately
mitigated. In addition, where applicable the
project will acquire wetland use permits for
any activity specified in the second schedule
of the regulations.
Draft National Air Considering that construction equipment A number of proposed project activities such
Quality and machinery are powered by diesel/ as material haulage, material extraction of
Standards, 2006 gasoline engines, pollutants such as CO2, both murram and stones, construction works
NOx, SOx, VOC, and particulates are among others will likely impact on the local
expected to be emitted. The draft National ambient air quality. Guided by provisions of
air quality standards provide the following these standards, the contractor will adopt
regulatory limits for these emissions. appropriate measures to minimize, mitigate
and prevent air quality deterioration resulting
from project implementation activities.
Draft East African The Draft East African air quality Proposed project activities including haulage
Standards 2021 standards gives permissible limits of some of construction materials,
common pollutants found in polluted air, trenching/excavation, extraction of gravel
namely sulphur dioxide (SO2), carbon during the construction phase have the
monoxide (CO), dust in terms of potential to release gaseous pollutants
suspended particulate matter as TSP, regulated by the regulations. The use of of
PM10 and PM2.5, oxides of nitrogen (NO, diesel powered generators to supplement
NO2 and NOX), hydrocarbons (HCs), HEP will also potentially contribute to
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs), pollution during the operational phase
Ozone (O3) and particulate lead (Pb). The
standard covers both the ambient air and
emission sources
The National These Regulations apply to all categories Certainly, waste will be generated during
Environment of hazardous and non-hazardous waste, project implementation activities especially
(Waste storage and disposal of hazardous waste from contractor facilities such as camps,
Management) and their movement into and out of material yards, among others. The contractor
Regulations, Uganda and to all waste disposal facilities, guided by these regulations will ensure that
2020 landfills, and sanitary fills and to all generated wastes throughout all project
incinerators. implementation phases are appropriately
managed/disposed of.
National These regulations provide standards for Proposed project activities will certainly
Environment effluent discharge. Schedules 2, 3 and 4 generate effluent waste. The contractor
(Standards for detail maximum permissible limits for should employ appropriate measures to
Discharge of regulated contaminants, which must not manage effluent waste generated by project
Effluent into be exceeded before effluent is discharged activities especially ancillary facilities such as
Water or on Land) into water or on land. workers’ camps, material yards, mechanical
Regulations, workshops and construction site among
2020 others.
The National Part III Sec. (1) requires machinery Indisputably, implementation of proposed
Environment operators to use the best practicable project activities and other associated
(Noise Standards means to ensure that the emission of noise activities will trigger noise generation. These
and Control) does not exceed the permissible levels. standards shall however be applied to keep


Regulations, The main noise receptors at the project the noise levels in permissible limits as well
2003 sites fall under category B and C. For as mitigating noise generation at the source.
category B (residential buildings) emission
limits are 50 dBA for day and 35 dBA
during the night. Category C Mixed
residential (with some commercial and
entertainment) has limits of 55 dBA during
the day and 45dBA at night
National According to WHO, Second-hand smoke Requirements of these regulations should be
Environment (SHS) is a human carcinogen for which fulfilled by the contractor through instituted
(Control of there is no "safe" exposure level 1. To
structures especially within construction site
Smoking in Public avoid public health risk from SHS, Uganda
Places) enacted this Regulations to regulate and workers’ facilities such as changing
Regulations, smoking in public places. Under this law, a rooms, resting areas, dinning among others,
2004 public place is defined as, "any place to to avoid exposure of workers to tobacco
which members of the general public or Second Hand Smoke and associated health
segments of the general public ordinarily risks.
have access by express or implied
invitation and includes any indoor part of a
place specified in this schedule". These
places include, office buildings,
workplaces, eating areas, toilets and
public service vehicles. The regulations
task owners of such places to designate
"NO SMOKING" and "SMOKING AREAS"
in premises. In this project, these
regulations will apply to areas communally
used by construction workers such as site
offices, eating areas in camps and workers
transport vehicles.
4.2 Requisite Permits, Licenses and Authorizations

Several approvals and licenses will be required before commencement of construction activities while
some prior to particular activities during project implementation. Securing of approvals requires
preparation of the relevant documentation and payment of fees. This needs to be done during
mobilization to ensure that all approvals are secured in a timely manner to avoid construction delays.
Table 4.4 below presents the required authorizations.
Table 4.4: Requisite Permits and Authorizations during Construction
Permit/ Authorization Institution Purpose Responsibility When
1 Ground Water DWRM Ensure MWE & Con Mobilization

Abstraction Permit Sustainable water tractor
resource use and
Compliance with
the law.

2 EIA certificate and NEMA Ensure that Contractor Mobilization

Approval conditions for environmental and period
the campsite social impacts,
risks of projects
are considered in
projects
implementation
(sustainable
development) and
compliance with
national regulation
and protect the
environment
3 EIA Certificates for NEMA Regulate Contractor Before
Borrow areas operations at exploitation
borrow pits
4 Certificate of Registration Ministry of Regularize work Contractor Mobilisation
of Work place for Camp Gender, Labour place and ensure
and Social compliance with
Development labour laws
6 Surface Water Directorate of Monitor and Contractor Mobilization

abstraction permits Water Resources regulate surface
Management water use
(Ministry of Water
and Environment
7 Waste Water Discharge NEMA Monitor discharge Contractor Mobilization
Permit of pollutants from
facilities
8 Licence to emit noise in NEMA Authorization to Contractor All phases
excess of permissible emit noise in
noise levels excess of
permissible noise
levels.
9 Statutory certification of Department of Ensure safety and Contractor Mobilization
lifting equipment Occupation functionality of
Safety and equipment
Health - Ministry
of Gender,
Labour and
Social
Development
10 Work Permits for all Directorate of Regularize foreign Contractor Throughout the
foreign workers Citizenship and project staff project period.
Immigration

Control. Ministry
of Internal Affairs
11 Owners Transport Transport Permit Owner to Contractor Routine
Vehicles (OTV) license Licensing Board operate passenger
Ministry of Works services
and Transport
12 Hazardous waste NEMA Onsite storage of Contractor Ongoing
storage, transportation hazardous waste
and disposal license. (e.g., used oil).
13 Building Plan Approval Adjumani District The plan must Contractor Mobilization
(Workers camps, Local conform to
Workshops and other Government regulatory
structures to be used as standards for
operation areas or human occupancy.
accommodation for staff)
14 Approval of RAP Chief Compensation and MWE and During
Government temporary Contractor mobilization
Valuer resettlement of
affected individuals
15 Certificate of Registration Ministry of Regularize work Contractor Mobilization
of Work Place for the Gender, Labour place and ensure
water office and Social compliance with
Development labour laws
16 Certificate of registration Ministry of Regularize work Contractor Mobilisation
of a workplace for Gender, Labour place and ensure
transmission and and Social compliance with
distribution network Development labour laws

4.3 International Agreements, Protocols, Conventions and Others
Uganda is party to several global and regional environmental conventions, protocols and agreements as
described below:
4.3.1 The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD):
Uganda is a signatory and ratified this convention. The major objective of the convention is in-situ and
ex-situ conservation of biological diversity. Parties to this convention are required to undertake ESIA for
projects likely to have significant adverse effects on biodiversity and are required to develop national
plans and programmes for the conservation and sustainable use of biodiversity.
4.3.2 The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and
Flora (CITES):
This convention seeks to ensure that international trade in species of wild fauna and flora does not
threaten their survival in wilderness. Species on the CITES lists are considered of conservation concern.
4.3.3 The Ramsar Convention on Wetlands, 1971:
This convention on wetlands of international importance especially as waterfowl habitat (or Ramsar
Convention 1971) as amended in 1982 and 1987 was ratified by Uganda in 1988.
4.3.4 United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), 1992
The Convention requires parties to avoid adverse effects on the environment and adopt measures and
policies to control carbon dioxide emissions in technologies, taking into account their common, yet
differentiated responsibilities, as well as their specific national and regional development priorities,
objectives and circumstances. They are required to take climate change considerations into account, to
the extent feasible, in their relevant social, economic and environmental policies and actions, and employ
appropriate methods, for example impact assessments, formulated and determined nationally, with a
view to minimising adverse effects on the economy, on public health and on the quality of the environment
of projects or measures undertaken by them to mitigate or adapt to climate change.
4.3.5 Strategic Approach to International Chemicals Management (SAICM)
The Strategic Approach to International Chemicals Management (SAICM) is a landmark initiative in

international cooperation to protect human health and the environment. Its development was endorsed
by Heads of State and Government at summits in Johannesburg in 2002 and in New York in 2005.
The Strategic Approach provides a policy framework to guide efforts to achieve the Johannesburg Plan
of Implementation goal that, by 2020, chemicals will be produced and used in ways that minimize
significant adverse impacts on environment and human health.
SAICM comprises the Dubai Declaration on International Chemicals Management, expressing high-level
political commitment to SAICM, and an Overarching Policy Strategy which sets out its scope, needs,
objectives, financial considerations underlying principles and approaches and implementation and review
arrangements. Objectives are grouped under five themes: risk reduction; knowledge and information;
governance; capacity-building and technical cooperation; and illegal international traffic.

4.4 World Bank Operational Policies (OPS)
The large solar powered piped water supply system and sanitation facilities to be constructed under
IWMDP interventions in Pangira Sub county in Lamwo District will be funded by the World Bank, which
has Environmental and Social Safeguard policies that are designed to avoid, mitigate, or minimize
adverse environmental and social impacts of projects supported by the World Bank. The operational
policies triggered in this project are summarized in Table 4.5 below:
Table 4.5: Summary of how the planned project activities trigger WB OPs
Safeguard Policies Triggered/ Remarks

Not
Triggered
Environmental Assessment Triggered The proposed project may have adverse environmental and
OP/BP 4.01 social impacts through its infrastructure activities, particularly civil
works for water supply and sanitation. The project alignment goes
through rural growth centres with a number of activities and
therefore potential impacts relating to influx of labour, drainage,
traffic, noise generation among others are likely. In general, the
project falls under Category B of the World Bank´s Environmental
Assessment classification of projects requiring an ESIA/ESMP
given that its potential of moderate environmental and social
impacts will be site specific, few if any are irreversible, and in
most cases mitigation measures can be readily designed.
Natural Habitats OP/BP Triggered There will be potential loss or degradation of natural habitats
4.04 including riparian and wetland habitats, due to the planned
construction works for transmission and distribution lines in these
ecologically sensitive areas.
The likely impacts on the natural habitats have been assessed as
part of the ESIA and appropriate mitigation measures included in
the ESMP
Forests OP/BP 4.36 Not Triggered The proposed site for project implementation and the immediate
neighbourhood do not have any forest or land gazetted as forest
reserve.
Pest Management OP 4.09 Not Triggered No application of pesticides is envisaged in the project.
Physical Cultural Triggered The project will involve excavations and there are chances of
Resources OP/BP 4.11 inadvertently finding PCRs. Chance Finds Procedure has been
developed as part of the ESIA to guide in managing of PCRs
should they be found during project implementation.
Indigenous Peoples OP/BP Not triggered No known Indigenous Peoples exist within the project area.
4.10
Involuntary Resettlement Triggered The project will involve land acquisitions for sites planned for the
OP/BP 4.12 water sources and reservoirs. Therefore, the project-related land
acquisition and restrictions on land use can have adverse impacts
on communities and persons; and in particular, for this project,
economic loss is possible. Acquisition of land should be through
free, prior and informed consent; and the potentially affected
persons should have the right to refuse land acquisition or
restrictions on land use that can result into displacement. In order
to guide proper implementation of the involuntary resettlement

Safeguard Policies Triggered/ Remarks

Not
Triggered
aspects of the project, a Resettlement Action Plan has been
prepared in parallel with this ESIA.
Safety of Dams OP/BP 4.37 Not Triggered This OP is not triggered because the project works do not involve
dam related works.
Projects on International Not Triggered The project does not affect international water ways. The source
Waterways OP/BP .50 of water supply for this project are two boreholes.
Projects in Disputed Areas Not Triggered There are no disputed areas along the project corridor.
OP/BP 7.60
World Bank Policy on Triggered There is need for disclosure of information to all the project
Access to Information stakeholders through the sharing of information with stakeholders
(2015) such as district technocrats, Town council/ Sub County leaders,
Local council leaders, and communities among others during the
consultations process. Project information will remain accessible
by them.
4.5 World Bank EHS guidelines
The World Bank has a number of sector-based EHS guidelines below, many of which are applicable to
various components of the proposed project namely:
i. Water and Sanitation

ii. Air emissions
iii. Hazardous waste management
iv. Noise
v. Occupational health and safety.
vi. Community health and safety including traffic safety such as during project construction or
disease prevention
vii. Construction and decommissioning.
While most of above WBG guidelines apply to the proposed project in one way or the other, in sections
below are discussed five environmental, health and safety (EHS) guidelines that are of relevance to the
proposed project, namely:
a) EHS Guidelines -Water and Sanitation

b) EHS Guidelines –Air Emissions and ambient air quality
c) EHS Guidelines –Waste Management
d) EHS Guidelines –Hazardous Materials Management
e) EHS Guidelines –Construction and decommissioning
The study will explicitly and adequately evaluate all the occupational health and safety aspects of the
proposed project activities for all implementation phases including health and safety aspects of project
workforce and the general public (construction phase). Appropriate mitigation measures will be
recommended for adoption at relevant stages of project implementation.
4.5.1 WBG EHS Guidelines: water and sanitation
The EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation include information relevant to the operation and
maintenance of:

i. Potable water treatment and distribution systems

ii. Collection of sewage in centralized systems (such as piped sewer collection networks) or
decentralized systems (such as septic tanks subsequently serviced by pump trucks) and
treatment of collected sewage at centralized facilities.
The EHS guidelines outline Industry specific-impacts and their management that comprise;
i. Environmental issues associated with water and sanitation projects may principally occur during the
construction and operational phases, depending on project-specific characteristics and components
a) Drinking water – water withdrawal, water treatment, water distribution,
b) Sanitation – faecal sludge and septage collection, sewerage (Domestic wastewater
discharges, Industrial wastewater discharges, Leaks and overflows), Wastewater and
Sludge Treatment and Discharge (Liquid effluents, Solid waste, Air emissions and
odours, Hazardous chemicals, Ecological impacts).
ii. Occupational Health and Safety during the construction and decommissioning of Water and Sanitation
facilities. Occupational health and safety impacts associated with the operational phase of water and
sanitation projects primarily include the following:
a) Accidents and injuries
b) Chemical exposure
c) Hazardous Atmosphere
d) Exposure to pathogens and vectors
e) Noise.
iii. Community health and safety impacts during the construction of water and sanitation projects are
discussed including;
a) Drinking Water - Water Intake (Water Supply Protection), Water Treatment (Drinking Water
Quality and Supply, Hazardous Chemicals) and Water Distribution.
b) Sanitation - Wastewater and Septage Collection (Preventing sewerage system overflows,
Preventing build-up of potentially toxic and explosive gases in the sewer), Wastewater and
Sludge Treatment (Liquid effluents, Air emissions and odours, Physical hazards)
4.5.2 WBG EHS Guidelines: Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality
These guidelines require projects with “significant” sources of air emissions, and potential for significant
impacts to ambient air quality to prevent or minimize impacts by ensuring that emissions do not result in
pollutant concentrations that reach or exceed relevant ambient quality guidelines and standards by
applying national legislated standards (or in their absence, the current WHO Air Quality Guidelines, or
other internationally recognized sources). Uganda currently has (draft) national air quality standards
applicable to this project.
In these guidelines “significant” refers to sources which can contribute a net emission increase of one or
more of the following pollutants within a given air shed:
i. Particulate matter of size 10 microns (PM10): 50 tons per year (tpy).

ii. Oxides of nitrogen (NOx): 500 tpy.
iii. Sulphur dioxide (SO2): 500 tpy; or as established through national legislation.
iv. Equivalent heat input of 50 MWt or greater.

This ESIA study will exhaustively explore the air quality aspects relating to project implementation, most
importantly, the major air pollutions sources (gaseous and dust emissions), receptors and elaborate on
mitigation and monitoring measures to curb/prevent air quality impacts.
The study further recommends continuous monitoring to regularly track the deviations in air quality
parameters and thus apply appropriate mitigation measures in a timely manner.
4.5.3 WBG EHS Guidelines: Waste Management
In relation to the proposed water supply and sanitation project works, this guideline provides for
construction waste generated by and throughout all implementation phases. Large waste volumes will be
generated especially at project/construction site, material holding/stockpile yards, site workshop and
construction equipment parking lot, batching plant, temporarily contractor workforce shelters among
others. The guidelines advocate for waste management planning where waste should be characterized
according to composition, source, types, and generation rates. These guidelines call for implementation
of a waste management hierarchy that comprises prevention, recycling/reuse, treatment, and disposal.
The guidelines require segregation of conventional waste from hazardous waste streams. Examples of
hazardous construction waste are waste oil from vehicles and machinery paint waste, thinners, and
concrete wash water (e.g., from cleaning concrete mixers).
The implication for this project is that poor management of construction waste would pose environmental
and public health impacts. The contractor will have a contractual obligation to ensure proper construction
waste management.
4.5.4 WBG EHS Guidelines: Hazardous Materials Management
These guidelines apply to projects that use, store, or handle any quantity of hazardous materials
(Hazmats), defined as materials that represent a risk to human health, property, or the environment due
to their physical or chemical characteristics. Hazmats can be classified according to the hazard as
explosives; compressed gases, including toxic or flammable gases; flammable liquids; flammable solids;
oxidizing substances; toxic materials; radioactive material; and corrosive substances.
Facilities which manufacture, handle, use, or store hazardous materials should establish management
programs that are commensurate with the potential risks present. The main objectives of projects
involving hazardous materials should be the protection of the workforce and the prevention and control
of hazardous chemicals releases and accidents. These objectives should be addressed by integrating
prevention and control measures, management actions, and procedures into day-to-day business
activities. Implementation of the proposed project activities involves handling of hazardous materials such
as fuel and lubricants, paint, compressed gas cylinders especially at the construction site, fuel storage
area and mechanical workshop among others.
4.5.5 WBG EHS Guidelines: Construction and Decommissioning
1) Environment:
 Noise and Vibration: During construction and decommissioning activities, noise and vibration
may be caused by the operation of material haulage fleet, earth moving and excavation
equipment, concrete mixers, cranes and the transportation of equipment, materials, and people.

 Air Quality: Project will involve excavations and handling of construction materials such as
aggregates, sand, cement among others and this could generate fugitive dust affecting adjacent
environs. A secondary source of emissions may include exhaust from diesel engines of earth
moving equipment, as well as from open burning of construction waste.
 Solid Waste: During project implementation, non-hazardous solid waste generated at
construction sites including domestic waste and other wastes such as wood and metals.
 Hazardous Materials: Fuel, lubricating oils and other forms of hazardous waste may be
encountered.
2) Occupational Health and Safety
Likely OHS risks during the proposed project include over-exertion, slips, and falls, work at heights, hot
works (welding), and electrocution, being struck by objects, injury by moving machinery and dust from
demolition and construction activities.
3) Community Health and Safety
The guidelines recommend implementation of risk management strategies to protect the general
community from physical, chemical, or other hazards associated with sites under demolition, construction,
and decommissioning.
4) Traffic Safety
Project activities may result in a significant increase in movement of heavy vehicles for the transport of
construction materials and equipment increasing the risk of traffic-related accidents and injuries to
workers, local communities and road users.
4.6 Gap Analysis between World Bank Safeguards Policies and Uganda’s Environmental and
Social requirements (as adopted and updated from the IWMDP ESMF (2018) and UCSAP
ESMF (2022)
Uganda has a relatively robust Environment Management Regulatory regime based on sectoral laws
supported by a framework National Environment Act No5 of 2019. The Constitution of the Republic of
Uganda provides the basis upon which all these regulatory instruments are derived. Enshrined in the
constitution is the Right to health and clean environment for every citizen. The constitution demonstrates
the high regard for environment management. Recent amendments of the National Environment Act Cap
153 to the current National Environment Act No 5 of 2019 has brought the Regulatory regime closer to
World Bank Environment and Social Safeguard Policies due to the fact that World Bank support has been
key to evolution of the regulatory regime in Uganda. Because of the close interaction, most of the
environmental requirements are largely influenced by the World Bank’s Environmental and Social
Safeguard Policies.
It is worth noting that environmental management in Uganda has been largely supported by the World
Bank, right from the development of the National Environment Management Policy in 1994, the National
Environment Act 2019 and the accompanying Regulations, including the establishment of NEMA. Owing
to this, most of the environmental requirements are largely influenced by the World Bank’s Environmental
and Social Safeguard Policies. Most of the provisions of OP 4.01 were adopted and as such the E&S

screening and assessment methodology is virtually the same as seen in the Uganda’s EIA Guidelines of
1997 and Regulations 2020. Therefore, in cases where gaps are found between the WB E&S Safeguards
Policies and the Government of Uganda Environmental requirements, the World Bank Safeguard Policies
shall take precedence especially on matters which are not explicitly provided in the National Legislation
requirements.
Differences do exist for example, the Ugandan Laws do not provide for Framework Approach (ESMF and
RPF) but rather only specific instruments (ESIA, ESMP, Environmental Audits, RAPs). Whilst Uganda´s
ESIA systems are relatively strong on biophysical considerations, they are weaker regarding assessment
of social and related issues. Whereas the WB Policies provide for independent review mechanism (the
Inspection Panel), there is no explicit requirement for independent review of ESIA reports under Uganda’s
laws, though the ESIA Regulations (2020) provide for a reference to relevant experts who may be
consulted to provide specialist knowledge and to assist with understanding and interpreting technical
aspects of the project. Furthermore, there is no applicable legislation on a minimum wage. Aspects of the
Employment Act contradict other Ugandan laws, by allowing for the employment of children aged 14 for
“light work” under adult supervision, in contradiction to Section 7 of the Children (Amendment) Act (2016)
which sets the employment age at 16. The Employment Act does not clearly define hazardous
employment. The legal framework also fails to provide penalties for the violation of laws prohibiting the
employment of minors, contributing to high school drop-out rates, teenage pregnancies, and health issues
as children find work on project sites. .1
Under OP 4.04 Natural Resources, Uganda lacks Regulations to implement the National Forestry and
Tree Planting Act and the Wildlife Act. Therefore, OP 4.04 and OP 4.36 on Forests shall be used to
assess any impacts on natural habitats. On OP 4.11 Physical Cultural Resources, the Ugandan legal
framework is limited in scope. For example, it does not cover certain aspects such as the intangible
heritage. The other area is under OP 4.12 (Involuntary Resettlement) whereby Uganda’s Land Act legal
framework is restricted to fair, adequate and prompt compensation (cash), while the World Bank policy
requires the need to provide alternative land, resettling the Project Affected Persons (PAPs) to levels or
standards of livelihood similar to or better than before compensation. The Ugandan legislation also does
not provide for restoration of livelihoods, resettlement assistance and compensation at replacement
value. Under circumstances like these regarding short-comings in the Uganda law on compensation and
ESMF process, the provisions of OP 4.12 shall be applied.
The existing gaps are summarized in the tables below:
1
Uganda Social Risk Management (SRM) Technical Paper (2019)

Table 4.6: Summary of Gap Analysis between Uganda and World Bank Safeguards
World Bank’s Uganda’s Legal and Regulatory Framework Gaps identified in Uganda legal and regulatory Provisions for this ESIA
Safeguard framework
Policies
Environmental  National Environment Management Policy, 1994.  Independent review is not specifically provided for The WB (as a financing
Assessment  National Environment Act No.5 of 2019. under ESIA Regulations of Uganda and as a result, the agency has to review reports
(OP 4.01) review of ESIAs is commonly reviewed by government to ensure compliance with
 National Environment (Environmental and Social
agencies; E&S regulations and approve
Assessment) Regulations, 2020.
 In the EIA review process, there is no specific them before releasing the
legal/regulatory framework that caters for examination funding)
of the quality of the ESIA reports. Only conditions of
approval/reasons for non-approval of ESIAs are
provided by NEMA;
 There are no administrative mechanisms for appealing
a decision taken on an EIA.
Natural  The Constitution 1995 as amended; There are general gaps which include lack of Regulations to UWA has been proposed as
Habitats (OP  the National Environment Act No.5 of 2019; implement the National Forestry and Tree Planting Act and one of the responsible
4.04) and the Wildlife Act. institutions over the wildlife
 The National Forestry and Tree Planting Act, 2003;
Forests (OP incise animals are identified in
4.36)  The Uganda Wildlife Act 2019; the project area
 The Land Act Cap 227;
 The Fish Act Cap 197;
 The Plant Protection Act Cap 31.

Physical  The Constitution1995 as amended  The legal framework is limited in scope. For example, it A Chance Findings Procedure
Cultural  The National Environment Act, 2019 does not cover certain aspects such as the intangible (CPF) has been developed
Resources heritage; and included under section
 The Historical Monuments Act, Cap 46
(OP 4.11)  There is no strong institution to regulate and manage 9.3.13 to guide on the process
 The Institution of Traditional or Cultural Leaders Act, 2011
heritage resources;
 The sites and monuments are not adequately
maintained, documented and in addition, some of the
antiquities are not collected;
 There is limited enforcement of the legal framework
related to Physical Cultural Resources in Uganda
because most developers and government officials do
not understand the importance of conserving physical
cultural resources.
The current Historical Monuments Act is being reviewed to provide for an efficient law for the protection of the cultural resources of the country.
The new law shall be inclusive of all aspects of culture, the tangible, intangible heritage of the country. The revised Environmental and Social
Impact Assessment Regulations provide that risk assessment should include risks to cultural heritage.
Table 4.7: Gaps between World Bank and Ugandan legislation applicable to OP 4.12 Involuntary Resettlement
Category of PAPs/ Type Provisions for this ESIA and

Ugandan Law OP 4.12 Gap Analysis
of Lost Assets/ Impact ensuing RAPs
Land Owners The Constitution of Uganda, 1995 World Bank Policy recognises the The Ugandan law does Alternative land (wherever available)
recognizes four distinct land tenure rights of those affected people: not compensate those or Cash compensation at full
systems, Customary tenure, Freehold  Who have formal legal rights to without legal right or claim replacement value or (based on
tenure, Leasehold tenure and Mailo land the land or assets they occupy or to the land. market value + 15% to 30%
tenure. use. disturbance allowance).
Land is valued at open market value and a  Who do not have formal legal WB OP 4.12 does not All forms of tenancy based on formal
15% to 30% disturbance allowance must be rights to land or assets, but have consider disturbance or informal rights.
paid if six months or less notice is given to a claim to land that is recognized allowance.
the owner.


Cash compensation is the recommended or recognizable under national Uganda laws and the WB In kind compensation should be
option. law. OP 4.12 are consistent in offered as an option to the PAPs
 Who have no recognizable legal compensation at full where (alternative land is available for
right or claim to the land or assets replacement cost and the PAPs).
they occupy or use. cash compensation.
Compensation of lost assets at full
replacement costs.
Cash compensation is recommended
where there are active land markets
and livelihoods are not land based.
Land Tenants Leasehold tenure is created either by Must be compensated, whatever the The Ugandan law does Land owners Compensate for land
contract or by operation of the law. The legal recognition of their occupancy. not compensate those and all assets at full replacement cost
landlord grants the tenants or lease without legal right or claim or replacement of land at equal/
exclusive possession of the land, usually for to the land. greater value and compensate for
a period defined and in return for a rent. The other assets.
tenant has security of tenure and a World Bank OP 4.12 does not
proprietary interest in the land. Cash recognize depreciated value for
compensation is based upon market value replacement of assets (which should
of land and disturbance allowance (15- be replaced at market value).
30%). Entitled to compensation based upon
Additionally, 15% disturbance
the amount of rights they hold upon land.
allowance will be given to the PAPs on
top of the compensation.
Land squatters Leasehold tenure is created either by Must be compensated, whatever the The Ugandan law does Squatters are only entitled to
contract or by operation of the law. The legal recognition of their occupancy not compensate those compensation for the development on
landlord grants the tenants or lease without legal right or claim the land and ample time will be given
exclusive possession of the land, usually for to the land. to the PAPs to harvest their crops.
a period defined and in return for a rent. The Additionally, 15% disturbance
tenant has security of tenure and a allowance will be given to the PAPs on
proprietary interest in the land. Cash top of the compensation.
compensation is based upon market value
of land and disturbance allowance (15-
30%). Entitled to compensation based upon
the amount of rights they hold upon land.


Owners of non-permanent Cash compensation based upon rates per Recommends in-kind compensation or OP 4.12 does not provide District compensation rates + 15%
buildings such as kiosks, m2 established at District level, disturbance cash compensation at full replacement for the disturbance disturbance allowance.
butchery shops, wooden allowance (15% or 30%). cost. Recommends resettlement allowance. Ugandan law Cash compensation. Livelihood
shacks for food vendors assistance. does not provide for restoration, including identification of
etc. resettlement assistance. alternative sites.
Owners of permanent Valuation based on replacement value and Compensation at full replacement The Ugandan laws are Cash Compensation at replacement
buildings. guidance from CGV & disturbance cost. consistent with OP 4.12 in value + 15% disturbance allowance.
allowance (15% or 30%). regard to replacement
cost.
Perennial Crops Cash compensation based upon rates per Compensation at full replacement OP 4.12 does not provide Cash compensation using affected
m2/bush/tree/plant established at District cost. for the disturbance District rates + disturbance allowance.
Level and disturbance allowance (15% or Income restoration. allowance.
30%).
Seasonal crops No compensation. 3-6 months’ notice given No specific provision No compensation is expected for
to harvest crops. crops to be harvested. However, in the
event that livelihoods are lost
compensation will be given.
Loss of income No specific provision Livelihoods and living standards are to The Ugandan legislation In the context of this project, practical
be restored in real terms to pre- does not provide for livelihood restoration measures have
displacement levels or better restoration of livelihoods. been proposed.
Both the Ugandan
The 1995 Uganda Constitution stipulates Particular attention should be paid to
Constitution and WB OP
that: “the State shall take affirmative action the needs of vulnerable groups among
4.12 favour vulnerable Special attention will be paid to
in favour of groups marginalised on the those displaced such as those below
groups. However, the vulnerable persons affected and
basis of gender, age, disability or any other the poverty line, landless, elderly;
Vulnerable groups Ugandan law, vulnerable
reason […] for the purpose of redressing women and children and indigenous
groups are not fully necessary measures will be provided
imbalances which exist against them”. This peoples and ethnic minorities.
described in the context of in the entitlement matrix of the RAP.
regulation is not fully described in the
resettlement and land
context of resettlement and land acquisition.
acquisition.


Relocation and Both the Constitution, 1995 and The Land Avoid or minimize involuntary There is no requirement Measures to minimize involuntary
Resettlement Act, 1998 give the government and local resettlement and, where this is not under the Ugandan law to resettlement shall be considered in the
authorities, power to compulsorily acquire feasible, assist displaced persons in minimize land acquisition. RAP following a WB mitigation
land. The Constitution states that “no improving or at least restoring their hierarchy.
person shall be compulsorily deprived of livelihoods and standards of living in
property or any interests in or any right over real terms relative to pre-displacement
property of any description except” if the levels or to levels prevailing prior to the
taking of the land is necessary “for public beginning of project implementation,
use or in the interest of defence, public whichever is higher.
safety, public order, public morality or public
health.”
Livelihood restoration and There are no explicit provisions under Livelihoods and living standards are to Ugandan policy and The project will provide
assistance resettlement or relocation for livelihood be restored in real terms to pre- legislation would need to transition allowance.
assistance. displacement levels or better be aligned with Bank
policy to effectively
guarantee rights of all
affected persons of
involuntary resettlement.
Consultation and There are no explicit provisions for Consult project-affected persons, host While the consultation No gap.
disclosure consultations and disclosure but there are communities and local NGOs, as requirement is inherent in
guidelines issued by separate ministries appropriate. Provide them the ESIA, it contains
(e.g. roads and energy). opportunities to participate in the several differences with
The Land Acquisition Act, planning, implementation, and the requirements of Bank
however, makes provision for an enquiry monitoring of the resettlement policy.
whereby the affected person can make program, especially in the process of
formal written claim and the assessment developing and implementing the
officer is obliged to conduct a hearing procedures for determining eligibility
before making his award. for compensation benefits and
development assistance (as
documented in a resettlement plan),
and for establishing appropriate and
accessible grievance mechanisms.


Grievance mechanism and The Land Act, 1998 states that land Establish appropriate and accessible GRC structures exist Grievance committees to be instituted
dispute resolution tribunals must be established at all districts. Grievance Redress Mechanism. within the Local Councils within the procedure and will not
The Land Act empowers the Land Tribunals of Governance in Uganda, replace the existing legal process in
to determine disputes and it provides for but in most cases, they are Uganda; rather it seeks to resolve
appeal to higher ordinary courts. The Land dysfunctional and issues quickly so as to expedite
Acquisition Act provides for the aggrieved ineffective given the receipt of entitlements and smooth
person to appeal to the limited projects resettlement without resorting to
High Court. knowledge. expensive and time-consuming legal
action. If the grievance procedure fails
to provide a settlement, complainants
can still seek legal redress.
Calculation of According to the Land Act, Cap Bank policy requires: (a) prompt There is no equivalent Market value is based on recent
compensation and 227 (section 77), the value of compensation at full replacement cost provisions on relocation transactions and thus if alternative
valuation for loss of assets attributable to the property is purchased
Customary land shall be the open market assistance, transitional
project; (b) if there is relocation, within a reasonable period of the
value of the unimproved land. Value of the support, or the provision of
assistance during relocation, and
buildings shall be at open market value for civic infrastructure. payment of compensation, it is
urban areas and depreciated replacement residential housing, or housing sites,
The basis of likely that market value will reflect full
cost for rural areas. or agricultural sites of equivalent
compensation replacement value.
productive potential, as required;
The crops and buildings of a non-permanent assessment is not stated However, local inflation in price land or
(c)transitional support and
nature are in the Land Acquisition Act construction materials
development assistance, such as land
compensated at rates set by preparation, credit facilities, training or (an old law due for can affect what is determined as
District Land Boards job opportunities as required, in review), although the replacement cost. If this is not
addition to compensation measures; Constitution provides for reflected in recent transactions,
(d) cash compensation for land when ‘prompt, fair and market value may not reflect
the impact of land acquisition on adequate’ compensation.
replacement value.
livelihoods is minor; and (e) provision (article 26).
of civic infrastructure and community
services as required.

4.7 Institutional Framework
4.7.1 Ministry of Water and Environment (MWE)
The Ministry of Water and Environment (MWE) holds the mandate for ensuring the sustainable utilization
and management of Water resources and the Environment. The Ministry through its various units seeks
to promote and ensure the rational and sustainable utilization, development and effective management
of water and environment resources for socio-economic development of the country. The Ministry through
its directorate as appropriate shall be the focal institution for implementation of the project with all
attendant mitigation measures as presented in the ESIA and further project NEMA approval conditions.
4.7.1.1 Directorate of Water Resources Management (DWR)
Within the Ministry of Water and Environment, the Directorate of Water Resources Management (DWRM)
is responsible for developing and maintaining national water laws, policies and regulations; managing,
monitoring and regulation of water resources. The Directorate is responsible for issuing water use,
abstraction and wastewater discharge permits as well as carrying out Integrated Water Resources
Management (IWRM) activities. Other mandates include coordinating Uganda's participation in joint
management of transboundary water resources and peaceful cooperation with Nile Basin riparian
countries.
4.7.1.2 Wetland Management Department (WMD)
Wetlands Management Department (WMD) is mandated to manage wetland resources and its goal is to
sustain the biophysical and socio-economic values of the wetlands in Uganda for present and future
generations. Given that one water abstraction well is near a wetland, WMD will issue wetland use permits
for activities to be carried out in wetlands and monitor compliance to the conditions of the permit, so as
to ensure sustainable utilisation of wetland resources.
4.7.2 National Environment Management Authority
National Environment Management Authority (NEMA) was designated under the National Environment
Act No.5 of 2019 as the principal agency in Uganda charged with the responsibility of coordinating,
monitoring, regulating and supervising environmental management in Uganda. In this context, NEMA will
be responsible for review and approval of this environmental impact assessment, ensuring proposed
mitigation measures are implemented, monitoring compliance with approval conditions, and ensuring any
other impacts that may arise are mitigated.
4.7.3 Ministry of Lands, Housing and Urban Development
The Ministry of Lands Housing and Urban Development is responsible for the orderly development of
urban and rural areas, planning for the sustainable utilization of land and planning for the adequate
housing for socio-economic development. The MoLHUD, through the Office of the Chief Government
Valuer, and the District Land Boards, provided guidance on land acquisition and property valuation while
undertaking the Resettlement Action Plan. MoLHUD will also issue certificates of titles for land purchased
by and registered to the Government under this project.

4.7.4 Ministry of Gender Labour and Social Development
Ministry is mandated to empower communities to harness their potential through skills development,
labour productivity and cultural growth. The Ministry closely works with the Water and Environment
Ministry to promote social and cultural development through targeted interventions in the water and
sanitation sector. This ministry sets policy direction and monitoring functions related to labour, gender
and general social development. Its OHS Department in the ministry is responsible for inspection and
monitoring occupational safety in workplaces and this could be during project construction and operation
of the laboratory facilities. It is responsible for work place registration and certification of equipment. The
OHS Department in this Ministry will be responsible for undertaking inspections of construction sites to
ensure safe working conditions; issue certification of equipment in compliance with the OHS act and
registration of work places.
4.7.5 Uganda Wildlife Authority
Uganda Wildlife Authority (UWA) is mandated to ensure sustainable management of wildlife resources
and supervise wildlife activities in Uganda both within and outside the protected areas. UWA will provide
guidance for instances where wildlife is encountered during project implementation and undertake any
wildlife capture and relocation activities.
4.7.6 Department of Museums and Monuments (Ministry of Trade, Tourism & industry)
Archaeologists from the department responsible for museums and monuments in this Ministry would be
useful in monitoring road project construction activities, especially trenching for water supply mains and
distribution lines and any other excavation areas to ensure that chance finds or artefacts of cultural
significance are not destroyed.
4.7.7 Ministry of Works /Uganda National Roads Authority
The mandate of Ministry of Works and UNRA is to develop and maintain the national roads network,
advise Government on general roads policy and contribute to addressing of transport concerns, among
others. Some of responsibilities include: management of the National Roads Network; maintenance and
development of the national roads network; and establishing and maintaining road reserves among
others. The Ministry of works and UNRA are key stakeholders under the project because the distribution
lines will run along the road reserve of the roads some of which are under their mandate. Authorization
to construct pipes across roads as well as provide guidance and supervision for the project contractor to
cross roads shall be provided by these entities.
4.7.8 Lamwo District Local Government
The 1997 Local Government Act provides for decentralization and devolution of government functions,
powers and services from the central to Local Governments and sets up the political and administrative
functions of local governments. The Local Governments are responsible for the protection of the
environment in their respective areas of jurisdiction. Local Governments were consulted on projects to
be located within their jurisdiction and on matters that affect their environment. Local government
structures are important for mobilising support for the project as well as monitoring its social-
environmental impacts both during construction and operation phases. At the District Level, the District

Environmental Officers, District Water Officer, District Engineer and Community Development Officers in
the respective areas of project implementation will participate in monitoring the projects to ensure that
mitigation measures are adequate and advise or point out additional compliance requirements following
their inspections. The District Land Boards and Lands Officers will provide support on matters of
compensation or land acquisition.

5 BIOPHYSICAL AND SOCIO-ECONOMIC BASELINE

This section presents the biophysical and socioeconomic environmental baseline of the proposed project
area. Baseline data is presented from the generic to site specific data such that impacts are easily
discerned in relation to project components and actions.
5.1 Physical Environment

5.1.1 Topography
The topography of the project area is characterized by extensive flat landscapes. Lamwo district is
characterized by a very extensive flat plain punctuated with low lying hills superimposed on an extensive
rolling plain to the North. Broad shallow valley landscapes spate the hilly clusters on which extensive
shrubby/scrubby tree vegetation has developed. To the north of the project area, a variegated landscape
is visible with gently rolling plains merging into clustered hilly landscapes graduating into circular
elongated ridges. This spectacular topography is a result of a combination of a complex geology and
ancient denudation processes that have produced a series of magnificent landscapes associated with
rifting and volcanic activity in East Africa. The lower slopes and ridge tops have been progressively
shaped by continued denudation and deposition processes.
Figure 5.1: Map of Pangira RGC showing the Topography

Figure 5.2: Pictures showing topography of the Project Area
5.1.2 Geology and Soils
Pangira site lies within the greater Aswa Zone located within the Basement Complex or Gneissic-
Granolithic Complex comprising of undifferentiated gneisses of Precambrian age made up of granulite
and amphibolite facies rocks of both sedimentary and volcanic origin. Rocks in this belt include granitic
gneisses and well foliated dark gneisses containing biotite and hornblende with several amphibolite
dykes. Other rocks have been identified as banded gneisses, granodiorites and migmatites.
The project site is underlain by exposed rock units (Outcrops) of granolithic properties showing properties
of Gneiss and granitoids. Observed exposed rocks comprise of banded gneiss and mafic and felsic bands
of amphiboles and granites. Cross-folded gneiss rock units were also observed. The highly layered and
banded rock out crops are suspected to be representing alternating layers of sedimentary and
volcanogenic material.
The regional soils in much of Acholi sub region including Lamwo district where Lokung is located, are
derived from prolonged deposition and weathering in-situ and basically fall into a number of series
including Pager series which are basically grey mottled brown medium to low productivity soils, Metu
complex soils comprising of brown sands on steep rocky slopes and are of low productivity.
Visual inspection of the samples, the in-situ soils were found to comprise predominantly brown to blackish
alluvial deposits of silty and sandy clayey nature. These are mainly formed by transportation and
deposition. The proposed project also has soils of the Pajule series which are essentially grey to grey
brown sandy loams over red clay on laterite and are usually shallow and of low productivity. Some
patches have the Kiten catena which are brown loams on rotten laterite rock and of low productivity.

Figure 5.3: Maps of Pangira showing the Geology and Soil types
5.1.3 Groundwater occurrence
Groundwater in Pangira area occurs in basement rocks have undergone deep tropical weathering that
produces an overburden which typically grades with depth from mature residual soil through completely
decomposed and weathered rock to fresh bedrock. Productive aquifers are mainly found in the weathered
bedrock, the regolith overlying the bedrock, and in faults and fractures in the basement (See Figure
below).
Figure 4Groundwater occurrence in basement complex rocks
: Source: NWRA Report
5.1.3.1 Groundwater Recharge
Geomorphology for Pangira water source catchment is generally comprised of raised topography to the
Northern Eastern and with maximum altitude of 1735 masl which reduces gradually through the middle
of the catchment to the North Western to low of 983m asl. This dictates the surface flow pattern in this
catchment.

Lineament structures in the area which dictate groundwater recharge have been mapped out. However,
their orientation don’t seems to be synonymous with topography and surface water flow.
Figure 5: Lineamnts Of Pangira Water Source Catchment
From the Aswa Catchment Management Plan, the groundwater recharge of the entire Aswa Catchment
is estimated to be 1,351MCM/Yr. Based on the popular Version of Aswa CMP, the area of Aswa
Catchment drains an area of 27,677 km2. This gives an annual recharge rate of 48.13 mm which is much
lower than other estimations discussed under rainfall in section 1.3.5 above.
5.1.3.2 Hydrogeological Characteristics
Hydrogeological characteristics for Pangira water source catchment have been assessed based on
extracts from information on existing groundwater maps for Lamwo district and borehole data for Pangira
County from the National Groundwater Database. Main focus of the analysis was on the borehole
lithologies. Attributes of the lithology analyzed included Depth to bedrock, first Water strikes, Main water
strike and Static Water levels.
Results indicate that boreholes in the area are drilled on average 65 m deep with first water strike at 42
mbgl, and a depth to bedrock of 25 mbgl. Observed static water levels (SWL) are on average 20.9 mbgl.
This implies that aquifers are generally confined with groundwater being tapped at the interphase and
from the fractured zones. The borehole yields are generally limited typical of basement complex aquifers
with an average of 2.2 m3hr-1.

5.1.3.3 Hydrochemical Water Quality Analysis
The Socio Economic Baseline survey conducted as part of feasibility study indicated that 68.6%,70.0%
and 82.9% of respondents in Pangira indicated that the color, taste and smell of water was good during
the rainy season respectively. Meanwhile, 68.6%, 61.4% and 78.6% of respondents in Pangira indicated
that the color, taste and smell of water was good during the dry season respectively. Water quality
analysis was conducted on the water samples collected from the two newly drilled boreholes to be used
as the water source for the planned water supply system. Water samples were collected from the wells
drilled as part of the feasibility study at the end of the test pumping period. The samples were analyzed
at the National Water Quality Reference laboratory – Entebbe and all the parameters are well within
range of the National guidelines for drinking water apart from the apparent color and total iron. A summary
of the results adapted from the Feasibility Study Report is shown in the Table below:
Table: National Drinking Standards for both Physical and chemical water quality parameters
Parameter Unit National Standard for untreated DWD77396 DWD77397
portable water (DEAS12:2018)
pH - 5.5-9.5 7.1 7.0
Electrical Conductivity (EC) µS/cm 2500 523 504
Total dissolved Solids(TDS) mg/L 1500 366 353
Total suspended Solids(TSS) mg/L 50 0 0
Color: Apparent PtCo 50 150 0.243
Turbidity NTU 25 4.2 6.6
Total Alkalinity mg/L - 300 295
Calcium hardness: as CaCO3 mg/L 600 105 93
Magnesium hardness: as CaCO3 mg/L 600 115 117
Total Hardness: as CaCO3 mg/L 600 220 210
Magnesium as Mg2+ mg/L 100 28 28
Sodium mg/L 200 32 31
Potassium mg/L 50 5.8 5.3
Bicarbonates mg/L - 366 360
Fluoride-F mg/L 1.5 0.32 0.30
Chloride: Cl- mg/L 250 4.2 3.8
Calcium: Ca2+ mg/L 150 42 37
Iron: Total mg/L 0.5 0.62 0.66
Nitrates: N mg/L 10 0.19 0.27
Nitrites: N mg/L 0.9 0.01 0.01
Ammonia as N mg/L 0.5 0.04 0.06
Phosphates as P mg/L 0.7 0.18 0.18
Sulphate: SO2 -4 mg/L 400 4.8 2.5
5.1.4 Climate
Climate of the greater Northern region displays a rather unimodal long-term pattern though fluid peaks in
May and October. However, contemporary climate change scenarios do greatly modify the general
established pattern with episodes of offseason rainfall and intense heat. Temperatures range from
medium to high temperatures throughout the year.

5.1.2.1 Rainfall
Lamwo District in which Pangira RGC is located, experiences extreme seasonal variation in monthly
rainfall. The rainy period of the year lasts for 10.0 months, from February 15 to December 14, with a
sliding 31-day rainfall of at least 13 millimetres. The month with the most rain in Lamwo is May, with an
average rainfall of 126 millimetres. The rainless period of the year lasts for 2.0 months, from December
14 to February 15. The month with the least rain in Lamwo is January, with an average rainfall of 8
millimetres.
Source:Spark.com
Figure 5.6: Average Monthly Rainfall for Lamwo
5.1.2.2 Temperatures
The mean monthly distribution structure for the minimum and maximum temperatures for the Lamwo is
quite complex. The mean minimum monthly temperatures vary from a low of 17.30C to 12.60C, while the
mean maximum temperatures vary from 27.00C to 34.90C. The highest temperatures have been
recorded in the months of January, February and March, while the lowest temperatures have been
recorded from July, August, September and October
Source: Spark.com
Figure 5.7: Mean Minimum and Maximum Temperatures for Lamwo
5.1.2.3 Insolation
The length of the day in Lamwo does not vary substantially over the course of the year, staying within 19
minutes of 12 hours throughout. In 2022, the shortest day is December 22, with 11 hours, 55 minutes of
daylight; the longest day is June 21, with 12 hours, 20 minutes of daylight.

Source:Spark.com
Figure 5.8: Hours of Day and Twilight
The earliest sunrise is at 6:32 AM on October 28, and the latest sunrise is 31 minutes later at 7:03 AM
on February 6. The earliest sunset is at 6:31 PM on November 8, and the latest sunset is 32 minutes
later at 7:04 PM on July 19.
5.1.2.4 Humidity
Lamwo District experiences significant seasonal variation in the perceived humidity. The muggier period
of the year lasts for 7.7 months, from March 31 to November 20, during which time the comfort level is
muggy, oppressive, or miserable at least 13% of the time. The month with the muggiest days in Lamwo
is May, with 14.3 days that are muggy or worse. The month with the fewest muggy days in Lamwo is
January, with 0.1 days that are muggy or worse.
Source:Spark.com
Figure 5.9: Humidity for Lamwo
5.1.2.5 Solar Energy
The average daily incident shortwave solar energy experiences some seasonal variation over the course
of the year. The brighter period of the year lasts for 2.4 months, from January 12 to March 23, with an
average daily incident shortwave energy per square meter above 6.3 kWh. The brightest month of the
year in Lamwo is February, with an average of 6.6 kWh. The darker period of the year lasts for 2.0

months, from June 5 to August 5, with an average daily incident shortwave energy per square meter
below 5.4 kWh. The darkest month of the year in Lamwo is July, with an average of 5.2 kWh.
Source: Spark.com
Figure 5.10: Average Incident Shortwave Solar Energy for Lamwo
5.1.5 General Climate Change Overview
Temperatures
Average temperatures in Uganda have increased by 1.3°C since the 1960s. Notably, minimum
temperatures have increased 0.5–1.2°C for this period with maximum temperatures increasing by 0.6–
0.9°C. Increased average temperatures have been observed at 0.28°C per decade since 1960 (USAID
2012). Daily temperature observations since 1960 show significantly increasing trends in the frequency
of the number of hot days, and much larger increased trends in the frequency of hot nights. Hot days and
nights are defined as the number of days/nights in which the temperature exceeded on 10% of
days/nights in the current climate of the region and season (Ministry of Water and Environment 2015)
Hot days in Uganda have increased by 74 days (an additional 20% of days) between 1960 and 2003.
The most significant increase has been observed in June, July, August in which hot days increased by
an average of 8.6 days per month. The average number of hot nights also increased by 136 nights since
1960 (an additional 37% of nights) between 1960 and 2003. The most significant increases have also
been observed in June, July, August in which hot nights increased by 14 days per month. The number of
cold days have decreased, by 20 days since
1960, with the rate of decrease most rapid in the September, October, November season.20 Cold days
and nights are defined as the number of days/nights in which the temperature below 10% of days/nights
in the current climate of the region and season (World Bank 2020)
Rainfall

Precipitation for the country is highly variable, but overall, Uganda has experienced a statistically
significant reduction in annual as well as seasonal rainfall. Seasonal rainfall for March, April and May has
been most affected, with decreases of 6.0 mm per month, per decade (USAID 2012). Decline in rainfall
has been observed in some Northern districts of Gulu, Kitgum, and Kotido. While trends in extreme rainfall
conditions are more difficult to define due to the lack of data and seasonal variability, droughts have
increased in Uganda over the past 60 years. Specifically, over the past 20 years, western, northern and
north-eastern regions have experienced more frequent and longer-lasting drought conditions. In the
highly arid, north-eastern district of Karamoja, seven droughts occurred between 1991–2000, with
additional droughts occurring in 2001, 2002, 2005, 2008 and 2011. The percentage of rainfall occurring
from heavy precipitation events is anticipated to increase, which would also escalate the risk of disasters
such as floods and landslides (World Bank 2020). The Project Area has experienced both increasing
drought intensity and heavy precipitation in equal measure highlighting escalation of climate change
stress.
5.1.5.1 Predicted climate change future scenarios
Temperature
Increased temperatures are expected for East Africa and specifically for Uganda. Under a high-emission
scenario, monthly temperature change is expected to increase by 1.8°C for the 2050s and by 3.7°C by
the 2090s. Increased temperatures will also impact increased aridity and the length and severity of the
dry season (December to March). Projected rates of warming are greatest in Uganda’s coolest season:
June to September, with temperatures expected to increase by 1.5 to 5.4°C by the end of the century.
Hot days are expected to occur on 15–43% of days by the 2050s and by 18–73% of days by end of
century. Nights that are considered ‘hot’ (>26°C) are expected to increase more quickly than hot days
(World Bank Group 2020). Temperature rise is projected to increase across all emission scenarios
throughout the end of the century. Under a high-emission scenario, average temperatures will increase
rapidly by mid-century. Across the seasonal cycle, temperature increases will be felt from September to
January. These high heat days will result in significant implications for human and animal health,
agriculture, ecosystems, transport infrastructure as well as energy generation. High temperatures will
certainly affect the road infrastructure
Precipitation
Under a high-emission scenario, monthly annual precipitation is expected to increase in some areas of
the Uganda, with decreases in others, notably the Northern and North-eastern areas. Rainfall is predicted
to increase significantly and consistently for the western shores of Lake Victoria and the central western
region; the Mount Elgon region; and the region extending from Mount Rwenzori to the southern parts of
Lake Kioga. The greatest change in the intensity and frequency of extreme rainfall events is likely to take
place between the current and the midcentury period in this region, which is likely to impact major
agriculture and livestock zones and transportation (World Bank Group 2020). The project area falls under
the Northern belt where precipitation is predicted to increase.

5.1.2.6 Water Quality
Water samples were collected from the well drilled in the scope of the present project at the end of the
test pumping period. The samples were analyzed at the National Water Quality Reference Labaratory –
Entebbe and all the parameters are well within range of the National guidelines for drinking water apart
from Color and Iron that are above the maximum requirement. A summary of the results is shown in the
table below.
Table 5.1: Test Results of Water Samples from the Two New Borehole
National Standard for un treated-

Parameter Unit portable (DEAS12:2018) water DWD77396 DWD77397
pH - 5.5-9.5 7.1 7
Electrical Conductivity (EC) µS/cm 2500 523 504
Total dissolved Solids(TDS) mg/L 1500 366 353
Total suspended Solids(TSS) mg/L 0 0 0
Color: Apparent PtCo 50 150 0.243
Turbidity NTU 25 4.2 6.6
Total Alkalinity mg/L - 300 295
National Standard for un treated-
Parameter Unit portable (DEAS12:2018) water DWD77396 DWD77397
Calcium hardness: as CaCO3 mg/L 600 105 93

Magnesium hardness:
mg/L 600 115 117
as CaCO3
Total Hardness: as CaCO3 mg/L 600 220 210
Magnesium as Mg2+ mg/L 100 28 28
Sodium mg/L 200 32 31
Potassium mg/L 50 5.8 5.3
Bicarbonates mg/L - 366 360
Fluoride-FIro mg/L 1.5 0.32 0.30
Chloride: Cl- mg/L 250 4.2 3.8
Calcium: Ca2+ mg/L 150 42 37
Iron: Total mg/L 0.5 0.62 0.66
Nitrates: N mg/L 10 0.19 0.27
Nitrites: N mg/L 0.9 0.01 0.01
Ammonia as N mg/L 0.5 0.04 0.06
Phosphates as P mg/L 0.7 0.18 0.18
Sulphate: SO2 -4 mg/L 400 4.8 2.5

5.1.3 Air Quality
5.1.3.1 Particulate matter
The ambient average levels of PM2.5 ranged from 13µg/m3 to 26 µg/m³ whilst the average levels of
PM10 ranged from 19µg/m³ to 32µg/m³ and finally for PM1 ranged from 6µg/m³ to 15µg/m³. All the
values recorded at the seven different sites were within the WHO air quality limits for particulate matter.
This can be attributed to the location of the sites being in rural area away from busy marrum roads with
less vehicular movements. Therefore, less dust is suspended into the surrounding environment. Also,
during the assessment, most of the schools were closed with no activities that can generate dust and
other particles to increase PM in the surrounding atmosphere. Weather also influenced the readings
recorded, for instance the prevailing winds and humidity of the day. Pangira, a busy Trading Centre
recorded low values of PM due to the fact that it rained on the day of assessment, thus reducing the
amount of dust particles suspended in the surrounding air.
Table 5.2: Summary of Baseline Particulate Matter Readings for Pangira RGC
Location & Details (e.g., Date & Run time

school, hospital, residence, PM2.5 µg/m³ PM1 µg/m³ PM10 µg/m³
etc.)
Borehole 1 (flowing water) for 27/02/2023 13 6 19

source
9:25am-11.30am
Borehole 2 for source 27/02/2023 20 11 27
3:15pm-5:30pm
Reservoir tank site 28/02/2023 17 8 22
9:05am-11.45am
Trading centre/ market for 28/02/2023 23 15 35

distribution
2:35pm-5:14pm
Pangira primary school and 29/02/2023 18 10 25

church for distribution
10:13am-13.23am
Pangira health centre for 29/02/2023 26 14 32

distribution
3:14pm-5:52pm
Homesteads for distribution 30/02/2023 21 13 32
9:23am-12.05am
EA standards 75 µg/m3 _ 150 µg/m3

5.1.3.2 Gas Emissions Baseline
The four, most common gas emissions considered during the assessment included NO 2, SO2, CO and
VOC. By volume, ambient air contains 78.09% Nitrogen, 20.95% Oxygen, 0.93% Argon, 0.04% CO 2 plus
a host of other gases in small amounts (SOx, COx & VOC).
At all the seven (7) sites monitored, Carbon Dioxide (CO2) average values ranged from 560ppm to
630ppm, Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) recorded no values throughout the seven sites, Carbon Monoxide (CO)
average values ranged from 0.00ppm to 0.5ppm and VOCs average values ranged from 0.263ppm to
0.165ppm.
Average values for all gases across the different sites monitored did not vary significantly and were very
low compared, conforming to the WHO Ambient Air Quality standards at the time of the survey although
there are no standards for VOCs yet. The low levels of gases can be attributed to limited activities at the
sites monitored as these are located in rural areas with little traffic with exception of trading centres.
VOCs are products of combustion of fossil fuels (coal, gas, wood, kerosene, tobacco products and oil)
especially fuel used in cars. VOCs can also come from personal care products such as perfume and hair
spray, cleaning agents, dry cleaning fluid, paints, lacquers, varnishes, hobby supplies and from copying
and printing machines. However none of these were in proximity of the project area given its rural nature.
Table 5.3: Summary of Baseline Gas Emissions Readings for Pangira RGC
Location & Details (e.g., Date & Run time Readings

school, hospital,
residence, etc.) VOC CO₂ ppm CO ppm SO₂ ppm H₂S ppm
mg/m³
Borehole 1 (flowing 27/02/2023 0.239 580 0 0 0.01

water) for source
9:25am-11.30am
Borehole 2 for source 27/02/2023 0.214 560 0 0 0
3:15pm-5:30pm
Reservoir tank site 28/02/2023 0.185 560 0 0 0
9:05am-11.45am
Trading centre/ market 28/02/2023 0.263 605 0 0 0.05

for distribution
2:35pm-5:14pm
Pangira primary school 1/03/2023 0.182 585 0.5 0 0.04

and church for
distribution 10:13am-13.23am
Pangira health centre 1/03/2023 0.165 630 0.5 0 0.07

for distribution
3:14pm-5:52pm

Homesteads for 2/03/2023 0.171 570 0.5 0 0.01

distribution
9:23am-12.05am
EA standards 6
5.1.4 Noise baseline condition
The noise levels recorded at these different sampled receptors varied depending on the noise sources
at a specific monitoring time of the day. These noise levels (LAeq) for the monitored sites ranged from
37BA (Borehole 2 for source) to 71dBA (Pangira Trading Centre, Commercial area) which is a busy with
several noise emitting sources. The baseline noise levels measured were slightly above the
recommended noise limits for such locations. This can be attributed to a range of activities for example
trading centres like Pangira have been developed into residential and business areas with several noise
emission sources including high volume music from bars and shops, running generators, speeding
vehicular traffic (trucks and boda bodas) as well as noise generated by trading centre dwellers. For
institutions like schools, during the time of assessment most them had village children utilizing the school
field to play soccer thereby emitting a sizeable amount of noise as indicated in Error! Reference source
not found. below.
Table 5.4: Summary of noise results at measured receptors
Site description Average noise Potential source National standard Noise

levels (day) (dBA) Limits dB (A) (Leq)
Borehole 1 (flowing water) for 39-43 Wind and birds 55

source
Borehole 2 for source 37-45 Wind and birds 55
Reservoir tank site 43-56 People, vehicles 60
Trading centre/ market for 58-71 People, Vehicles 60

distribution
Canrom primary school and 46-58 People, Vehicles 60

church for distribution
Pangira health centre for 49-63 People, Vehicles 60

distribution
Homesteads for distribution 41-54 People, birds 55

5.2 Biological Environment
The biological environment of the project area is broadly characteristic of the Northern Savanna belt
Uganda with limited anthropogenic modification being limited to the isolated cluster settlements.
5.2.1 Land Cover/Land Use
Lokung Sub County lies on the extensive savannah grassland characterised by thick grass undergrowth,
bushy thickets and sparse woodlands. The original land cover has been modified by periodic cultivation
of mainly annual crops including sorghum, maize, sweet potatoes, cassava among others. Dotted
settlement clusters also punctuate the entire landscape. They are mainly linear clusters along rural roads,
tracks and paths. Land use/Cover in the project area (Pangira) is dominated mainly by grasslands/fallow
lands which account for approximately 30%, these grasslands/fallow lands are characterised by
overgrazed patches during the dry season. Extensive bushland contributing approximately 20% follow,
they are characterised by thick undergrowth of Hyparrhenia rufa, and low branching shrubs.
Approximately 20% is taken up by Crop fields. Patches of crop field (Cassava, Sorghum, Maize, sweet
potatoes etc) are dotted all over the project areas especially near settlements. Settlements account for
approximately 10%, these are linear clusters following roads, tracks and village paths and are largely
grass thatched mud structure with a few brick and iron roof houses. The project area has patches of
sparse woodlands where species like Kigelia Africana, Mangifera indica, Ficus nantalensis, are
encountered. These woodlands account for approximately 3% while other land use/cover are
approximately 2% of the total area.
Figure 5.9 Land use/Land/cover for the project area

Figure 5.9: Landuse/Landcover Pangira RGC
5.2.2 Vegetation Description
The proposed Pangira Solar Water Supply project is located in a largely savanna mosaic of bush lands
and thickets graduating into extensive woodlands towards the low lying and undulating hills. Vegetation
is mainly native grasses Hyparrhenia rufa, Cynodon dactylon, Panicum maximum. Intermittent cultivation
of annual crops has generally modified the grassland/thickets savanna especially near settlements
especially in the project area.
5.2.2.1 Site Vegetation Description
The most dominant form of vegetation covering the project site can be described as an Open grassland.
Though by the time of the survey, the site was recovering from bush fires, species like Kigelia Africana,
Mangifera indica, Ficus nantalensis, mixed with shrubby species such as Siamese cassia, Melia
azedarach and Acalypha fruticosa, with a few very sparsely distributed trees of Acacia spp were
identified. Encountered shrubs included Acacia spp, Vernonia amygdalina, while trees were mostly
Zizipphus abyssinica, Erythrina abyssinica, Vachellia abyssinica.
A list of all species encountered within the project area is appended to this document. A total of (47) plant
species from 18 Genus representing 18 families, majority of which are of Savanna-grassland ecosystem
were recorded during the survey. The most dominant grasses species were Hyparrhenia rufa, Cynodon
dactylon, Panicum maximum. The dominant woody species recorded included Senna septabilis, Albizia
spp, Phoenix rupicola, Vernonia amygadalena, Ficus natalensis and Acacia brevispica. The project area

has however introduced plant species like Mangifera indica, Azadirachta indica, and Jacaranda. Other
plant species within the open grassland included Acacia spp, Cyperus esculentus Figure 5.9 shows the
most abundant plant species encountered during the study.
Figure 5.11: Plant-Life Composition of the Project Area
5.2.2.2 Species of Ecological and Conservation Importance
All species encountered during the study were categorized as least concern (LC) as per the IUCN list of
threatened species (IUCN, 2022). The details and possible effect of the project activities on vegetation
have been discussed in the impact section.
5.2.2.3 Invasive species
Two invasive alien species were encountered along and within the project area and these include Senna
spectabilis and Ricinus communis. These species were reported as invasive under global invasive
species list (Cronk & Fuller 2001, Saul et al, 2017) due to their ability to suppress herbaceous plants and
their high dispersive power and regenerating potential engineered by any magnitude of disturbance within
the community. Unlike others, Ricinus communis has an allelopathic effect, given the rate it can occupy
extremely disturbed sites in any vegetation community.
Table 5.5: Distribution of Plant Species
Point General Habitat Field Photographs

No: Description
A1
Fallow land recovering from
bush fire
A2 Recently burnt area with dry

vegetation

A3
Heavily grazed land with
bare ground patches
A4
Settlements with cultivated
patches. Sena septabilis is
dominant
A5
Settled site near Potwach
Primary school
The site is dominated by
Owor (Acholi) palm tree Photo 1: Ficus Nantalensis Photo 4: Acacia spp
A6 Fallow land dominated by
Mangifera Indica along the
pipeline
A7 Fallow dominated by Ficus
natalensis half burnt along
the pipeline
A8 Thick dry burnt undergrowth
Dominated by Mangifera
Indica along the pipeline
A9 Fallow land with clearly no
vegetation observed
A10 Site dominated by Acaia spp
but having a bare ground
A11
Habitat with a mixture of Photo 2: Kigelia africana Photo 5: Mangifera indica trees
Kigelia africana, Ficus
natalensis, Mangifera indica
A12 Site dominated by Acacia
spp along the pipeline
A13 Kigelia africana dominated
corridor
Photo 3 Acacia spp Photo 6: Mangifera indica

The project design is comprised of mainly linear excavations (trenches) not exceeding 1m width, abstraction points
and pump house constructed on approximately 30mby 20m plots. All plant species encountered along the
alignment, the abstraction site and the storage area are all categorized as of least concern. Given the conservation
status and aerial coverage of project facilities, project impact on vegetation will be minor.
5.2.3 Fauna
Many organisms within a particular environment can serve as indicators of the status of an environment
especially the plant and animal communities. The presence and distribution of flora and fauna within an
ecosystem be it aquatic or otherwise is a component of various factors; anthropogenic activities,
altitudinal, flood regimes, habitat suitability, the amount of dissolved oxygen, nutrients and suspended
solids.
Anthropogenic activities impact negatively on the flora of most areas which also affects the fauna that
depend on the flora for food, cover and shelter.
Rationale
Given the sensitivity of some animals like amphibians, birds, butterflies and mammals to habitat alteration
and pollution, these animals may serve as indicators of overall environmental health like for example
many species of amphibians provide both indirect and direct benefits to humans. Amphibians are bio
indictors of an altered ecosystem and are very sensitive environmental monitors; and significant declines
could indicate deterioration in the quality of the environment. This role as indicators can be based on the
assumption that the adverse effects of environmental degradation will be reflected in reduction of diversity
(Magurran, 1988). Amphibians unlike people breathe at least partly through their skin making them much
sensitive to environmental disturbance (IUCN/SSC, 2003).
Much of the project area is under fallow though near settlement, modifications through cultivation and
settlements. The survey area comprised the proposed project areas of influence, the proposed project
will traverse a series of mosaic semi-natural habitats, wetlands and streams as well as vegetation and
cultivations alongside settlements. Sampling points were selected to represent the specific areas of
importance to this biodiversity study. The major habitat types were identified, and detailed sampling was
conducted to establish faunal species encountered. The sites sampled were near settlements,
woodlots/tree plantations, riverine areas, grasslands, and cultivated areas see. See appendix 12 for
survey area details
5.2.2.4 Butterflies
Butterflies are known sensitive indicators of environmental change associated with natural and human-
induced disturbances. Their populations are influenced by changes in local climatic conditions and the
availability of host plants for larval and adult stages (Thomas et al., 1998). Frequently disturbed
environments are considered unstable and unpredictable and as a result have low species diversity,

whereas less disturbed, more stable environments are expected to promote high species diversity
(Odum, 1985).
A total of 51 species of butterflies were recorded from the different surveyed areas. For butterflies, five
forests edge/woodland species, 13 migrant species, six open habitat species, 26 widespread species
and only two wetland species were recorded within the Project areas. From the butterflies ecological
preferences, over 50% of the total species recorded were those that are typically widespread: 12% of
species were those typical of open habitats.
The survey did not record within the direct impact areas any globally or nationally threatened species of
butterflies. No species of conservation concern in the sense of endemism, threat in IUCN context or rarity
were recorded. Of all the butterfly species recorded by the surveys, only three species (Eurema brigitta,
Junonia oenone and Zizina antanossa) have been evaluated for the IUCN Red List, while the other
species have not yet been evaluated. The three species are all categorized as being of least concern.
5.2.2.5 Avifauna
Overall 31 species were identified and 64 individuals recorded (Appendix 1). The most abundant and
widely distributed species was the common bulbul 82% followed by the Grey Krestle 60%, four forest
visitors (Black-and-white Mannikin (Spermestes bicolor), Greater Blue-eared Glossy-Starling
(Lamprotornis chalybaeus), Grey-backed Camaroptera (Camaroptera brevicaudata) and the Common
Bulbul (Pycnonotus barbatus) were identified.
Eight grassland specialists (Black Bishop, Helmeted Guinea fowl, Little Weaver, Little Bee Eater and the
Red checked Coudon Blue) and one non-water specialist often found near water (African Pied Wagtail,
that is usually found next to water but can as well survive where there is no water. Most of the species
observed are those referred to as habitat generalists Table 5-3. No Birds of international conservation
concern were recorded. See 5.10 below.
General Species Distribution

60
50
40
Abundancy
30
20
10
0
Individuals seen Species Recorded
Species
Figure 5.12: Shows the general Species Distribution within the project area
Table 5.6: Avifauna species Distribution along the survey sites.

COMMON SCIENTIFIC Survey Points

NAME NAME
ATLAS No.
A10
A11
A12
A13
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
347 African Streptopelia     
Mourning decipiens
Dove
1144 Black Bishop Euplectes     
gierowii
138 Black Kite Milvus  
migrans
1265 Black-and- Spermestes    
white Mannikin bicolor
1230 Black-crowned Estrilda  
Waxbill nonnula
27 Black-headed Ardea  
Heron melanoceph
ala
1165 Black-headed Ploceus  
Weaver melanoceph
alus
355 Blue-spotted Turtur afer   
Wood Dove
1013 Bocage's Malaconotus 
Bush- Shrike bocagei
1266 Bronze Spermestes  
Mannikin cucullatus
732 Common Pycnonotus       
Bulbul barbatus
165 Common Quail Coturnix  
cotunix
376 Eastern Crinifer 
Plantain-eater zonurus
889 Grey-backed Camaroptera    
Camaroptera brachyuran
147 Grey Kestrel Falco   
ardosiaceus
1032 Grey-backed Lanius  
Fiscal excubitoroid
es
1207 Grey-headed Passer   
Sparrow griseus
51 Hadada Ibis Bostrychia 
hagedash
351 Laughing Dove Streptopelia  
senegalensis
36 Little Egret Egretta 
garzetta

443 Little Swift affinis   

Apus
1172 Little Weaver Ploceus 
luteolus
129 Lizard Buzzard Kaupifalco   
monogrammi
cus
934 Northern Melaenornis 
Black- edolioides 
Flycatcher
995 Pied wagtail Motacilla 
aguimp
350 Red-eyed Streptopelia  
Dove semitorquata
346 Ring-necked Streptopelia  
Dove capicola
771 Sooty Chat Myrmecocic   
hla nigra
459 Speckled Colius  
Mousebird striatus
869 Stout Cisticola Cisticola 
robustus
447 White-rumped Apus caffer  
Swift
555 Yellow- Pogoniulus   
throated subsulphure
Tinkerbird us
5.2.2.6 Herptiles
Herptiles, like many other groups of organisms, are facing worldwide population declines, range
contractions, and species extinctions. The single most important cause of amphibian declines globally is
habitat degradation, largely as a result of human activities (Blaustein et al., 1998). It is imperative that
conservation action such as this study be taken to reverse this trend and maintain amphibian diversity.
Overall Three species of amphibians from three families and 2 species of reptiles from two families were
encountered. All identified amphibian species were recorded along the vantage points like marshes at
vantage points within the project area and neighboring points to the project foot print, and all belong to
Order Anura. According to Channing (2001), order Anura has the most surviving species with about 4,000
members worldwide. It consists of several families of frogs and toads. Family Ranidae constitute the
highest number of species followed closely by Bufonidae. Mascarene grass frog (Ptychadena
mascareniensis)- Most abundant species especially within the marshland

Ptycadena mascareniensis
Agama agama
Figure 5.13: Images of Herptiles encountered in the Field
The richness of family Ranidae is attributable to the agility of members which enable them escape and cross the
matrices of disturbed landscape. Agama agama Red headed agama and Trachylepsis striata (stripped skink) were
the most widely recorded among reptiles whereas Haplobatrachus occipitalis and Ptychadena mascareniensis
were the mostly encountered amphibian. All herpertiles recorded are considered habitat generalists and abundant
in their preferred habitats with no conservation threat or known concern
Table 5.7: Hepertile species within the study area
Scientific name Common name Family

Amphibians
Haplobatrachus occipitalis Edible bull frog Dicroglossidae
Hyperolius viridiflavus Common reed frog Hyperolidae
Ptychadena mascareniensis Grass rocket frog Ranidae
Reptiles
Agama agama Red headed Agama Agamidae
Trachylepsis striata Striped skink Scincidae

Sampled Haplobatrachus Hyperolius Ptychadena Agama Trachylepsis

points occipitalis viridiflavus mascareinsis agama striata
A1 * *
A2 * * * *
A3
A4 *
A5 *
A6 * *
A7 * *
A8 *
A9 *
A10 * *
A11 *
A12 *
A13 * *
5.2.2.7 Mammals
Medium-sized and large mammals are conspicuous and mainly have a diurnal habit. A number, however,
are strictly/mainly nocturnal meaning that although conspicuous it may not be possible to record them by
observation. However, the presence of nocturnal species can be detected using indirect signs, such as
droppings, footprints and tracks
Most of the species reported during the survey are widespread, very adaptive and tolerant to habitat
modification. All the mammal species recorded are widely distributed in Uganda, they are considered
habitat generalists and abundant in their preferred habitats with no conservation threat or known concern.
Table 5.5: Mammals observed in the project area

Scientific name Common name Family Coordinate (36N) Numbers
Observed
Non-Volant Mammals
Lemniscomys striatus Common grass rat Muridae (465463/0397918) 3
(463883/0398983)
(463635/0398977)
5.2.3.5 General species implication

Both floral and faunal habitats will be destroyed or reduced by the project developments. The general
impacts of vegetation clearance will be loss of plant species and fauna whose habitats and food chains
are destroyed. Some animal species able to live under urban conditions will adapt to the new habitats
created and, in some cases, there will be substitution with new species. Some bird and mammal species
are likely to adapt by becoming scavengers when their natural food chains are disrupted (Banage, 1999
5.3 Socio-Economic
This section presents a description of the household’s socio-economic characteristics sampled in the
project area including the water supply source, the transmission mains and the distribution area. Data
provided is down scaled from the sub county statistics for Pangira basing on a sample size of 191
households. Baseline descriptions have been formed through a combination of primary survey data,
secondary data and stakeholder consultation. Baseline descriptions of demographic characteristics,
access to water, available healthcare services and prevalent diseases, land tenure, transport, economic
activity, gender, vulnerability, equity issues and literacy levels in the project area is essential to
understanding water supply and distribution.
5.3.1 Location
The project area is located in Lamwo District, Lokung Sub County. The sub-county is bordered by South
Sudan to the North and Palabek Kal to the West, Agoro and Paloga sub-counties to the East and Lamwo
Town Council to the South. The RGC is located approximately 13 km by road from Lamwo District Local
Government Offices along the Lamwo-Padibe-Lokung road. The coordinates of Pagira RGC are,
577861.23 m E, 081491.16 m N. The Figure below shows the location of these villages within the sub-
county.

Figure 5.14: Map of layout of the proposed infrastructure system for Pangira RGC.
Table 5.8: Administrative Units in the Project Area
Served Population
S/County Parish Village
2022 2024 2029 2034 2039 2044
Akilikongo Central 372 382 407 434 462 492
Akilikongo West 578 593 632 673 717 763
Lik Olony 361 371 395 421 448 477
Pangira
Ngol Pac 372 382 407 434 462 492
Pagada 425 436 464 494 526 560
Parish Total 2,108 2,164 2,305 2,456 2,615 2,784
Kila-kony Paco 610 626 667 710 756 805
Lakwala West 499 512 545 580 618 658
Licwar Central 833 854 909 968 1,031 1,098
Lokung Licwar Licwar West 297 305 325 346 369 393
Latida 547 561 597 636 677 721
Mudu 1,103 1,131 1,204 1,282 1,365 1,453
Parish Total 3,889 3,989 4,247 4,522 4,816 5,128
Parabong Water Supply Project Total 5,997 6,153 6,552 6,978 7,431 7,912
Source: Feasibility Reports 2022

5.3.2 Population and Demographics
5.3.2.1 Population
According to the National Population and Housing Census 2014, the annual population growth rate for
Lamwo district is 1.3 with an average household size of 4.8 for Lokung sub-county. The number of
Households (HH) and population in the project area is as given
Table 5.9 Project area population projections
From the figure2 presented below, Lokung is sparsely populated with only 32 people per kilo metre
squared. This is likely to influence a high demand for public stand posts.
Figure 5.15: Population density (people/km2) of the project area
Although Lamwo District is one of the refugee hosting districts in Uganda, Pangira Sub-County does not
host refugees. According to the Lamwo DDP III (2020/21-2024/25), about 53,806 refugees are settled in
Palabek Refugee Settlement. Other refugee hosting sub-counties include; Palabek Ogili, Gem and Kal
and here the refugee populations are higher than the host population.
2
http://wsdb.mwe.go.ug/index.php/reports/district/111

In regard to project implication, according to the Pangira RGC Feasibility Report (2022), the project will
directly benefit a total population of 7912 people within the two (2) parishes that make up Pangira RGC
by 2044.
Figure 5.16: Population density (people/km2) of the project area
5.3.2.2 Ethnicity of the respondents
Findings from the socio-economic study depict that almost all respondents who participated in the survey
are of the Acholi tribe, 99% (197). Only a negligible proportion are of the Langi tribe 1% (2).
5.3.2.3 Residential status respondents in the project area
Of the 199 respondents who participated in the socio-economic survey, findings suggest that 88% (176)
of the respondents are natives meaning that they born in the project area. This implies that they have
stayed in the project area for a period equivalent to their age. On the other hand, a small proportion (12%
23) of the respondents indicated they by migrated to the project area. No refugees in this area according
to district data.
For those who indicated are migrants, they have lived in the project area for nineteen (19) years on
average. When data is categorised, results suggest that more than a half of the respondents who
indicated are migrants have lived in the project area for period more than sixteen (16) years.
60% 150%
40% 100% 100%
20% 50%
30% 43%
0% 0%
1–5 11 – 15 16 +
Percent Cumlative %
Figure 5.17: Percentage of migrants by number of years lived in the project area

The findings suggest that for intra-district migration (migration occurring within the district boundaries) is
the commonest form of migration as 82% (19) of the migrants indicated originated from another area but
within Lamwo District. Inter-district migration is accounts for only 18% (4). In regard to the causes of
migration, most respondents indicated they moved to the project area for marriage (72% 18), jobs (13%
3), among other causes (8% 2).
The findings from the assessment of the residential status of respondents suggests that the proposed
project is going to benefit permanent residents. This is because the native residents and the migrants
have stayed in the project area for considerable number of years.
5.3.2.4 Religious affiliation of respondents
More than half of the residents in the project area are Catholics (53% 106). The second dominant religion
is Anglican/Protestants (44% 88). Other religions in the project area include; Pentecostal (2% 3), and
Moslem (1% 2).
5.3.2.5 Marital status respondents
Majority (76% 150) of the respondents indicated that they are married in either monogamous (60% 119)
or polygamous (16% 31) marriages. Only a small proportion (49%), fall under the category of;
widowed/widower (11% 22), separated/divorced (11% 21), and never married (3% 6).
For those who indicated are married to more than one wife, the findings suggest that the number of wives
ranges from two (2) to four (4). However, on average, such respondents have two (2) wives.
A person’s marital status provides crucial information about their position in a community and is an
important data point for interpreting other information. For instance, marital status is a proxy indicator for
understanding marriage trends, family responsibilities, forecast future needs of programs that that focus
on the well-being of the population. In this case, the proposed project will benefit mostly married people
especially women who bare the largest burden of household reproductive work such as fetching water of
domestic use.
5.3.2.6 Level of education respondents
Results suggest 60% (120) of the respondents have primary level education, 22% (43) have secondary
education, and only 9% have education that is above secondary school education, diploma 3% (5),
specialised education 5% (10), university degree, post-graduate degree. Ten percent 10% (19) lack
education. According to the Lamwo District Development Plan III, the results of the district literacy
baseline survey conducted in the 2019/2020 financial year depict that overall, the district literacy rate is
at 73.5%. However, a combination of primary level education 60% (120) and no education 10% (19)
suggest that a majority (73%) of the respondents in the project area are semi-literate.
5.3.2.7 Household structure and characteristics
Uganda is administratively at macro level divided into districts, counties/municipalities, sub counties/town
councils, parishes/wards and villages/cells. At micro level, there is a household which is referred to as a
group of persons who normally eat and live together, with one responsible person regarded as head

(UBOS, 2021)3. As part of the socio-economic survey, the household structure of the project area was
assessed the findings are presented in the subsequent sub-sections of this section.
a) Household size
On average, households in the project area consist of six (6) household members. These findings show
that the household size of Pangira project area is higher than that of the district estimated at 5.1 and
national average of 4.7. Therefore, are in line with the data presented in the Lamwo District Development
Plan III in where by the household size is estimated to 5.1 members per household. Data presented by
class interval shows that a large proportion of households have between four (4) to six (6) members.
10+ 1–3
15% 20%
7–9 4–6
22% 43%
Figure 5.18: Percentage of respondents by household size
b) Gender of household members
According to UBOS 2014, the number of female and male members of households in the project area
are almost equal. That is female 50.3% (516) and males 49.7% (509).
c) Age of household members
The average age of household members in the project area is 22 years. Categorized data suggests that
the age of most the household members ranges between twenty-one (21) to thirty (30) years. Additionally,
the household’s population pyramid presented below is broad based, implying that the majority of the
population in the project area is young, a characteristic of a project area with highly fertile and productive
population.
3
Uganda Bureau of Statistics (UBOS) 2021 Statistical Abstract

: Figure 5.19: Population pyramid of the project area by gender. Source UBOS 2014
d) Relationship to the head of household
More than a half of the household members are biological children (55% 560) of the household head.
Second to these are household heads (20% 199). The other household members include spouses
constitute (13% 137), relatives (10% 107), parents to the household head/spouse (0.8% 8), non-relatives
(0.2% 2) while other members constitute (1% 12). The results presented above depict that the household
to benefit from the proposed project are somewhat extended families consisting of different generations
of people who are relatives to the household head. The results depict that household members are
interdependent on one another and are likely to share family responsibilities including especially related
to reproductive work.
e) Level of education of household members
The results suggest that majority (81%) of the household members have an education level of primary
school completed and below. A small proportion (14%) household members have education of
secondary while only a few (4%) have an education equivalent to tertiary level.
Table 5.10: Percentage of respondents by highest level of education
Level Frequency Percent Cumulative %

None 161 16 16
Pre-Primary 74 7 23
Primary school incomplete 423 41 64
Primary school Completed 177 17 81
Ordinary level education 123 12 93
Advanced level education 15 2 95
Diploma 12 1 96
Specialised training /vocational training 31 3 99
University degree 3 0.3 99

Others 6 0.6 100

Total 1025 100
The high proportion of household members with below primary level education level can be explained by
the presence of school going children within the households that participated in the survey who constitute
majority of the household members.
f) Main Occupation
The results presented below show that majority of the household members are still school going child
who are pre-occupied by studies or are still young to work (53% 542). For those who are working, a third
are subsistence farmers (35% 357), a very small proportion are in self-employment (4% 41) and salary
earners (3% 33), wage earners (1% 7) while other members are engaged in other occupations (4% 45).
5.3.3 Household Access to Income and Utilisation
5.3.3.1 Access to regular sources of income
In response to the first question, almost all (72% 143) of the respondents affirmed that their households
have at least a household member who has access to regular sources of income. On the other hand,
more than a quarter (28% 56) of households indicate they do not have any member with access to a
source of income. Overall, households have two (2) members with access to a regular source of income.
5.3.3.2 Household members who participate in the sources of income
Respondents who indicate they have access to regular source of income were asked to volunteer
information on those household members that participate in such economic activities. The findings from
this question indicate that a large proportion (69% 143) household heads participate in the sources of
income. A third (35% 70) of the respondents indicated that spouses participate in the sources of income.
Other household members who participate in the sources of income include: children (15% 30) and other
dependants (1% 2).
5.3.3.3 Sources of income
For those household with members having access to a regular source of income, they were asked about
the various sources of income or economic activities that members participate in. The outcomes of the
question on the sources of income suggest that household members participate in over 10 income
generating activities. The findings presented in table below suggest that households in the project area
largely depend on agricultural related sources of income mainly subsistence farming (76% 109). The
other source of income to households is self-employment (18% 24) among other sources as presented
in the table below.
Table 5.11: Percentage of respondents by sources of household income
Sources Frequency Percent

Subsistence farming (crop/ animal, poultry) 109 76%
Self-employment 35 24%
Salary employment 17 12%

Fish farming 8 6%
Wage-based activities/causal labouring 7 5%
Public transfer/pension 2 1%
Large scale farming (10+ acres) 1 1%
Private remittance/transfer 1 1%
Rental, interest, dividend income, land/property income 1 1%
Other (specify 15 10%
5.3.3.4 Size of household income
The major activity that brings in a significant amount of income to the households is agriculture mainly
subsistence and commercial farming. This is followed by self-employment as depicted in the table below.
Table 5.12: Average monthly income earned by economic activity
Sources Mean Median

Subsistence farming (crop/ animal, poultry) 1,628,444 970,000
Large scale farming (10+ acres) 1,500,000 1,500,000
Salary employment 672,941 300,000
Self-employment 633,714 200,000
Public transfer/pension 225,000 225,000
Rental, interest, dividend income, land/property income 120,000 120,000
Other (specify 108,333 30,000
Wage-based activities/causal labouring 93,571 50,000
Fish farming 61,250 25,000
Private remittance/transfer 50,000 50,000
Total 1,194,769 500,000
The mean household income of the project area is UGX 1,194,769 while the median income is UGX
500,000. However, because statistically the mean can easily be distorted by extreme low or high figures,
we have considered the median to describe depict the size of household monthly income hence it can be
said that households in the project area earn monthly income of UGX 500,000. When the income is
categorised, the cumulative percentage indicate that slightly more than half (52%) of the households earn
between UGX 400,001 and UGX 500,000. The findings show that a sizeable number of households earn
a low income compared to those earning a high income implying that most of the households are
considered relatively poor.
Table 5.13: Percentage of respondents by size of household income
Income Frequency Percent Cumulative Percent

≤ 100000 41 21 21
100,001 – 200,000 16 8 29
200,001 – 300,000 22 11 40
300,001 – 400,000 6 3 43
400,001 – 500,000 18 9 52
500,001 – 600,000 12 6 58
600,001 – 700,000 4 2 60
700,001 – 800,000 6 3 63

800,001 – 900,000 4 2 65
≥ 900,001 70 35 100
Total 199 100
5.3.3.5 Reasons why some household members are not working
For those who are not working, respondents were asked to give reasons as to why they are not working.
The results from this question indicate that the reasons as to why the households are not working are
that some of the members are too young to work (70% 140), there is lack of employment opportunities,
(23% 45), sick or incapacitated (7% 3), prefer not to work (3% 6), retired (3% 6), terminated/retrenched
(1% 0.5) among others (11% 21).
5.3.3.6 Household expenditure
Based on the data presented in table 5.12 below, households spend income on more than 14 items.
However, the major items spent on by more than half of the households are: food (88%), school fees
(70%), toiletry (69%), scholastic materials (59%) and healthcare (51%) among others.
Table 5.14: Percentage of respondents by household expenditure items
Items Frequency Percent Items Frequency Percent

Food 126 88 Transport 32 22
School fees 101 70 Alcohol 17 12
Toiletry (soap etc) 98 69 Hard energy (paraffin, wood) 9 6
Scholastic material 85 59 Electricity 6 4
Health 73 51 House rent 3 2
Telephone (airtime) 71 50 Premise rent 1 1
Water 38 27 Others 14 10
Only a few (27% 38) households on water per month.
5.3.3.7 Household expenditure amount
On average, households in the project area spend UGX 132,109 monthly however, the main item on
which household income is spent on are school related mainly school fees and scholastic materials. From
the findings presented in the table below, the very few households that spend on water, spend averagely
UGX 2,491.
Table 5.15: Percentage of respondents by monthly amount spent on an item
Item Mean Median Item Mean Median

School fees 486,150 500,000 House rent 40,750 300,000
Scholastic material 155,288 100,000 Food 31,532 100,000
Transport 150,159 50,000 Premise rent 25,000 12,000
Health 124,178 30,000 Toiletry (soap etc) 19,315 10,000
Electricity 86,250 12,500 Telephone (airtime) 7,167 20,000
Hard energy (paraffin, wood) 60,083 31,500 Water 2,491 20,000
Alcohol 47,646 7,500 Other 287,800 100,000

Data on item specific expenditure suggests that much of the household income is spent on school fees
(UGX 486,150), scholastic materials (UGX 159,787), transport (UGX 150,159), health (UGX 124,178)
and premise rent (UGX 120,000).
In categorical analysis for monthly income spent by households, the cumulative percentage of different
categories indicates that most (87%) of the households spend between UGX 100,001 and UGX 200,000.
Table 5.16: Percentage of respondents by amount of money spent per month
Amount Frequency Percent Cumulative Percent

≤ 100000 113 79 79
100,001 – 200,000 11 8 87
200,001 – 300,000 6 4 92
300,001 – 400,000 3 2 94
400,001 – 500,000 1 1 95
500,001 – 600,000 1 0.9 96
600,001 – 700,000 1 0.6 97
700,001 – 800,000 1 0.5 97
≥ 900,001 4 3 100
Total 143 100
5.3.3.8 Types of self-employment activities
The survey established that for those who participate and earn income from self-employment activities,
they participate in a range of activities, as the table presented below shows. Whereas there are a wide
range of activities, residents of the project area mainly participate in small businesses and services which
also happens to be the most earning activity followed by retail shops among others as presented below.
Table 5.17: Percentage of respondents by self-employment activities and income generated
Item Frequency Percent Mean Amount Median Amount

Small business & services 20 10 1,400,333 300,000
Retail shop 16 8 590,000 450,000
Transport and logistics 6 3 335,000 190,000
Space/Accommodation 4 2 140,000 20,000
Professional Services 2 1 450,000 450,000
Wholesale shop 2 1 250,000 250,000
School 1 0.7 0 0
Health Facility 1 0.7 800,000 800,000
5.3.4 Possession of Specialised Skills and Technical Training
As part of the survey, a human capital assessment was conducted and respondents were asked “Do you
have any specialised skills or technical training?”. The findings from this question suggest that only a few
respondents (20% 38) possess specialised skills or technical training. This implies that most (80% 161)
do not have any form of specialised training or technical skills
In regard to the skills/specialized training possessed, many of the respondents indicated possess tailoring
skills (18%), some have educational skills (16%), construction skills, carpentry, masons and mechanic
accounting for 11% respectively among others.

Table 5.18: Percentage of respondents by specialised skills possessed
Skills Frequency Percent Skills Frequency Percent

Tailoring 7 18% Business Administration 1 3%
Educational skills 6 16% Catering 1 3%
Construction skills. 4 11% Engineering 2 5%
Carpentry 3 8% Law 1 3%
Hairdressing 3 8% Driving 1 3%
Mechanic 2 5% Military skills 1 3%
Nursing 2 5% Repairing bicycles 1 3%
Bee hive making 1 3% Woodwork 1 3%
Brick layer 1 3%
In terms of the positive project implications, the proposed project will create short-, medium- and long-
term jobs across the implementation stages (pre-construction, construction, operation and maintenance).
It is expected that locals have will be given short term jobs such as trenchers, porters, drivers, plumbers,
masons, painters, electricians among other indirect employment opportunities such as selling food stuffs,
soft drinks on-site and/or near construction sites.
5.3.5 Practice of Keeping Records
Respondents were asked if they do keep any business record for their businesses. Findings from this
question show that only a very small proportion (14% 28) do keep records. This implies that almost all
(86% 171) respondents do not keep any form of records. In regards to records, the main records kept
include: stock book (8% 16) expenditure records (9% 17), receipt book (4% 8), list of debtors (4% 8),
business plan (0.5% 1), balance sheet (1% 2), among others (2% 4).
5.3.6 Financial Services and Credit Utilisation
Access to financial services and credit utilisation can be associated with improved investments and
productivity. The survey established that majority (81% 161) of the respondents indicated have access
to financial services from financial institutions. The financial services provider used by the respondents
include: mobile money (53% 102), Village Savings and Loan Associations (VSLA) account for 51% (102),
SACCOS (60% 30), banks, (5% 9) and Government programs (1% 2).
When asked if they had benefited from the financial services provided above, a large proportion (69%
138) indicated had benefited from the financial services and the findings show that respondents mainly
benefit from: savings services (55% 110), credit, (41% 81), financial literacy training (18% 35), business
and entrepreneurship advisory services (13% 25) among other services (20% 39).
5.3.7 Ownership of Physical Assets
Ownership of assets is a key indicator of a household’s welfare. The majority of the population within the
project area possesses physical assets. The findings reveal that households mostly own physical assets
relating to information and communication mainly radio (69%) and mobile telephone (69%). Second to
the information and communication assets, households possess assets relating to quality of life mainly a
bicycle (69%), and residential house (57%). Majority of the households own land (77%) as a major
productive asset.

Table 5.19: Percentage of respondents by physical assets owned
Type of Asset Frequency Percent Type of Asset Frequency Percent

Information & communication Quality of life Assets
Radio 139 69.8 Bicycle 127 63.8
Mobile Telephone 141 70.9 Residential owned house 130 65.3
TV 14 7.0 Motorcycle 37 18.6
Clock/watch 11 5.5 Sofa seats 9 4.5
Internet 14 7.0 Car 7 3.5
Newspaper this week 1 .5 Fridge 2 1.0
Other 14 7.0 Other 2 1.0
Productive Assets
Land 157 78.9
Kiosk/shop 18 9.0
Rental house 13 6.5
Commercial building 3 1.5
Other 26 13.1
5.3.8 Dwelling Ownership and Physical Condition
Majority (94% 94) of the respondents in the project area own the dwelling they are currently occupying.
Only a small number rent, 5% (9) and care taking, 1% (1), respectively. Ownership of the current
residence can be a predictor of permanent residence.
The study also assessed the physical condition of the house dwelling owned by the respondents basing
on three parameters, i.e., the type of roof, walls, and floor. A combination of all those indicators suggest
that most households have non-permanent residential structures. This is because in terms of roof
material, almost all (45%) residential structures have grass thatched roofs; in terms of walls, 39% of the
structures are made of mud/unburnt bricks; in terms of floor, 34% have earth floor smeared with cow
dung. The table below shows the respondents that own houses and condition of the houses.
Table 5.20: Percentage of respondents by condition of dwelling owned
Parameter Frequency Percent Parameter Frequency Percent

a) Type of roof b) Walls
Grass thatched 101 50.8 Un-burnt bricks 92 46.2
Iron sheet 80 40.2 Burnt Bricks 45 22.6
c) Floor Mud and poles 24 12.1
Smeared with cow dung 75 37.7 Cement blocks/concrete 20 10.1
Plain mud 65 32.7
Cement 39 19.6
Tiles 2 1.0
The housing characteristics will influence the demand for domestic connections. It’s likely that the need
for yard taps may outstrip that for household connections given the nature of human settlement,
population density and housing characteristics as described above.

5.3.9 Household and Community Gender Dynamics
5.3.9.1 Intra-household division of labour
Based on the triple role’s framework, the survey investigated the gender distribution of roles and
responsibilities in performing household activities. These activities were collapsed under the triple roles
in the form of reproductive work, productive work and community activities4 as performed by man and
woman, boys and girl. Error! Reference source not found.below presents the results from the survey.
Table 5.21: Percentage of responses by intra-household division of labour
Activities Woman Man Man and Boy Girl All

woman child Child Members
Reproductive work n % n % n % n % n % n %
Doing domestic activities (water, 149 74.9 33 16.6 10 5.0 1 0.5 5 2.5 1 0.5
fuel, food,)
Take care of children daily 141 70.9 27 13.6 28 14.1 0 0 2 1 1 0.5
Buying basic necessities 47 23.6 98 49.2 49 24.6 1 0.5 3 2 1 .5
Buying durable household assets 34 17.1 126 63.3 37 18.6 1 0.5 0 0 1 0.5
(land etc)
Productive work
Farming 34 17.1 53 26.6 88 44.2 0 0 2 1 22 11.1
Livestock rearing 20 10.1 101 50.8 36 18.1 34 17.1 3 1.5 5 2.5
Working for outside income 30 15.1 112 56.3 48 24.1 2 1 4 2.0 3 1.5
Marketing produce 61 30.7 65 32.7 69 34.7 1 0.5 2 1.0 1 .5
Selling durable household assets 33 16.6 125 62.8 40 20.1 0 0 0 0 1 .5
(land etc)
Community work
Attending village meetings 42 21.1 41 20.6 109 54.8 1 0.5 2 1 4 2.0
Others 34 17.1 88 44.2 31 15.6 0 0 1 0.5 45 22.6
Results suggest the normal gender division of labour within the patriarchal society and context which best
describes Uganda as a country. It can be concluded from the findings presented in Error! Reference
source not found. that overall, all household members take part in reproductive, productive and
community work, but the level of participation by each group of household member differs under each
category as described below.
 For reproductive work: A woman plays a leading role in performing reproductive work
together with a girl child while the man and boy child play a supportive role.
4Reproductive work involves the care and maintenance of the household and its members including bearing and caring for children preparing
food, collecting water and fuel, shopping, housekeeping and family health care. Productive Work involves the production of goods and services
for consumption and trade (in employment and self-employment). Community Work is the collective organization of social events and services -
ceremonies and celebrations, participation in groups and organizations, local political activities etc.

 For productive work: Both a man and a woman take part in productive work, with children
providing a supportive role, especially in crop farming and harvesting. However, whereas both
a man and a woman equally participate in farming and harvesting crops, a man dominates in
engagement in outside income generating activities and formal employment.
 For community work: Both a man and a woman almost equally take part in community work,
though a man plays a leading role in attending community meetings.
5.3.9.2 Existence of social networks in project area
Most respondents, 86% (165) indicated they have friends or relatives in and around the village that they
feel at ease with and talk to about personal life. This implies that respondents are likely to have a social
network on which they can rely. Majority of these social networks are in the form of friends (76% 145),
relatives (74% 142), traditional leaders (32% 61), spiritual/moral supporters (23% 44) among others.
Other 20%
Professional staff 3%
Workmates 5%
Social organisation 13%
Spiritual/moral 31%
Traditional leaders 38%
Relatives 76%
Friends 75%
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80%
Figure 5.20: Percentage of responses by social networks in the project area
With regard to the support gotten from the social networks, 62% (103) of the respondents indicated they
derive some support and assistance from their social network. The support derived is in form of: socio-
emotional (57% 114), financial support (18% 31), practical support [material/effort] (9% 24).
5.3.10 Sources Energy and Purpose
Findings from the socio-economic survey show that the major sources of energy used by households
include: solar (76% 145) and firewood (75% 144). The other sources of energy used are: and electricity,
charcoal, kerosene among others (see Error! Reference source not found.). The socio-economic
survey established that households use the sources of energy for different purposes. For cooking, most
households use firewood (83%), while for lighting, solar is the main source of energy used (74%).
Table 5.22: Percentage of responses by source of household energy and purpose
Sourc Response Cooking Lighting Production Other

e

Freque Perce Freque Perce Freque Perce Freque Perce Freque Perce
ncy nt ncy nt ncy nt ncy nt ncy nt
Solar 145 76 1 0.6 144 74 0 0% 4 3
Firewo 141 83 3 2 5 4 0 0
144 75
od
Charco 28 17 0 0 0 0 0 0
30 16
al
Electric 0 0 9 5 0 0 0 0
9 5
ity
Kerose 0 0 7 4 0 0 0 0
8 4
ne
Other 31 16 0 0 31 16 0 0 0 0
From the findings, although Pangira Sub-County and particularly the project areas are connected to the
national grid, there a few households with access to electricity hence many households still depend on
biomass related fuel, mainly firewood for cooking. Therefore, such high demand of biomass fuels has a
great implication on the natural resources as it results and encourages loss of trees.
Figure 5.21: Firewood stored in bundles as a source of household energy
5.3.11 Access to Land, Land Tenure, Ownership and Land Use
5.3.11.1 Access to land and land tenure
The study reveals that most, 89% (177) of the respondents have access (own, use or rent) to land. On
average, households have access to 34 acres of land and 9 acres is put under productive use.

5.3.11.2 Land ownership
For the land accessed by the households, the survey investigated the type of evidence that households
may have as proof of ownership. From the finding, there are different forms of evidence of occupancy
and this varies with the type of land tenure.
Table 5.23: Percentage of responses by type of land tenure
Form of ownership Frequency Percent

Customary tenant (communal or owned customary 178 89.4
ownership)
Land Owner with a title 10 5.0
Tenant (bona fide occupant, who has right to occupy 5 2.5
given by registered owner
Other 6 3.0
Total 191 100
5.3.11.3 Method through which the land owned was acquired
Most the land in the land owners in the project acquired the current land they own through inheritance
(89% 178). Others indicated that the land owned was bought (10% 19), some are renting (1% 1) while
others indicated acquisition through other methods (1% 1)
5.3.11.4 Evidence of land ownership
The most common form of evidence of occupancy is customary land owner with an agreement (61%
121). Other forms of evidence of occupancy present in the project area include land owner with a title
(3% 5), land owner with a registration receipt (7% 14) and purchase agreement (3% 6) respectively,
tenancy agreement (1% 1) among others (3% 5). More than a quarter (26% 52) indicated they have no
evidence of ownership and this is because they inherited with no documents of land ownership
5.3.11.5 Land use and activities carried out on the land
For those respondents who reported to have access to land, 75% (149) reported that their land is under
productive use. A quarter (25% 50) indicated that land is not under use. The land is currently utilised for
several purposes including but not limited to cropping farming (71% 81), poultry (34% 67), livestock
rearing (27% 54) among others.
5.3.11.6 Agricultural land use
For the land under agricultural use particularly crop farming and livestock rearing, the survey investigated
the types of crops grown, farm tools used, purpose for the crop and livestock production and livestock
production methods used as described in the sections below.
a) Crops grown on the land and purpose
The study assessed the crops grown most by households. The most grown crops are: maize (56% 45),
sorghum (75% 144), millet and sim-sim (30% 20) The other crops grown include; beans (15% 19), ground
nuts (7% 10), cassava (4% 3), sweet potatoes (2% 2) and tomatoes (1% 1).

With regard to purpose, respondents reported that households grow crops for mainly four reasons, i.e.,
domestic consumption (70% 1439), for sale (28% 25), for domestic use and sale (80% 155) among others
(4% 3).
b) Livestock production and production purpose
Respondents reported that they keep mostly poultry and goats (65% 15) and cattle (51% 25). The other
livestock kept, though by a few households include; pigs, (4% 1), sheep, (4% 1) while other types of
livestock constituted 20% (4). With regard to the number of livestock, findings suggest that households
keep on average 4 animals.
Sheep, 2 Cattle, 7
Poultry, 15
Goats, 10
Pigs, 4
Figure 5.22: Percentage of respondents by type and number of livestock owned
5.3.12 Natural Resources Access
The natural resources accessed by the residents in the project area in order of abundance are; land (58%
116), vegetation [grass] (21% 42), water resources [rivers, streams] (15% 29), forests (4% 8) and
wetlands, (1% 1) among others (2% 3).
5.3.13 Access to Water and Utilisation of Water
Access to safe water is the ratio of people served by a safe water point and piped water supply to the
total population, calculated basing on the estimated number of people per water point type (DWD/MWE,
2021). For this survey, access to water was assessed in terms of sources, functionality, distance,
purpose, amount of water used, quality of water and problems related to the water sources.
5.3.13.1 Type of water sources accessed
Households in the project area depend mainly on public boreholes (73% 170) and private boreholes (9%
21). The other water sources available in the project area are: river, lake, stream, swamp (6% 14),
protected spring/well (5% 12), rain water harvesting (4% 10) and unprotected springs (2% 5). The findings
reveal that there are several alternative free water sources within the project area. There fore level of
level of substitutability to payable piped water within beneficiary villages would majorly be influenced by
the inability to pay water tariffs and bills.

5.3.13.2 Functionality of water sources in the project area
According to Lamwo DDPIII (2020/21 – 2024/25), the district safe water coverage is at 78% and
functionality at 81.6%. With regard to functionality, the project sub-county relies on deep boreholes as
the main source of water. However, information from the Water Department presented in the Lamwo
DDPIII (2020/21 – 2024/25) suggests that out of the 63 boreholes in Lokung Sub-County, 75 are
functional while 10 are non-functional. This puts the functionality of the boreholes in the sub-county at
88%.
Table 5.24: Summary of point water sources by Sub County with a focus on Lokung Sub-County
Sub-County H/holds Protected Deep Bore Holes Shallow Wells Rain Water
Springs Tanks
F N/F Total F N/F Total F N/F Total F N/F Total
Agoro 3534 0 0 0 51 22 63 0 0 0 0 0 0
Lokung 3289 2 0 2 75 10 85 0 0 0 0 0 0
Lamwo TC 1619 0 0 0 27 4 31 0 0 0 0 0 0
Madi opei 2460 0 0 0 40 14 54 0 0 0 0 0 0
Padibe East 1798 0 0 0 42 5 47 0 0 0 0 0 0
Padibe TC 2044 0 0 0 40 4 44 0 0 0 0 0 0
Padibe West 2481 0 0 0 59 2 61 0 0 0 0 0 0
Palabek gem 3019 0 0 0 92 11 103 0 0 0 0 0 0
Palabek kal 2919 0 0 0 73 4 77 0 0 0 0 0 0
Palabek Ogili 1953 0 0 0 69 6 75 0 0 0 0 0 0
Paloga 2055 0 0 0 54 9 65 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 27171 2 0 2 622 91 705 0 0 0 0 0 0
Source: Lamwo DDPIII 2020/21 – 2024/25
According the data by the Uganda Water Atlas (2023)5, the main factor leading to non-functionality of the
water sources in Lamwo District is technical breakdown followed by low yield as depicted by the figure
presented below.
Figure 5.23: Factors leading to the non-functionality of water sources in Lamwo District
5
http://wsdb.mwe.go.ug/index.php/reports/district/111

The project will contribute towards improving access to water source point, sufficient supply which will
address the challenges associated with non-functionality of some of the water sources in the project area
as well as year-round service which is uninterrupted.
5.3.13.3 Distance of the water source
Regardless of the purpose for which water is collected (be it domestic, livestock, irrigation, business, or
any other purpose), the survey established that the average distance to the nearest water source is 1km.
From the table below, Lokung Sub-County is one of the sub-counties having the lowest percentage of
water source with a radius of 1Km.

Table 5.25: Number of water sources and distance to the source as of 30th June 2020
Sub county 2014 population % accessibility area

Area In 1km Area in 2km
Agoro 18,226 11 34
Lokung 16,232 13 26
Madi Opei 11,992 5 17
Padibe East 9,143 30 8
Padibe West 12,440 28 64
Palabek Gem 14,825 9 29
Palabek Kal 14,253 9 40
Paloga 10,061 15 43
Palabek Ogili 9,485 4 14
Padibe TC 9784 25 10
Lamwo TC 7990 16 10
Total 134,431 165 295
Source: Lamwo DDPIII 2020/21 – 2024/25
By implementing the proposed project,
 The average distance to a safe water source will be reduced to to almost half of the current
distances as depicted in the table above within the core villages especially where public stand
posts shall be established. This will contribute towards reducing the distance moved by
household to the nearest water source hence saving households time and energy to engage in
other productive work.
 It will contribute towards Uganda’s achievement of the sustainable goals particularly Goal 6 which
aims at universal and equitable access to safe and affordable drinking water for all by 2030.
 At national level, it will contribute towards increasing access to safe water supply from 70% to
85% in rural areas as indicated under the chapter for human development in the plan of the Third
National Development Plan [NDP III] (2020/21 – 2024/25).
 At district levels, according to the Lamwo DDPIII 2020/21 – 2024/25, the it will in addition to the
50 deep boreholes and 5 pipe water schemes the district plans to construct in the in the next five
years contribute towards increasing safe water coverage from 78% to 90%.
5.3.13.4 Purpose for which water is collected
The findings of the socio-economic survey show that households use water almost exclusively for
domestic purposes, 100% (191). Less than a quarter 24% (46) of the households use water for livestock.
Other purposes for which water is collected are commercial activities, commercial purposes (1% 2),
irrigation (0.4% 1), among others (11% 21).
5.3.13.5 Amount of water used by households
Results of the cumulative percentage suggest that 64% of the households use at least 100 litres (5 jerry
cans) of water per day. The survey findings further indicate that 11% (22) of households use at least 20

to 50 litres of water per day; 23% (45) use between 51 to 80 litres; 30% (60) use between 81 to 100 litres
of water per day. Only a few households use more than 100 litres of water per day as shown in below
35% 120%
30%
Cumlative Percentage
100%100%
92%
25% 81% 85%
80%
Percentage
20%
64% 60%
15%
40%
10% 34%
5% 20%
11%
0% 0%
20-50 50-80 80-100 100-140 140-180 180-200 Over 200
Litres of Water
Figure 5.24: Household use of water per day
5.3.13.6 Perceived quality of water collected for domestic consumption
As a response to the question, “how do you rate the quality of water you use for domestic consumption
in terms of smell, taste, colour?” A third (31% 92) rated the quality of water as good. A quarter (23% 45)
rated the quality as 'very good' on those three parameters.
Very Poor Poor

1% Very Good 10%
26%
Good
31% Fair
32%
Figure 5.25: Response by water quality rating in the project area
In addition, there are measures to ensure reliable supply of quality water. However, the utility operator
should ensure that the taste, odour or appearance of supplied water conforms to the consumers’
preferences in order to avoid a scenario where system is rejected / abandoned.
5.3.13.7 Water quality improvement methods
To assess whether households adopt any method to improve the quality of water for domestic
consumption, the household survey included three questions to that effect. Outcomes of the first question
suggest that almost all (96% 190) of households in the project area do drink water the way it is fetched
from the source. Only 7.5% of households indicated treat their water for human consumption that is
boiling (4% 8) and use of purifying tablets (0.5% 1). This implies that residents in the project area are not
accustomed to improving the quality of water they consume.

5.3.13.8 Problems associated with the current water source
More than half (56% 111) of the respondents indicated that the water source is associated with problems.
The most significant problems relate to; large crowds and long queues at source (40% 80), carrying water
on the head (23% 46), poor taste (39% 20), transport related problems (11% 11). The other problems
include; transport related problems, long distances, low yield, water dries up in dry season among others
as presented below.
Vendors dictate the order of collection 1%
Dries up during dry seasons 10%
Low yield 12%
Long distance (km) 13%
Transport Problems 16%
Tastes bad 16%
Carry water on the head 23%
Large crowd/log queue at the source 40%
0% 5% 10% 15% 20% 25% 30% 35% 40% 45%
Figure 5.26: Percentage of response by problems associated with the water sources
At household level, the burden of collecting water among the children (girls and boys) has direct influence
on development and gender dimensions such as gender inequality, vulnerability and marginalization,
exposure to GBV, violence against children, violence against women and girls.
5.3.14 Household Sanitation, Hygiene and Disease Burden
5.3.14.1 Access to excreta facilities
To assess household sanitation, respondents were asked to mention the type of excreta facility they
owned. Almost all (95%) households have access to excreta disposal facility. Of those, 76% (147) of)
have a personal pit latrine while 19% (38) have a shared pit latrine. A few (5% 9) households indicated
have no excreta facility.
According to the Pangira RGC design report (2023), the two stance VIP public facility within the project
area at Pangira market is in poor shape and one (1) six (6) stance waterborne toilet has been proposed
to be constructed at Pangira Market. The construction of the proposed public toilet facility by the project
shall contribute towards increasing access to proper latrines in Lamwo District from 60% in 2019/2020 to
85% in 2024/2025 as indicated in the Lamwo DDPIII (2020/21 – 2024/25).
5.3.14.2 Disease burden
Respondents were asked if they had a household member who had suffered from a particular disease in
the past 12 months that preceded the study. The survey findings show that majority, almost all (95% 189)
indicated they had a person who suffered from an illness. The survey findings show that the commonest

diseases suffered in the project area are: cough (85% 170) and malaria (90% 180). Other diseases
include; typhoid, high blood pressure, anaemia among others as shown below.
Table 5.26: Percentage of responses by diseases suffered by household members
Diseases Responses Adult Adult Youth Child Child ≤ 5

Female Male (12-18yrs) (6-12yrs) yrs.
n % n % n % n % n %
Water related % n
Malaria 180 90% 100 50% 60 30% 40 20% 42 21% 23 12%
Typhoid 58 29% 35 18% 21 11% 11 6% 23 12% 5 3%
Diarrhoea 43 22% 15 8% 32 16% 23 12% 12 6% 7 4%
Brucellosis 7 4% 1 1% 1 1% 0 0% 0 0% 0 0%
Airborne 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
Cough 170 85% 54 27% 32 16% 43 22% 54 27% 25 13%
Acute Respiratory
10 5% 5 3% 2 1% 2 1% 1 1% 2 1%
infection
Pneumonia 8 4% 0 0% 1 1% 1 1% 3 2% 6 3%
Measles 2 1% 1 1% 0 0% 1 1% 6 3% 0 0%
Chronic illnesses 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
High Blood pressure 25 13% 14 7% 4 2% 0 0% 1 1% 0%
HIV/AIDS 9 5% 4 2% 4 2% 2 1% 0 0% 0 0%
Diabetes 3 2% 1 1% 4 2% 0 0% 0 0% 0 0%
Nutrition 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
Anaemia 12 6% 1 1% 1 1% 3 2% 4 2% 5 3%
Kwashiorkor 2 1% 1 1% 0 0% 0 0% 1 1% 2 1%
According to the Lamwo DDPIII (2020/21 – 2024/25), the biggest burden of disease in the district are
preventable and communicable diseases. Tables lists the commonest causes of morbidity and mortality
in among persons aged five (5) years and above and children under five (5) years in the financial year
2019/2020.

9%
All others
12% Children < 5yrs
0% Persons > 5 yrs
Malaria in Pregnancy
1%
6%
Pneumonia
2%
11%
Diarrhoea-Acute
2%
1%
Intestinal Worms
2%
1%
Injuries (Trauma due to other causes)
2%
1%
Urinary Tract Infection (UTI)
2%
5%
Skin Diseases
3%
1%
Gastro-Intestinal Disorders (Non-Infective)
5%
25%
No Pneumonia-Cough or Cold
18%
57%
Malaria
27%
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60%
Figure 5.27: Percentage of diseases affecting the district
Given the finding above, the proposed project will be able to access and supply of clean and safe water
sufficient and reliable enough. This will translate into contribution towards the elimination of the above-
mentioned diseases especially those which are related to lack of access to clean and safe water.
5.3.15 Access to social services
5.3.15.1 Health services seeking behaviour
Those respondents who had a household member who suffered from an illness, were asked if they sought
professional medical attention. The results from this question suggest that most, (95% 189) respondents
indicated they sought professional medical treatment. Overall, a small proportion of respondents, who
reported having a member who suffered from an illness indicated they did not seek professional medical
treatment.
With regard to where the health services were sought, a large proportion of respondents indicated that
the sought health care services from a Health Centre III, some sought health care services from a Health
Centre II. Other health care facilities accessed by households include; clinics.
According to the Lamwo District Development Plan III, the district currently has 31 functional health
facilities. Out of the nine (9) are at the level of Health Centre II, Pangira Health Centre in among these
which happens to be the most used by households. It is the highest-ranking health facility in the Sub-
County. The other health centres offering healthcare services to the households in the project area are;
Dibolyec and Ngomoromo Health Centre II’s

5.3.15.2 Reason for not seeking professional medical treatment
For those respondents who did not seek professional medical treatment, the survey investigated the
reason for not seeking professional health treatment and the results show that the leading reasons are;
Table 5.27: Number of responses by reasons for not seeking health services
Reason Reason
Busy farming Drugs are always out of stock
Distance to the facility Discouraged by the quality of healthcare
Financial constraints High transport costs due to long distance
Resorted to traditional medicine Delayed decision-making
According to the Lamwo DDP III, about 58.5% of the households in the district are within a 5km radius to
a health facility. This implies that still a significant proportion 41.5% are still located far away from the
health facilities hence this partly explains the reluctance in some households when it comes to seeking
professional health services.
5.3.15.3 Health related problems affecting the project community
The ESIA investigated the common health problems affecting project area. The findings from this
investigation show that the most pressing health problem is the high prevalence/incidence of diseases
(80% 159), long distance to health facility 54% (107), inadequate water sources 64% (113), low quality
of healthcare services 50% (96) among others.
Lack of maternal and child health 35%
Long distance to the health facility 54%
Cost of health services 48%
Low quality healthcare services 45%
Inadequacy of water sources 65%
Shortage of medicine 64%
High prevalence or incidence of diseases 80%
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%
Figure 5.28: Percentage of responses by problems affecting access to healthcare services
5.3.15.4 Access to education services
Data from the Lamwo DDP III, indicates that there are twenty-two (22) learning institutions both private
(6) and government (16) combined in the Lokung Sub-County. Of those, twenty (20) are primary schools,
one (1) secondary school, and one (1) vocational institution.
There are only four (4) school in the project area of Pangira RGC. These are presented in the table below.

Table 5.28 School in the project area of Pangira RGC
Name of School Male Female Total

Pangira Primary School 403 430 833
Ngomoromo Primary School 295 352 647
Akeli Kongo Primary School 265 281 546
Okora Primary School 186 145 331
Total 1149 1208 2357
Source: Final Detailed Design Report – Pangira RGC, 2023
From the Pangira RGC design report, Pangira Primary School since it has a high number of pupils is set
to benefit from the two (2). VIP toilet blocks of 5 stances each one for boys and girls each and one (1) 4
stance VIP toilet block for staff all fully equipped with hand washing facilities.
5.3.16 Land Take and Acquisition
The project will acquire land for all project related components. The ESIA assessed the conditions of the
sites. The risks and challenges related to land acquisition were assessed in relation (relocation, loss of
residential land, or loss of shelter), economic displacement (loss of land, assets, or access to assets
leading to loss of income sources or other means of livelihood); alternative sites and possibility of land
conflicts.
The proposed project consists of two boreholes, located at coordinates E 463596 N398748 and E 463883
N398980. Both boreholes are located on land under fallow away from settlements. Vegetation is mainly
composed of thick grass thickets interspersed with low storey trees. Species identification to determine
their conservation status shall be undertaken during detailed studies.
Figure 5.29: 1st Borehole in Pangira at coordinates E 463596 398748N
The proposed transmission route traverses through largely fallow land punctuated by a few croplands of
sunflowers, maize and other cereals. A working corridor of 3 m along the pipelines is anticipated. Working
corridors will be restored after completion of work, repossessed by the respective owners. Storage tanks
shall be erected at a site with the following coordinates (E464 443 N 400410).

Figure 5.30: The proposed storage site for Pangira at coordinates E464 443 N 400410
The proposed transmission lines will traverse a relatively short distance through a relatively built-up
environment hence with a potential of raising compensation of affected properties. Proposed storage site
is located on a rock area behind the Pangira Health Centre III between the sub county structure and a
telecom mast.
5.3.16.1 Total Land requirements
From the engineering designs and RAP survey report, total land requirements for the Pangira WSS have
been estimated at 11.286 acres. However, the project case scenario is that the treated water primary
distribution network will follow road reserves hence actual land required for the project is 1.933 acres.
This is on assumption that land to be acquired will only be for the two boreholes, storage area and
transmission lines. This excludes land requirements for access road construction which will be
determined by the contractor and based on his approach to the assignment. Details of various land takes
are presented in tabular form below.
Dimensions (m) AREA

Scheme Component
Length Width m2 Acres Hectares
Pangira Borehole 1 20 20 400 0.099 0.04
Borehole 2 20 20 400 0.099 0.04
Reservoir 20 20 400 0.099 0.04
Total 1200 0.297 0.12
Land requirements for the raw water mains, transmission and primary distribution assuming a width of 3 meters

Land need
Scheme Component Details Length (km)
(acres)
Transmission Pipe 1 from A 3-meter width easement

Borehole 1 to the Proposed corridor 2.207 1.636
Reservoir
Pangira
A 3-meter width easement
Distribution Pipe 13.017 9.650
corridor
Total 15.224 11.286
Grand total land requirements for all infrastructure (acres)
Note Primary distribution mains to follow road reserve hence no need for land acquisition since it is public
land. Therefore, actual land to be acquired is approximately 1.933 acres (0.099, 0.099, 0.099 and 1.636).
The project will also require land for establishment of auxiliary sites such the Contractors camp. This
ESIA did not assess the land requirements such sites hence in the event that land is required during the
construction phase, the Contractor should engage and agree with the land lords on how to access land
need for the auxiliary sites. Hence MoUs may be signed between the Contractor and the Land Lord.
5.3.17 Household Vulnerability Assessment
Vulnerable groups are people who may, by virtue of their gender, ethnicity, age, physical or mental disability,
economic disadvantage or social status, be more adversely affected compared to other groups of people by project
related activities. These may have limited ability to claim or take advantage of project related assistance and
development benefits. To that end, the WB OP 4.12 (8) requires that particular attention should be paid to the
needs of vulnerable groups among those displaced such as those below the poverty line, landless, elderly, people
with disabilities, women and children and indigenous people and ethnic minorities. Also, the 1995 Uganda
Constitution (as amended) stipulates that: “the State shall take affirmative action in favour of groups marginalised
on the basis of gender, age, disability or any other reason for the purpose of redressing imbalances which exist
against them”. The vulnerabilities in the households are mainly; illiteracy (60%), widowed/widower (11%) among
others.
Table 5.29: Types of vulnerabilities in households within the project area

Type of Vulnerability Frequency Percent
Illiterate (No education and primary level) 120 60%
widowed/widower 22 11%
Chronic illnesses (Diabetes, high blood pressure) 15 8%
Orphaned children 15 8%
Person with a disability i.e dumb and deaf, mental instability or physically disabled 12 6%

5.3.18 Physical Cultural Resources (PCR)
A few cultural heritage sites were recorded in the project area during the survey. Basing on the field visit
and project impact assessment the project will majorly affect archaeological resources which by their
nature are always located below the surface. Burial sites and churches will have indirect impacts at
construction phase of the project but will not need relocation with the exception of possible accidental
findings. Details of the recorded sites is presented below.
5.3.16.2 Archaeological sites
Archaeological findings from the field walking surveys included a few sites with pottery of majorly roulette
decorations (LIA tradition) and grinding hollows. The test pit excavation and examination of newly cut pits
didn’t record any significant archaeological artefacts. The recorded surface artefacts through walking
survey were analyzed at the depositional level in the field. Analysis of recorded potsherds mainly involved
decoration motifs, temper, surface finishing, pottery part and tradition. No lithic, metallurgical and faunal
artefacts were recorded during the survey. The pottery recorded was dominated by roulette motifs, a
common tradition in the Late Iron Age. Two (2) archaeological sites were recorded including one with
grinding hollows and one with pottery
Pagada 1 archaeological test pit excavation 1
A 1x1 m unit was established in Pagada village, Pangira parish, in Lokung Sub County and in Lamwo
District, at the GPS coordinates 36N 0463795, 0399481, 971 m. From the surface, there was no any
archaeological materials recorded in dark grey loose soils. Initially a systematic approach was adopted,
going by a spit of 20 cm interval however the unit didn’t record any archaeological remains from all levels.
The unit was excavated upto level 3 at a depth of 55 cm in compacted strong brown soils. The unit was
considered sterile in level 3, pictures taken and back filled.
Figure 5.31: Test pit excavation in Pagada 1
5.3.16.3 Graves/Burial Grounds
One burial site with 11graves (4 cemented and 7 earth graves) was recorded approximately 10m to the
demarcated pipeline area in Pagada 1 village belonging to Okello Francis. The site will not be directly
affected but needs to be labelled during the pipeline excavation because of its close proximity to the
project facilities.

5.3.16.4 Spiritual sites/Places of worship/churches
Three (3) churches were recorded approximately 200m from the project area. These places of worship
will need access especially during the project construction phase as pipeline excavation has potential to
break access to these sites.
Archaeological findings from the field walking surveys included sites with pottery of majorly roulette
decorations (LIA tradition). The test pit excavation recorded a few potsherds and examination of newly
cut pits didn’t record any significant archaeological artefacts. The recorded surface artefacts through
walking survey were analyzed at the depositional level in the field. Analysis of recorded potsherds mainly
involved decoration motifs, temper, surface finishing, pottery part and tradition. No lithic, metallurgical
and faunal artefacts were recorded during the survey. The pottery recorded was dominated by roulette
motifs, a common tradition in the Late Iron Age and cross hatches of Early Iron Age pottery (EIA). One
(1) national site with stonewalls was recorded and 5 sites with pottery
Note: Details of all the recorded sites is discussed in the table below;

Table 5.30: Showing detailed identified Cultural heritage resources
NO PCR GPS location Photo description Site description and Significance Possible impact Recommendation/
(Zone 36N) Comment
Burial sites
01 Pagada Eastings Northing There are four cemented graves and seven  Possible The site is located at 1
burial site 1 s earth graves located at the home of Francis dumping on the m off the demarcated
0463668 0398860 Okello Lajany who is the LC 1 of Pagada graves, water pipeline area and
village and can be contacted on  Possible the following should be
0787547932. These graves are located at exhuming of followed;
10m away from the proposed water pipeline human remains,  Avoid the site
from the water source (Bore Hole) and can  Possible  Mark and label the
be indirectly affected. Burial sites have a vibration in case site during the
great attachment to the family of the of heavy pipeline
deceased and should be protected. machinery excavation
 Avoid using
machines that
might cause
vibration in the
vicinity of the site
Archaeological sites
02 Pagada 0462607 0399426 These grinding hollows were recorded within Possible destruction  Avoidance,
rock the distribution pipeline area towards and loss, since it is  Incline on the
grinding Pangira trading centre. 4 hollows were located within the opposite side of
hollows - recorded at this site and the biggest project footprint the pipe line
Archaeologi measuring 20cm in radius. These are similar
cal site to those recorded at Dolwe Island, with
several rock art sites. These site are
important in understanding prehistoric kind
of life in Northern Uganda in general, a
region that has previously attracted little
attention in archaeological research

03 Pangira 0461863 0399706 This site is located in Pangira village, Lokung Damage or loss of the  Preconstruction
pottery – subcounty in Lamwo District along the archaeological rescue
Archaeologi project water distribution pipeline. Scatters artefacts excavations
cal site of tiny decorated and non-decorated  Monitoring by an
potsherds were recorded within the water archaeologist
distribution pipeline area. Potsherds were during construction
dominated by roulette decorations of Late phase
Iron Age
Places of worship/churches
04 St Paul 0461602 0399438 The church is located about 30m from the Loss of access during Maintain access to the
Church of distribution water pipe line to Pangira trading project construction church at all phases of
Uganda center and will be indirectly affected during phase the project especially on
Pangira the construction of the pipeline. The church Sundays
is located in Pangira village, Lokung sub
county in Lamwo District. The church is
under construction and currently the
services are conducted under a mango tree
on Sundays.
05 Pangira 0461729 0399600 The church is located in Pangira trading Loss of access during Maintain access to the
Catholic center and will be indirectly affected at project construction church at all phases of
Church construction phase of the project. It is phase the project especially on
located approximately 12m from the water Sundays
distribution pipeline
06 Potwach 0464409 0400395 This church is located close to where the Loss of access during Maintain access to the
catholic proposed storage tank is to be constructed project construction church at all phases of
church in Latida village. The newly constructed phase the project especially on
church is made out of bricks and white iron Sundays
sheets, it accommodates approximately 100
people on a Sunday service.

Table 5.31: Summary of Baseline Cultural Heritage Sites recorded
S/N Site Name Coordinates Site Type Project Proximity

Eastings Northings
01 Pagada burial site 1 0463668 0398860 Living culture 10m off the Row the water
pipeline (source to storage)
02 Pagada rock grinding 0462607 0399426 Archaeological site Within the RoW of the
hollows distribution water pipeline
03 Pangira pottery site 0461863 0399706 Archaeological site Within the RoW the water
distribution pipeline
04 St Paul Church of 0461602 0399438 Living culture 30m off the water Pipeline
Uganda Pangira
06 Pangira Catholic 0461729 0399600 Living culture 12m off the water Pipeline
Church
07 Potwach catholic 0464409 0400395 Living culture 20m from the storage tank
church area and pipeline

6 STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION AND PROJECT DISCLOSURE

6.1 Introduction
Stakeholder consultation, engagement and project disclosure form an integral and mandatory part of the
Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) process as stipulated in the National Environment Act
No5 of 2019 and World Bank ESS 10. As such, the interaction with the communities should be meaningful,
adequate, timely and proportionate to improve the environmental and social sustainability of projects, enhance
project acceptance, and make a significant contribution to successful project design and implementation.
Specifically, on this project, stakeholder engagement entailed an interactive process where input of key
stakeholders including project affected communities, district technical officials, political leaders, government
regulatory institutions and other interested parties. Information disclosed included details of the purpose,
nature, location, duration, the project benefits and adverse impacts, as well as the proposed enhancement and
mitigation measures.
The stakeholder engagement mechanisms employed during this study included information sharing meetings
with the stakeholders, Focus Group Discussions and key informant interviews. Key design information was
disclosed in relevant local languages (Luo) and in a manner that is accessible and culturally appropriate.
Meetings were also held with disadvantaged and vulnerable groups affected by the project such as, elderly,
women among others.
6.2 Objectives of Stakeholder Engagement, Consultation, and Participation
6.2.1 Aim of stakeholder engagement
Stakeholder engagement aims to build and maintain an open and constructive relationship in compliance with
international performance standards and national legislation, within the prevailing socio-economic conditions.
6.2.2 Specific objectives
Stakeholder engagement was informed by the following objectives;
 Understand and characterize potential environmental, socio-economic risks/impacts of the project.
 Raise awareness and obtain baseline information on project area
 Developing effective mitigation measures and management plans.
 Enhance local benefits from the proposed project.
 To furnish key stakeholders with key project information
 To identify key stakeholders that may influence the project and its activities

 To give stakeholders an opportunity to make input into the project implementation and management
process by highlighting their expectations, fears, concerns and what needs to be done
 To provide the framework for development of constructive, long-term relationships, based on dialogue
and communication that are aimed at attaining broad support for the project.
 To provide the framework for ongoing stakeholder identification, analysis, mapping and prioritization,
consultation and engagement; risk and issue identification; information sharing; and documentation of
engagement and required follow-up actions.
 To clarify the roles and responsibilities of different stakeholders in the implementation of the plan.
6.3 Principles for Effective Stakeholder Engagement
The preparation of this ESIA was based on a set of principles that define the core values underpinning
interactions with stakeholders. Based on the IFC Best Practice, these principles include:
1. Commitment: To demonstrate commitment, the need to understand, engage and identify the
community(ies) must be recognized and acted upon early in the process;
2. Integrity: This is demonstrated when engagement is conducted in a manner that fosters mutual
respect and trust;
3. Respect: This is created when the rights, cultural beliefs, values and interests of stakeholders and
neighboring communities are recognized.
4. Transparency: This is demonstrated when community concerns are responded to in a timely, open
and effective manner.
5. Inclusiveness: This is achieved when broad participation is encouraged and supported by appropriate
participation opportunities; and
6. Trust: This is achieved through open and meaningful dialogue that respects and upholds a
community’s beliefs, values, and opinions.
6.4 Stakeholder Engagement Plan
Stakeholder consultations were conducted at all the various stages of project planning including; inception,
engineering design, during detailed ESIA field studies and are expected to continue throughout the
implementation phase. A structured approach was adopted as presented in Table 6.1 below. Throughout the
consultation process at the different levels the following were observed and noted:
a. Stakeholder’s appreciation: All the stakeholders interviewed appreciated and welcomed the
proposed solar powered water supply and sanitation project. Stakeholder expectations were quite high.

b. Stakeholders’ concerns: Stakeholders including government officials, political leaders, host

communities and other stakeholders expressed several concerns on the achievement thus they were
skeptical whether the project will be implemented as explained. Other concerns were on loss of land,
delayed compensation, demolition of property, sexual harassment and GBV, increase in cases of
HIV/AIDS, and other concerns.
c. Project Timeline: District and Sub county level stakeholders questioned the timelines for project
construction commissioning.
Table 6.1: Summary of the Stakeholder Consultation Process
ENGAGEMENT OBJECTIVES TARGET GROUPS TIMELINE

Consultation Round 1: Engineering Design and Inception phase
a. To identify and map out the various stakeholders a. Community around the project area. Jan 2023
and their interests b. Lamwo District Local Government
b. To disclose the project and design to the c. Lokung Sub County
stakeholders;
c. To ascertain modalities to enhance smooth
community participation in the project; and
d. To harmonize data collection between the
feasibility study and engineering design team
and the ESIA team.
Consultation Round 2: Detailed study phase
a. To ascertain stakeholders’ interests and a. Community around the project area. February 2023
information requirements about the project. b. MWE (DWRM, WSDF-N, Upper Nile
WMZ, Umbrella Organization, Rural
water Regional Centers)
c. NEMA
d. NFA, UWA, OPM, UNHCR, etc
e. Lamwo District Local Government
Administration leadership. (Political
and Technical)
f. Lokung Sub county
g. Residents and local Council official of
Pangira and Licwa parishes.
Consultation Round 3: Consultation on ESIA preliminary findings
a. To disseminate the ESIA report to the March and April
stakeholders; a) MWE (DWRM, WSDF-N, Upper Nile 2023
b. To verify whether stakeholders’ interests and WMZ, Umbrella Organization, Rural
water Regional Centers)
information requirements about the project were
accurately captured in the draft ESIA report b) NEMA
c. To collect any other information which may have c) Community around the project area.
not been collected during Round 2 consultation d) Lamwo District Local Government
phase Administration leadership. (Political
and Technical)

ENGAGEMENT OBJECTIVES TARGET GROUPS TIMELINE

e) Lokung Sub county
f) Residents and local Council official of
Pagada and Licwa parishes
6.5 Standards for Consultation
The public consultation was guided by Ugandan guidelines as well as World Bank policy guidelines. However,
although there are no regulations for public consultation, national guidelines for EIA in Uganda require that the
public is given full opportunity for involvement and participation throughout the EIA process. People including
individuals, or groups of local communities who may be directly affected by a proposed project should be a
focus for public involvement.
Since identification of the “public” likely to be indirectly affected by the proposed activity is often difficult, it is
important to exercise care in deciding who participates in the consultations to ensure that a fair and balanced
representation of views is obtained by ensuring that the views of the minority groups are not overshadowed
those from the influential members of the public. Therefore, the public may appropriately be involved in the EIA
process through:
 Informing them about the proposed project.

 Open public meetings on the projects.
 Inviting written comments on proposed project.
 Use of community representatives.
 Comment and review of the Environmental Impact Statements; and,
1) Making relevant documents available to any interested members of the public in specified places or at
the cost of reproduction.
Three stages for public involvement in the EIA process are spelt out:
1) Public consultation before EIA is done
If after receiving and screening/reviewing the developer’s project brief, the Authority (NEMA), in consultation
with the Lead Agency, decides that it is necessary to consult and seek public comment, it shall, within four
weeks from submission of the project brief and/or notice of intent to develop, publish the developer’s notification
and other supporting documents or their summary in a public media. It is required that objections and comments
from the public and other stakeholders shall be submitted to the Authority and to the Lead Agency within 21
days from the publication of notice.
2) Public consultation during the EIA
The team conducting the EIA shall consult and seek public opinion/views on social and environmental aspects
of the project. Such public involvement shall be during scoping and any other appropriate stages during the
conduct of the study.

3) Public consultation after EIA (EIA Review)
The EIS shall be a public document and may be inspected at any reasonable time by any person. Considering
the scale and level of influences likely to result from the operation of a project, the Authority, in consultation
with the Lead agency, shall decide regions where it is necessary to display the EIA report to the public.
4) World Bank Safeguard Policy: Stakeholder Engagement and Information Disclosure
The Policy recognizes the importance of open and transparent engagement with project stakeholders. Success
of any project is hinged on level and quality of stakeholder engagement which is an inclusive process expected
to occur throughout the project life cycle. Engagement is more useful when introduced in the early phases of
project development and is mainstreamed into all levels of decision making. Additionally, consultations should
be done in a manner that gives affected communities, opportunities to express their views on project risks and
impacts and their mitigation measures.
In applying Policy, the following scope was envisaged:
a) Stakeholder identification and analysis: The Policy requires the identification of key project affected
parties and those with interests in the project. At this level emphasis will be on vulnerable people or
groups of people whose situation are likely to be accelerated by project implementation. Identification
should be able to bring out different sets of affected people and their interests.
b) Information Disclosure: The borrower is obliged to undertake timely and effective disclosure of
information regarding the project including its purpose, nature, scale, potential risks and impacts on
the local communities and further present possible mitigation measures.
c) Meaningful: Consultation is meaningful if a dialogue exists, communities and individuals should be

given an opportunity to interact with respect and dignity. Interactions should be based on prior
disclosure of project relevant information to all parties.
6.6 Issues, Concerns and Recommendations raised
The emerging issues that were recorded through consultations have been detailed in the following subsections.
6.6.1 National Level Consultations
6.6.1.1 Office of the Prime Minister-Department of Refugees
Consultations were conducted with the staff from the Refugee Department of the Office of the Prime Minister
and the departments concerns are summarised below.
 OPM is the lead agency in charge of government business and has a high stake in all government
programs hence it is important and a good practice that it is consulted especially on projects that
receive funding to uplift the welfare of refugee and host communities.

 He noted that a lot of funds are coming in from different donors to support work in refugee and host
communities including the 18 Sub-windows and MWE ought to have informed OPM in advance that
a consultant had been procured to conduct and any studies the refugee hosting district targeted by
the project for purposes of early engagements and collective ownership of the project findings.
 He further informed the team the OPM and MWE work at policy level and OPM has the responsibility
of coordinating all ministries especially on refugee and host community related work.
 He noted that there are five refugee regional desks across the country that is Arua, Lamwo,
Adjumani, Mbarara and Hoima and further explained that OPM works directly with other government
ministries and agencies to extend serves to these communities.
 He noted that OPM does not provide services directly to the communities but works with other
development partners including the provision of environment, water and sanitation related
interventions.
 He informed the team the at OPM level, they can only provide generic information on access to
water and sanitation because they have 13 refugee settlements across 12 districts.
 He informed the team that MWE or the Consultant should write a letter and attach an introductory
letter from MWE requesting for permission to access the refugee communities and development
partners for detailed consultations in order to collect district specific information.
Figure 6.1: Meeting with the Monitoring and Evaluation Officer at OPM Refugee Department

6.6.1.2 Ministry of Gender, Labour and Social Development
Consultations were made with the staff of the Occupational Health and Safety Department in the Ministry of
Gender; Labour and Social Development (MoGLSD) and the departments concerns are summarised below:
 There is need to map and ensure that all people in the supply area benefit from the project
 Water user committees should form with participation from local council system.
 Continuous engagements with other stakeholders such as the cultural and religious leaders
 MWE should ensure that land on which project facilities will be seated is acquired and
registered with under it.
 Ensure land acquisition process is finalized before project implementation
 Where resettlement is involved, it should be done with clear documentations to avoid future
conflicts that would disrupt the project
 Emphasis in undertaking hygienic measures especially on water and air quality
 Contractors to develop environmentally sustainable management plan
 Grievance Redress Committees (GRC) should be constituted to work and integrate with village
local committee.
 The contractor and all service providers during implementation ensure they are registered
including the consultant.
 Construction plans have to be submitted to the engineering department for approval
 There is need to fencing off water points to avoid sharing water with animals
 MWE should benchmark on other projects for good practice
 Construction of tap stands for people who cannot afford household water connection due to
high fees involved.
Figure 6.2: Meeting with the officers at OHSD in the Ministry of Gender, Labour and Social Development

6.6.1.3 Uganda National Roads Authority
Consultations were made with the UNRA Highway Engineer and the concerns are summarised below.
 Requested that Pinnacle or client present the preliminary design of the water project so that UNRA
can identify those particular areas likely to be affected. Such areas like crossings.
 Land is already acquired and there is provision for utilities along the road reserve. However not
certain whether the other utility lines specifically electric poles that had been removed have been
replaced.
 UNRA is willing to share the road designs for more guidance.
 Another engagement where both client and the consultant can attend. Also in the attendance
should be the design engineer to address design issues.
 Drilling the road cannot be avoided in the entire water works however, the road should be restored
in case it is drilled for water pipes. At some points, water pipes can utilize the culvers
 Management of traffic should be ensured during construction works.
 Further engagement where the client can be represented
6.6.2 Consultation with Lamwo District Authorities
Stakeholder consultations were held with the Lamwo District technical team. The district level consultations
with the Chief Administrative Officer, District Water Officer among others generated the following concerns as
summarised below.
 The project will contribute tremendously access to safe and clean water and this will also contribute
towards reducing and eliminating water related diseases in the project area.
 Land owners should be promptly compensated to avoid project delays due to land related challenges
 Dissemination of additional information through the public media about the on-going project activities
and social mitigation measures.
 Using the grievance management mechanism to resolve outstanding concerns and complaints.
 Accountability and observation of implementation timelines
 Keep local leaders at all level involved and informed on project timelines and progress
 Shoddy work will not be accepted for the project hence it is important that during and after construction,
value for money is achieved.
 The project should offer job opportunities to the people of Lamwo especially those residing where the
project will be implemented

Figure 6.4: Group picture (MWE staff & Consulting Team) after meeting the Lamwo District team led by CAO (in necktie)
6.6.3 Consultations with Lokung Sub-County
The following matrix presents a summary of the key concerns generated through consultations with the
community intended to be served by the proposed project.
Table 6.2: Consultations with Lokung Sub-County
Stakeholder Key Issues and Concerns Raised Response

Senior Assistant  He encouraged Pinnacle Enviro Consult  This was noted by the Consultant
Secretary to work closely with the district physical
Lokung Sub-County planner for proper future physical
planning aspects.
 He expressed concern on the land issue  The Consultant informed the meeting
especially the people whose land will be the RAP and ESIA studies are co-
affected by the project stressing that currently being conducted to establish
these should be adequately the magnitude of impact on land and
compensated and ESIA should be done. other assets and those that will be
He was also concerned about the affected shall be compensated.
destruction of trees where the pipes will
pass.
 He said local context should be put into  The consultant informed the meeting
consideration regarding how the local that during project implementation, a
people live and call for respect to each number of management plans shall be
other as work is being done. developed by the contractor to guide
their interactions with the community.

 He called upon the project to provide the  During constructions, opportunities

locals with benefit from, the projects ie. especially in areas where the
provision of employment opportunities community member have the required
and not necessarily bringing only skills shall be given first priority of
foreigners for work that can be done by employment.
the locals.
 He asked that the reports of the findings  MWE shall share the reports once they
should be shared with them so that they are ready and approved.
can also know what is going on about the
project activities. And this can be done
through sharing of contacts and email
addresses.
 He encouraged more  Assurance was given that stakeholder
stakeholders/coordination meetings to be engagements shall continue throughout
conducted since they enable the the project.
stakeholders to understand the Sub-
County financial calendar for better
planning purposes.
Community  She requested that the Sub- County  All institutions in the project area shall
Development Officer Headquarters and the nearby be target to benefit from the project.
Schools also directly benefit from the
Lokung Sub-County project.
 She also asked what the project's  With regard to project expectations from
requirements are from the the community, the Consultant informed
community. the meeting that the community is
expected to fully participate in all project
activities such as monitoring during
implementation, secure the established
piped water system from vandalism
among others.
Consultations in Pangira RGC community
Stakeholder Key Issues and Concerns Raised Response

Pagada village Why take the water to the tank in Pawol The water is going to distributed by gravity hence the
first then bring it back here again highest point to enable water project cover a wider
instead of connecting it directly? area coverage and population was
Water coming back from the tank to the community
should be treated and safe for use and that's why it
was to be first taken to the tank for proper treatment
before distribution.
What will be done in case the water All considerations are put in place to ensure that all
pipes passed through a cemetery/ cultural norms and values are followed in case of such
instances if relocating a grave is necessary.

grave? Will cultural values be

respected?
Can the water be connected into Yes, as long as one can afford to and is can access
someone's house if one wanted to? the distribution
Will the water be for free and if not, how A water management committee with the help of the
much will it be charged and what will be technical staff will be set up after the project
the payment method, daily or monthly? completion and they will be the one tasked to come up
with the amount and how it will be charged.
Why use the district rates and property Every District has its own property rates that are set
valuer for compensation and not allow by the district structure for uniformity purpose and
them have their own property valuers? these rates may vary from one to another. However,
these rates are supposed to be updated by individual
districts where necessary.
If one has no money at the moment, It was advised that they can always wait and get the
can one be connected and pay later connection when one is fully ready for the connection
since some of them rely on agriculture at any time since for now the target is rural growth
as a source of income and it's centre and the ones that can afford the fee.
seasonal?
Will the project stop them from If one can use the water project, it's ok but can
continuing using their existing supplement with the previous(borehole) and even use
boreholes? both. Though the project main goal is to lessen travel
distance, the inconvenience of carrying jerry and
Improving hygiene and sanitation.
Latida Village If the water tank is put in place, how far It’s still in the design process and the area of coverage
will the distribution pipes cover and Will cannot be certainly told.
the water be available only at the water
kiosks or to individual homes?
Will the water be free or some payment Government through funders will install and meet the
required? and Who will meet the construction the costs, but when it comes to
construction including the fee for distribution, a water management committee will be
digging trenches for the water line? established to help come up with affordable rates for
maintenance purposes. But generally, the whole idea
is to improve on the quality of water life in the area.
Will the compensation be only for those Yes, only those with property affected by the project
affected by the water main lines?
Is this water project in other sub- Yes, the project covers RGCs in three sub-counties in
counties as well? Lamwo District including Agoor, Padibe West and
Lokung
Ogwalwoo. Will this water be for free or for The Project is intended to bring/create access to clean
payment, and if for payment how water though not rubbishing out use of borehole water
Village
much? which is a times hard to treat the water. This will
provide more efficient sanitation approaches.
Part of the payment is catered for by the World Bank
and the by the Government of Uganda and when the
project water reaches the final water user, a local water
user committee will be set to help come up with some

fee which will be purposely for maintenance

(sustainability)
The prices and costs may however vary depending on
the water users for exmple the Sugar cane plantation
might not be charged the same amount as for the one
using it only at household level
Will the local community be involved in
the project inform of providing labour?
Why have the water reservoir put in a Resp. The Project is intended to benefit the entire
different place and not in the source subcounty and hence a central point (location) is
community? needed to enable an easy flow and distribution of
water.
Resp: Discussion will be made by the local constituted

How much would the connection fee be water committee to help come up with rates will be
in case one wanted to connect the water agreed upon to help maintain and sustain the project
n to the home? such as maintenance of the solar panels, water
cleaning and treatment costs among others.
What is the compensation approach for Resp: In principle, compensation should be done
the affected person’s and will this be before the project Tish and endeavour to the contractor
done before or after, and how will it be free from any encumbrances unless arrangements
done? made and agreed upon.
ii.) Will the project take e the entire land Most compensations are paid mainly through the Banks
and will the affected persons still be and not necessarily cash.
allowed to continue using the land?
Women (wives) are encouraged to be vigilant on how
their spouses (husbands) use the money and ensure
that it's used well.
To allay the fear about the land size to be affected,
it’s usually an average size which is always enough to
even help use for maintenance and land where the
water tank and the Sia panels will be mounted might
require to be taken over since these facilities need to
be properly secured.
What is the radius area coverage of the
project and how will other far villages
that are experiencing water shortage
and have no existing boreholes also
benefit from the project?
Will institutions such as Health Centres, Two years in office has been proposed for the
Schools, Police stations also have their members but can be re-elected upon good
own water committee members and performance, and bye-elections should be held in
what's the duration of office tenure for case of passing away of a member and also create
the water committee members? room for ejection (removal) from office of non-
performers

Will the team of data collectors be in Local survey language has been adequately catered
position to adequately communicate for and surveyors with good command and understand
with the local population? the local language will perform this activity.
Consultation meeting with various stakeholders at Lokung Sub-county Hall with local leaders
Figure 6.5: Consultative meeting with the community in Licwar village Pangira trading centre

Figure 6.6: The Charmian Lokung SC introducing the consulting team to the community members
Table 6.3 Section under which stakeholder concerns have been integrated in the ESIA report
Stakeholder Concerns/Recommendation Section of the ESIA

Report
Ministry of Gender; MWE should ensure that land on which project facilities will be Section 5.3.16
Labour and Social seated is acquired and registered with under it.
Development Emphasis in undertaking hygienic measures especially on water Section 8.4.8, 8.4.13,
and air quality 8.6.2, 8.6.3,
Construction plans have to be submitted to the engineering Section 9.3
department for approval
Contractors to develop environmentally sustainable management
plan
Grievance Redress Committees (GRC) should be constituted to Section 9.8
work and integrate with village local committee.
Uganda National Management of traffic should be ensured during construction Section 9.3.6, 8.4.6
Roads Authority works.
Further engagement where the client can be represented
Adjumani District Land owners should be promptly compensated to avoid project Section 8.4.1,
delays due to land related challenges
Keep local leaders at all level involved and informed on project Section 8.1.1
timelines and progress
The project should offer job opportunities to the people of Adjumani Section 8.1.2, 8.3.1,
especially those residing where the project will be implemented 8.3.2, 8.3.3

Ukusijoni Sub- County All information related to the project be provided earlier preferably Section 9.3.16
for proper planning.

7 IDENTIFICATION AND ANALYSIS OF PROJECT ALTERNATIVES

Analysis of alternatives adopted in this ESIA is based on analysis of power source options while the design
remains constant. Much as the design for water source, transmission mains, storage and distribution remain
the same as described in the section on project design, various options are analyzed for energy sources. In
analyzing project alternatives, a description of the proposed design is presented followed by analysis of
alternative combinations of energy sources to power the water supply system.
7.1 Water Source Alternatives
Two water sources were identified in the feasibility report that’s ground water and surface water
7.1.1 Surface Water source
The main surface water close to the project area is River Pagada stream that is within the fringes of the project
area. However, this was found to be a seasonal and unable to meet the water demands of Pangira RGC. Also,
the cost of constructing, operating and maintaining the treatment plant together with delivering this water to the
respective storage tanks was found to be more costly
7.1.2 Ground water source
Basing on the available borehole logs and the current test pumping data from MWE, the hydro-geological
characteristics of some aquifers in the project area have been determined and ground water was found
sufficient enough to supply the project area in the ultimate year. Two boreholes, DWD77396 (30m³/h) located
in Pagada village, Pangira parish and, DWD77397 (18m³/h) located in Pagada village, Pangira parish in Lokung
Sub- County were sited, drilled, pump tested and recommended for use as a production well in the project area.
7.2 Alternative Power Supply Analysis
The main source of power for the scheme is solar energy. However, the scheme is to operate on 16hr schedule
beyond the time for which solar energy can be used (8 hrs). Solar power shall be hence supplemented by other
sources. An analysis of the proposed power source combinations is thus presented in this section.
7.2.1 Option 1 - HEP Supplementary Option
This option involves use of HEP as a source of power for a maximum of 08 hours as required in the ultimate
year in situations where solar power is not available. This scenario has considered the worst possible case
scenario which is not having solar for the entirety of the pumping duration. The cost of daily power consumption
for this scenario is as shown in the Table 7.1 below.

Table 7.1: Option 1- Power Consumption Costs
Transformer UETCL Power UETCL Power Operation

Transformer UETCL Power
Location Cost Extension Costs Costs/day
(KVA) Extension (Km)
(Ush) (USh) (USh439.1/kWh)
BH1-89614 0.50 48,301 108,677
BH2-77400 0.10 70,256 69,158
75 55,000,000
Backwash Pumps 0.00 4,391 4,940
Clear Water Pumps 0.03 57,083 69,158
Total 55,000,000 81,081,000. 180,031.00
From the table above the total cost per day for HEP is Ush 180,031/= while using a tariff of 439.1 shillings per
kwh according to the UECDL power consumption rates from July to September 2022 for consumers with
demand up to 50 kva. However, the initial investment costs of extending HEP are Ush 136,081,000 /=.
7.2.2 Option 2 - Generator Power Supplementary Option
This option involves use of generator power to operate for 8 hours as required in the ultimate year 2044 in
cases where solar power will be unavailable. This scenario has considered the worst possible case scenario
with the daily cost of power consumption as shown in the Table 7.2 below.
Table 7.2: Option 2- Power Consumption Costs
Generator Average Consumption O&M Cost/Day (8hrs Generator Investment

Location
(KVA) (l/hr) Pumping) Costs (USh)
BH1-77397 15 3.2 167,808.0 13,500,000
BH2-77396 4.3 225,492.0 18,000,000
Backwash Pump - - -
50
Clear Water
4.3 225,492.0 18,000,000
Pumps
Total 618,792.00 49,500,000.00
From the table above the total cost per day for Generator power is Ush 618,782 /= while using a rate of 5,700
shillings per litre of diesel and a consumption rate of 3.2 and 4.3litres per hour for the 15 and 50kVA generators
respectively. The initial investment costs of purchasing the required generators is 49,500,000/=.
7.2.3 Power Option Comparison
The daily operation costs and the estimated initial investment costs for each power option where compered
and summarized in the table 7.3 below.
Table 7.3: Power Option Comparison
Power Option Initial investment costs Daily Running Costs

Option 1 136,081,000.00 180,031.00
Option 2 49,500,000.00 618,792.00

From Table 7.3 above, Option 1 (HEP Supply) has a higher initial investment cost and lower daily running cost.
Option 2 (Generator Supply) has the lower initial investment cost but with a high daily running cost.
Comparing the two options, Option 1 HEP provides the best power option to be utilized by the water supply
system for Pangira RGC due its low daily running costs as compared to option 2 Generator power supply which
has very high daily running costs and associated environment challenges of extending of compromised air
quality in the long run and noise pollution.
7.3 Alternative Assessment for Sanitation Facilities
The Large solar powered water supply and sanitation system includes a component on sanitation for
households and institutions. A number of basic facilities have been appraised both onsite and offsite systems.
The ESIA has presented two basic systems for analysis
7.3.1 Central Sewerage System
The Central Sewerage system in on offsite treatment system. The Central sewerage system requires that
adequate waste water should be generated to drive the excreta down the sewers. A sewage generation rate of
5m3 /d/ha4 is considered as the lowest rate at which a central sewerage system can properly function. This
requires functional water house connections with in-house sanitary facilities. For towns with existing water
supply systems an indication of sewage generation is the existence of Septic Tanks. From the sampled
households in the project area, no household had access to a flush toilet, and all public toilets are VIP. This
means that a centralized sewerage system is not suitable for the sanitation intervention. The high investment
and associated infrastructure rules out such a system, notwithstanding its efficiency.
7.3.2 On-Site Sanitation Systems
On-Site Sanitation systems comprising of septic tanks and Improved Ventilated Pit Latrines are efficient
systems that can serve rural populations that cannot generate the required volume of waste water to drive
sewage to disposal area. However, the two systems can be progressively upgraded with time to connect them
to central sewerage systems. Given their ease to construct and manage, improved pit latrines and septic tanks
are highly recommended for the Pangira scheme, with economic development, as the town develops, they
could be easily upgraded. The ESIA proposed that implementation of onsite sanitation systems is graded with
a) Septic tank system for the medium-income group i.e. households with house connections,
b) Improved pit latrines for the low-income groups i.e. households with yard taps and those who use
public stand posts.
Given the low cost implications, nature of RGC settlement patterns and environment and social realities, on-
site sanitation systems have been adopted for this project.
7.4 No Project Alternative
The No Project Alternative refers to the “No Action Alternative” which in essence refers to not implementing the
proposed project at all. This alternative would imply that the current status quo would continue. Communities
and institutions will continue drawing water from unprotected surface ponds or walk long distances to hand
pumped boreholes. Sanitation will also remain elementary where the largest percentage use open defecation.
Such conditions will lead to increased disease burden and subsequent health and economic ramifications.

The No Project Alternative is the baseline against which all other alternatives and the development proposal
have been assessed. The No Project Option will not register any of the impacts (both positive and negative)
associated with any specific alternative or the development proposal. Assessing the other alternatives would
therefore inadvertently provide an assessment of the No Project Option.

8 ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIAL IMPACT ANALYSIS, MITIGATION

AND ENHANCEMENT MEASURES
Key potential environmental and social impacts of the development of Pangira large scale solar water supply
system project for each stage of the project cycle are assessed in this chapter.
Impact analysis has involved determination of nature of impact, its magnitude, extent, reversibility duration and
the likelihood of occurrence of potential impacts. For the proposed water supply and sanitation project, potential
positive and negative impacts were identified for the construction and operation phases. Throughout this
report, impacts have been characterized as:
 “Positive” when they;
 Enhance socio-economic welfare e.g. health, employment, education
 Enhance quality of existing environment.
 “Negative” when they;
 Reduce socio-economic welfare of people,
 Reduce quality of existing environment,
 Reduce economic value e.g. of surrounding property.
 “First order” (or direct) impacts;
 Are directly caused by a specific project action as the primary effects.
 Occur at the same time and location as the project action.
 “Second order” (or indirect) impacts result from effects of the first order impacts.
 “Third order” impacts result from incremental effects of second order impacts.
 “Reversible” where existing technology can restore environmental and social components to pre-
exposure levels while “Irreversible” where no known technology and skills can restore pre-impact
conditions
 “Short-term” impacts last only a short duration probably a few days or months.
 “Medium-term” impacts could last a few years.
 “Long-term” impacts would persist for many years or decades.
A qualitative approach has been used to analyse the impacts arising from this water supply and sanitation
project. Impact narratives are followed by qualitative matrices.

8.1 Pre-construction Phase Positive Impacts
8.1.1 Building Community Cohesion and Positive Exposure to Development Actions
The pre-construction phase is characterized by developing a series of project plans and documentation. The
Project Proponent (MWE) has held various stakeholder engagements with Lamwo District Local Government,
Lokung Sub County and households in Pangira and Licwar parishes. Through participatory engagements with
the different levels of governance, it has been possible to enhance exposure and build confidence in decision
making at all levels. Community consciousness has been strengthened hence opening up the project area to
acceptance of not only the current project but others to come in future. Given the high level of acceptance of
project actions at all levels and by all stakeholders, the impact is ranked as being of high Significance
Impact Enhancement Measures
 Organize public disclosure of design and other information before and during construction
 District Local Government Technical Staff and Political leaders should be involved in monitoring project
implementation
 Design public and meaningful social accountability platforms to communicate implementation

schedules.
8.1.2 Employment
Limited employment opportunities shall be realized by local residents. These will work as guides for the survey
teams and further for the design team. The likelihood of this impact occurring is ranked as possible while impact
magnitude is taken to be low hence an impact of Minor Significance
Impact Enhancement
Ministry of Water and Environment shall undertake to advertise the impending Water Scheme planning phase
within the project area through mass media and Local Government Structures. Temporary non skilled jobs shall
be reserved for local residents within the project area.
8.2 Pre-Construction Phase Negative Impacts
8.2.1 Community Anxiety
Information disclosure on impending development of a large scale solar powered water supply and sanitation
system will create high levels of anxiety among project host communities especially households where the
project infrastructure (water source, transmission mains, storage reservoir, and distribution network) will be
located. Unsubstantiated information on property appropriation and compensation procedures peddled by
unscrupulous individuals within communities will not only confuse residents but lead to poor decisions prior to
Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) process. People may resort to selling off their properties in fear of losing out
on compensation. The likelihood of this impact occurring is ranked as possible and impact sensitivity as low.

Impact magnitude is also low since sensitization will precede these activities. Overall impact significance is
hence Minor
Impact Mitigation
MWE shall sensitize all host communities through mass media on all steps taken during the Resettlement
Action Plan (RAP) exercise and eventual compensation. The sensitization teams shall hold village level
meetings all Local council 1 sites within the project area. Meetings shall also be held at LC III and at the district
level to ensure consensus is achieved.
8.3 Construction Phase Positive Impacts
8.3.1 Employment Engagement for Local Labour
The proposed project is located in a largely rural underdeveloped region with very few avenues for gainful
public sector employment. Much as the project will not offer employment to all job seeking individuals, it will
nevertheless offer opportunities to the many unskilled rural populace in need of cash incomes. The project will
create direct and indirect employment to local people. The possible direct jobs include unskilled casual labour
and semi-skilled labourers such as trenchers, plumbers, masons, painters, carpenters, mechanics, electricians,
machine operators, steel benders, drivers, community educators, porters, cooks, security guards, etc.). These
will be involved in construction works for laying pipes, water towers, sumps, pump stations, among others.
There will be additional indirect employment opportunities such as contract workers, petty business (e.g. food
kiosks). This positive impact is classified as direct, short term and of Major Significance.
Impact enhancement
The contractor should involve local leaders and the district local governments in the recruitment process to
ensure full and fair participation of local communities. Positive gender discrimination should be applied to offer
women jobs in line with their competences. The following shall be specifically implemented
 Available job opportunities be disclosed in public places/notices;
 Contractor to involve local leaders and the District Local Government, Sub county and Parishes in the
recruitment process to ensure full and fair participation of local people; and
 Deliberate ring fencing some jobs for women.
 Where possible, the project should integrate social protection mechanisms such as offering casual jobs
to vulnerable and marginalized people using a group model (labour intensive public works) especially
women and youth groups.
8.3.2 Skills and Technology Transfer.
Skills and technology transfer will take place during the construction phases. It is anticipated that construction
works will be contracted to a reputable Ugandan firm which will employ and train local labour. This will avail an

opportunity for skills and knowledge transfer to the Community in Lokung. The wider community in Lamwo
especially students in technical schools and colleges shall be availed training opportunities on this project.
Impact Enhancement
MWE shall design bids and further contracting agreements that specifically make skills transfer a contract
requirement. Monitoring mechanisms shall be developed and enforced to ensure skills development takes
place.
8.3.3 Short-term business opportunities for women
Construction will stimulate small businesses mostly owned by women, such as vending food and basic
household items to construction workers. Although short-term and reversible, this is a positive impact to women
(and their households) who will be involved. Impact magnitude is however low since it is a short-term impact
and easily reversible. Likelihood of occurrence is certain hence impact significance is ranked as moderate.
Impact Enhancement
This is a short term and reversible impact with a potential to be enhanced through complementary development
initiatives. Deliberate initiatives can be initiated to support overall socioeconomic development. The contractor
shall be required to provide shelter where local businesses are to be located.
8.4 Construction Phase Negative Impacts
The construction phase will be associated with various negative impacts that have the potential to derail project
benefits if not mitigated. This section presents negative impacts predicted during construction and consequent
mitigation measures.
8.4.1 Expropriation of land and Demolition of Properties thereon
The Engineering Design Report details out the location of the water source area, alignment of the water
transmission mains, location of water reservoir and distribution networks. The RAP sets out the extent of land
to be acquired for the different components and properties to be affected. The potential for both commercial
and residential structures to be affected exists and will either be demolished or partially affected. The likelihood
of this impact occurring is ranked as certain given that this is a Greenfield project. With the exception of a few
structures in Pangira Growth Centers, much of the impact will relate to land expropriation since many of the
structures in rural sections are far removed from the alignment. Also the amount of land required for
transmission pipes is quite limited. The sensitivity of this impact is ranked as high on account of cost of
replacement and attachment to properties. Given low population densities in the rural areas, land for
resettlement is available and since compensation will be provided for lost land and affected properties,
magnitude of this impact will be low resulting in a moderate overall significance level.
Sensitivity
Very High High medium Low Very Low

5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12
Magnitude Medium 3 Major 15 Moderate Moderate Minor 6 Minor 3
12 9
10 8 6 2
Negligible 1 Minor 5 Minor 4 Minor Insignificant Insignificant
3 2 1
Impact Mitigation
i) MWE shall provide adequate vacation notice (according to regulatory requirements, this is 3 or 6
months) to affected people before construction commences. This will also allow affected property
owners to plan appropriately or take any salvageable material from their demolished structures without
delaying construction work. MWE shall not handover any uncompensated site to the Contractor
ii) MWE and the contractor shall institute a strong grievance redress mechanism so that complaints and
dissatisfactions about the resettlement/ compensation process do not unduly delay contractors
progressing with works.
iii) All communities in the corridor shall be sensitized on the valuation and compensation procedures to
avoid being taken advantage of by speculators and unscrupulous individuals who could impersonate
MWE, the Contractor and Consultants.
8.4.2 Loss of Vegetation Cover and Habitat for Wildlife
Construction will involve clearance and removal of vegetation at the water source site, transmission mains,
reservoir sites, access roads, water office and location of the sanitation facilities. The removal of trees will be
minimal (only done when necessary), much of the affected vegetation will be shrubs and grasses. The reservoir
sites, transmission mains, reservoir site and distribution networks are mainly covered by Hyparrhenia spp that
will recolonize on completion of construction works. The Impact magnitude is considered low since the
transmission and distribution pipeline will be mainly laid in narrow trenches and no species of ecological
significance was recorded within the project area. Sensitivity of the receptor is also rated low given that most
of the areas traversed by the project show signs of anthropogenic modification including grazing and cultivation.
Overall impact significance is thus ranked as minor.
Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12

12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
Impact Mitigation
i) The Environment management team shall mark off the disturbance zone using high reflective tape
before bush clearing to limit the area disturbed by bush clearing equipment.
ii) A soft start shall be used to allow slow moving wildlife to move away from the alignment
iii) Vegetation clearance should be limited to only localities required for development.
iv) Undertake selective tree cutting at work sites.
v) Where cutting a tree is unavoidable, replanting ten trees per tree cut of the same species should be
implemented.
vi) Site restoration shall be undertaken using natural species
vii) Topsoil removed during bush clearing shall be stockpiled and used in restoration.
viii) Movement of equipment (vehicles, contractors and the entire construction crew) must follow designated
pathways or agreed upon access roads.
8.4.3 Introduction of Invasive Plant Species
Invasive plant species have the potential to colonize rapidly with detrimental effects on diversity and prevalence
of indigenous species. During construction, mechanical equipment have the potential to disperse seeds of
invasive plants as they clear vegetation along the trenches. The probability of this impact occurring is unlikely
since invasive plant species are prevalent in the entire corridor implying they have already established. The
sensitivity of this impact has been ranked as moderate since the common invasive species have already
colonized all vegetation zones Lantana Camara is a well-established within patches along the proposed
transmission mains alignment. Impact magnitude is low since the common invasive species can be managed
and their spread limited. Overall the impact is categorized as insignificant.
Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
12
Impact 12 9
Magnitude Low 2 Moderate Moderate Minor Minor 4 Insignificant
10 8 6 2
3 2 1

Impact Management
i) Transfer of spoil across vegetation zones shall be limited. The Environment team shall identify
suitable sites for spoiling in all vegetation zones identified.
ii) Topsoil generated during bush clearance and grubbing will be stockpiled on site to facilitate
restoration and landscaping.
iii) Equipment shall be washed before they are moved between construction sites.
8.4.4 Increased Runoff and Soil Erosion
Earthworks work during construction of access roads, water sources, water transmission and distribution
network, water storage reservoirs and the booster station will remove vegetation cover and expose the sandy
soils, increasing runoff from gentle slopes and subsequent erosion is anticipated especially during the rainy
season. Trenching to contain transmission and distribution pipes will cause minor changes in slopes and may
not generate much runoff. The potential impact receptors are assigned a low sensitivity; given that these are
very gentle slopes. Impact magnitude is also low on account of the absence of sensitive receptor ecosystems.
The overall impact significance is assessed as minor.
Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12
12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
Impact Mitigation
i) Vegetation clearance should be limited to localities required for development.
ii) Construction sites should be hoarded off before excavations and soil erosion control structures
installed.
iii) Topsoil should be removed prior to carrying out excavations and kept separately so that it is used last
in backfilling of the excavated areas. This is to ensure that the living soil (top soil) is available for plant
growth in disturbed areas.
iv) The Project Contractor should backfill all trenches immediately after laying the pipes and compact such
areas as to near level prior to excavation.

v) Excess excavated soil material which will not be used for construction works shall be removed from
the site in a timely manner and deposited at an approved site
vi) MWE will also ensure that proper landscaping and vegetation restoration is carried out to further reduce
the possibility of soil erosion. Native vegetation must be used for revegetation of excavated site.
8.4.5 Generation of Construction Waste
Construction sites generate large quantities of assorted waste including bulky waste (concrete, concrete
products, demolition ruble, wooden boards, wrapping materials (leather, plastics, and textiles), metallic
strips/pieces, obsolete equipment, and equipment parts among others.
i) General litter: Solid wastes, if not well managed, can lead to health and safety issues, including
accidents, bad odour, harbouring vectors, and scavenging animals. The wastes to be generated at the
construction phase include polythene bags, plastic bottles, papers, wrappings for components to be
installed, of construction materials (timber, aggregates, sand, bricks/blocks, steel bar cuttings, glasses,
cement, etc.).
ii) Excavated Material: This is expected to be generated from earthworks. The volumes are currently
unknown. Typically, excavated material is considered unlikely to cause adverse impacts and can be
used as fill, which is considered a useful reuse of the material.
Much of this waste can be recycled or reused though avenues to implement these management options are
rarely explored the likelihood of this impact occurring is hence ranked as certain. Sensitivity of this impact is
ranked as moderate since bulk construction waste can be reused in back fill and other operations and in
essence when waste concrete and concrete products represent a cost to the contractor which they are keen to
avoid. Magnitude is low since the quantities are small and management available at low cost. Overall impact
significance is minor.
Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12
12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
Impact Mitigation
i) Prepare a waste management plan prior to commencement of work, including appropriate waste
storage areas, collection & disposal schedule;

ii) Wastes be appropriately segregated into metallic, plastic, glass & biodegradable;
iii) Waste receptacles be provided at appropriate points;
iv) Re-usable and Recyclable wastes be sold or given away to interested parties;
v) Excavation material be used for backfilling;
vi) Excavated materials or other construction materials shall not be stockpiled or deposited near or on-
stream banks, lake shorelines, or other watercourse perimeters where they can be washed away by
high water or storm runoff or can in any way encroach upon the watercourse itself.
vii) Abandoned quarries be used for the disposal of excessive quantities of excavated soil material;
viii) Traffic management should be ensured during transport of the waste. Flag persons will be required.
All vehicles transporting excavated materials should be cleaned before leaving the construction site to
ensure no earth, mud, debris and the like is deposited by them on roads;
ix) Wastes be disposed at only NEMA approved sites.
Chemical Waste: Chemical waste that is produced should be handled in accordance with the National
Environment (Waste) Management Regulations, 2020. Containers used for the storage of chemical waste
should:
i) Be suitable for the substance they are holding, resistant to corrosion, maintained in good condition,
and securely closed;
ii) Display a label in English
The storage area for chemical waste should:
i) Be clearly labelled and used solely for the storage of chemical waste;
ii) Be enclosed on at least 3 sides;
iii) Have an impermeable floor and bunding, of capacity to accommodate 110% of the volume of the
largest container or 20% by volume of the chemical waste stored in that area, whichever is the greatest;
iv) Have adequate ventilation;
v) Be covered to prevent rainfall entering (water collected within the bund must be tested and disposed
as chemical waste if necessary); and
vi) Be arranged so that incompatible materials are adequately separated.
Disposal of chemical waste should:
i) Be through a NEMA licensed waste collector; and
ii) Be a facility licensed to receive chemical waste

8.4.6 Haulage of Construction Materials
During construction transportation of materials from source areas to worksites will be undertaken. Haulage of
plastic pipes, gravel, crushed stone (aggregate) and other concrete products from sources to construction work
sites will be associated with the following impacts:
i) Traffic accidents involving people and livestock,
ii) Traffic noise from haulage fleet,
iii) Excessive dust release impacting households and commercial units
Although never compensated, excessive dust will contaminate household properties and food stuffs posing
health challenges especially to the young, elderly and the sick. In trading centers dust will affect merchandize
in roadside shops (especially foodstuffs: salt, sugar, flour, etc) dust translates into a financial loss for local
business owners. Unnecessary speeding by material haulage trucks poses a high accident risk to other road
users and the community. At high risk are school crossing zones, livestock crossings and in trading centers.
Haulage traffic noise is not expected to be a significant impact except near schools or health centers.
Material haulage will be short-term ceasing with completion of construction activities but secondary effects (if
they occurred) such as accidents (hence disability or death) have negative, long-term and irreversible socio-
economic impacts. The likelihood of this impact occurring has been ranked as possible. However, given that
limited project activities will require heavy duty trucks, magnitude is considerably reduced. Sensitivity of this
impact is categorized as medium especially for Disabled people, children, women and elderly people who are
especially at risk of road accidents. Overall impact significance has been ranked as Moderate.
Sensitivity

5 4 3 2 1
12
Impact
Magnitude
12 9
10 8 6 2
Negligible 1 Minor 5 Minor 4 Minor 3 Insignificant 2 Insignificant 1
Impact Mitigation
i) Contractor shall provide temporary road signage during construction and ensure drivers observe speed
limits for the safety of other road users.
ii) Contractor should deploy traffic guides, warning signs where necessary, such as at approach to trading
centers and schools

iii) Contractor shall provide temporary and permanent speed reducing devices e.g. humps especially near
population centers, markets, school premises, health facilities and areas of worship
iv) Contractor shall prohibit haulage activities at night to avoid accidents in high population settled areas
and trading centers.
v) Construction crews should take care to watch out for and avoid livestock.
vi) The contractor should station traffic guides at potentially high accident risk locations to warn / guide
road users.
vii) The contractor shall suppress road dust by watering wherever necessary.
viii) To avoid excessive haulage traffic noise at sensitive facilities, the contractor should install temporary
speed reduction features (humps) adjacent to schools or healthcare centers. This would avoid noise
associated with high speed deceleration and acceleration at humps. Speed reduction humps should
be located a reasonable distance prior to such places in such a way that trucks will not have gained
sufficient acceleration.
ix) All drivers and machine operators shall be licensed and undergo periodic random tests to determine
levels of alcohol consumption.
x) A driver code of conduct shall be drafted, and all drivers required to abide by it.
Residual Impact: Following mitigation, residual impact will be of minor significance.
Impact management:
i) The contractor should sensitize project drivers on accident risk and control measures.
ii) A driver instruction program should be designed to re-equip drivers with defensive driving skills on a
quarterly or biennial basis at the minimum.
iii) The contractor should compensate victims of accidents through an insurance policy.
8.4.7 Noise and Vibrations
Construction noise and vibration will occur both on and off site should the contractor use excavators to make
trenches. Also movement of trucks delivering materials to construction sites, diesel generators, drills and hand
held compactors will have the potential to generate noise. Baseline noise level measurements taken within the
project site are within National Limits. Exposure of communities and workers to high noise and vibration levels
can be a health concern and needs to be mitigated in line with the National Environment (Noise) Control
Regulations, 2003. The receptor sensitivity is considered low given that most of the proposed project area is
rural however, schools, health facilities and administrative centers will be served by the scheme, construction
activities near these service centers will expose such places hence becoming highly sensitive to noise and

vibrations. Magnitude of the impact is low on account that most of the equipment have low horsepower and
capacity to generate noise is less. Overall impact significance is thus Minor.
Sensitivity

5 4 3 2 1
12
Impact
Magnitude
12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
Impact Mitigation
i) No employee should be exposed to a noise level greater than 85 dB (A) for a duration of more than 8
hours per day without hearing protection. (National Environment (Noise) Standards and Regulations.
ii) Workers shall be provided with the necessary personal protective equipment (PPE) such as ear muffs.
iii) Periodic medical hearing checks should be performed on workers exposed to high noise levels.
iv) Sites must be hoarded to curb noise impacts to neighboring communities.
v) Works should be undertaken during day time i.e. from 7.00am to 6pm.
vi) Works near schools or health centres should be done in periods like weekends in order for noise and
vibrations not to interfere with learning environment.
vii) Weekly monitoring of noise levels at active sites should be carried out by the contractor
8.4.8 Air Pollution
Construction operations including trenching and haulage of materials will certainly lead to the release of
pollutants with potential to impact air quality. Exhaust fumes with containing CO, CO2, SO2, Particulate Matter
among other pollutants will be released. Given the limited operations requiring heavy equipment, air pollution
will mainly result of operating poorly serviced and old equipment. The likelihood of this impact occurring is
ranked as medium since activities are limited. Due to the intermittent and short-term nature of the activities, the
intensity of impact is assessed as low and sensitivity of the receptors as low. The impact significance is
therefore minor.
Sensitivity

5 4 3 2 1
12
Impact Medium 3 Major 15 Moderate Moderate Minor 6 Minor 3
Magnitude 12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
Impact Mitigation
i) Travel speeds of construction vehicles along the road especially at trading/ business centers will be
controlled.
ii) Trucks will be covered during haulage of construction materials to reduce on spillage of materials.
iii) Water sprinkling on road sections passing through trading centers and near schools and health
facilities.
iv) Workers will be provided with PPE and the use of PPE shall be enforced.
v) A maintenance programme for equipment and vehicles will be implemented, to ensure air emissions
like particulates, SO2 and NO2 are minimized
8.4.9 Public Health and Safety Impacts
Public health and safety risks are anticipated during the construction phase involving the community. The
presence of open trenches which if poorly managed will impound water and become breeding sites for insect
vectors and a risk to drowning especially for children. Unattended to or non-secured Excavation ditches, access
to properties and social services are all hazards envisaged during construction with potential to cause
accidents. The risk of accidents will be higher near settlements and public facilities especially schools. The
elderly, sickly and the children will experience constrained access. Sensitivity of public health and safety
impacts will be medium since the trenches especially for distribution pipes are narrow. Impact magnitude is
medium due to the limited spatial distribution of receptors. Overall impact significance is thus moderate.
Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12
12 9
10 8 6 2


3 2 1
Impact Mitigation
i) The contractor shall install safe temporary crossing points on trenches to enable people to access their
properties and social services at all times
ii) Restoration plans for all shall be produced and approved before commencement of operations
iii) Construction safety signage shall be installed at all construction sites and trenches
iv) All installed access culverts shall be able to accommodate existing traffic
v) Installed pipe lines shall be properly backfilled, levelled and compacted to enable all community
resident easy access including the disabled.
vi) A nominated service provider shall be hired to undertake community sensitizations and engagement
on their health and safety during construction works.
8.4.10 Sexual and Gender Based Violence (SGBV)
Baseline conditions of the project area derived from the survey indicate a prevalence Sexual and gender Based
Violence within the project area. The RGC is characterized by elements of alcoholism, Gender Based Violence
(GBV), violence against children (VAC), Violence Against Women and Girls (VAWG) and Intimate Partner
Violence (IPV). The presence of imported labor should local residents shun employment will complicate the
situation. However, during construction, local residents shall be given priority in employment reducing chances
of imported labour. Impact sensitivity is medium and magnitude medium hence overall significance is
Moderate.
Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12
12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1

Impact Mitigation
i) Contractors to develop and implement GBV codes of conduct for workers, visitors, sub-contractors and
service providers
ii) Promote GBV/SEA/SH awareness before and during project implementation
iii) Strengthen GBV Referral pathways within the community (core and influence zone of project area).
The referral pathways and reporting of GBV is provided under annex 11.
iv) There is need to engage into community policing with emphasizing on prevention of GBV. This can be
done by the local area police department of Family Protection Unit (FPU).
v) The local government (CDO) should strengthen awareness and sensitization against GBV.
vi) MWE should consider having a dedicated service provider for GBV, VAC, HIV/AIDS to provide overall
mitigation implementation and management during civil works.
vii) The contractor, where a case arises, will cooperate with law enforcement agencies in investigating
complaints of SGBV.
8.4.11 Impacts on Violence Against Children (VAC)
Its anticipated that violence against children cases like labour, child sexual abuse and exploitation practices
may occur under the following circumstances; a) contracted workers engaged by third parties if any) and b)
primary supply workers engaged by suppliers in providing goods and services (e.g. stone quarries, sand mining,
transporters, etc); c) supply chains that engage children in extraction, processing, distribution, storage of goods
and services before being delivered to contractors, or even at construction sites without contractors notice (e.g.
Children vending food stuffs, drinks at / near construction sites). However, the above-mentioned exposure
factors to VAC MUST be prohibited and compliance of contractors closely monitored. If well done, the
contribution of the project in reducing child labour will be HIGH. This impact is short term and direct impact but
Reversible. The receptor Sensitivity is accessed to be low because the contractor and Local governments are
greatly aware of the side effects. The impact Intensity is medium especially in short run but can be handled
immediately. The ultimate impact significance is moderate. Sensitivity
8.4.12 Impacts on Cultural Heritage
The Cultural heritage study identified heritage resources within the project footprint. At E046668 N0398860, a
burial site exists 10m off the ROW of the pipeline, at coordinates E0462607 N0399426, rock grinding hollows
thus an archaeological site was encountered within the ROW of water pipes. Other heritage resources were
encountered at coordinates N0461863 E0399706 thus a pottery site, E0461602 N0399438 a church, other
churches at E0461729 N0399600 and E0464409 N0400395. Excavation works for both transmission pipeline
and distribution lines have the potential to impact the burial site with an estimated offset of 10m from ROW.
Others sites including churches could be affected during construction should the contractor choose to use

heavy excavation equipment. The sensitivity of this impact has been ranked as medium and impact magnitude
as also medium. Overall impact significance is thus moderate
Impact Mitigation
Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12
12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
i) The contractor shall develop a ‘chance find’ procedure to guide actions during all excavations during
construction.
ii) All suspected archaeological artefacts or paleontological items encountered should be handed over to
Ministry of trade and industry- Department of Museums and Monuments.
iii) Construction workers and managers shall be trained in basic skills to identify and handle archaeological
materials/artefacts before commencement of work. Such training should be administered in liaison with the
Department of Museums and Monuments (DMM)
iv) Identified Cultural Heritage resources shall be screened off using high reflective tapes to avoid intrusion by
construction crew
v) Compensation of the affected sites will be undertaken before construction activities commence in accordance
with World Bank requirements.
8.4.13 Occupational Health and Safety Risks
Occupational Health and Safety risks associated with water supply schemes will mainly result from either
physical, chemical, electric, noise or air borne hazards.
Physical Hazards
Construction crew will be exposed to many and diverse physical hazards arising from operating equipment,
working at heights, construction material delivery trucks, general traffic and falls from work related structures.
Other physical hazards will arise from handling hot objects, working under conditions of excessive heat,
confined spaces in trenches and contact with overhead power lines. Workers will further be prone to injuries
resulting from falls on wet surfaces and being hit by blunt and sharp objects that are normally littered on
construction sites. Working for long hours in inappropriate positions and on repetitive tasks will be a source of

ergonomic problems and fatigue. Poor housekeeping at workshops, batching plant among others has potential
to cause cuts in addition to burns from welding sections.
Chemical Hazards
Chemical hazards in water supply system construction are mainly associated with exposures to chemical spills,
paints and working with plastics. During construction exhaust emissions from heavy equipment and motor
vehicles during all construction and maintenance activities are a source of exposure to work hazards.
Electrocution
The common sources of electrocution hazards during construction are overhead power transmission lines,
power distribution lines, houses, mechanical repair workshops, plants and equipment repair and general
domestic operations including cooking within the camp.
Noise and Vibrations.
The main sources of noise and vibrations will be trenching and compacting equipment, and power generators.
Cluster noise will result from a cluster of equipment concurrently being used on site for different operations.
The probability of such noise exceeding regulatory limits is quite low. The main receptors are machine operators
and other workers in the vicinity of such work sites. Construction noise at sites reduces concentration of workers
and masks communication leading to accidents.
Construction noise at sites reduces concentration of workers and masks communication leading to accidents.
Poor housekeeping at workshops and sites is a major source injury, while failure to provide drinking water and
mobile toilet facilities at work sites could also pose considerable health risk to workers (and local communities
traversed).
Air Pollution Hazards
Air borne hazards are mainly generated by dust coming from work sites and transportation of construction
materials, fumes from paints and oils, exhaust fumes from automobile engines and generators together with
releases associated with tyre friction on paved surfaces. The main receptors affected by air pollution are
workers especially machine operators, repair technicians and construction crew at work site. These could be
exposed for more than 8 hours a day depending on the work day and overtime payments
Occupational Health and Safety impacts will potentially occur at any point during construction and while some
accidents could be minor, others might be grave leading to disability or loss of life of construction workers. The
duration of this impact will be short term occurring only during the construction phase though the effects have
long term implications. Likelihood of this impact occurring is medium because of the number of workers
expected on sites and the common reluctance of companies to enforce health and safety regulations. The
possibility of fatalities on sites raises the magnitude of the impact to also medium on account of the nature of
construction activities and equipment. Overall impact significance ranked as Moderate.

Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12
12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
Impact mitigation
Avoidance
i) The contractor shall abide by the legal requirements of all contractual obligations on HIV/AIDS, OHS,
gender equity among others (OHS- Public Health Act, Workers Compensation Act, Employment
Decree, public health act etc)
ii) The contractor will develop a comprehensive OHS policy and plan which should among others address
the following: risk assessment, training in OHS, safety awareness, housekeeping, reporting, safety
audits, safety personnel and responsibilities.
iii) Design an induction training programme for all new workers on safety and risk in water projects.
iv) Provide for OHS in all method statements
v) Design safety safe work procedures for all sections on the project
vi) Ensure that all equipment is safe and certified by the relevant authorities
vii) Undertake safe handling and documentation of all hazardous substances including wastes on the
project
Impact Reduction
i) Provide all workers with requisite protective gear (see Table below).
Table 8.1: Personal Protective Equipment According to Hazard

Objective Workplace hazards Suggested PPE
Eye and face protection Flying particles Safety glasses
Direct sunlight and glare
Head protection Falling objects, inadequate Plastic hard hats with top and side
impact protection

Objective Workplace hazards Suggested PPE

height clearance, and overhead power
cords
Hearing protection Noise Ear plugs or muffs
Foot protection Falling or rolling objects, Safety shoes and boots
pointed objects
Hand protection Hazardous materials, cuts Gloves made of rubber or
or lacerations synthetic materials
Respiratory protection Dust, lime operations, Facemasks filters for dust removal
Body/leg protection Hazardous materials, biological agents, Overalls /coveralls
cuttings, and lacerations.
ii) Provision of signage reminding use of PPE at appropriate locations in the project area including
ancillary work sites
iii) Provision of warning signage on all high-risk equipment and on work surfaces.
iv) Install “no smoking” signage in high fire risk (fuel tanks and dispensers), public and communal areas.
v) Ensure adequate fire safety, fire exists and fire assembly points at camp.
vi) Provision of onsite gender friendly toilet and washing water for workers.
vii) Hiring a full time qualified “Accident prevention officer” or safety officer
viii) Conducting safety awareness among all workers and routine/daily toolbox meetings at all work fronts,
led by section heads/ safety champions and supervised by the Environment, Health and Safety Officers
ix) Control harmful insects/ vectors (including mosquitoes and houseflies)
x) Reporting accidents to the client and maintaining an accident and incident log; Severe Accidents
(fatalities) and Serious Accidents shall be reported to the police and to World Bank within 24 hours of
occurrence.
xi) Undertake to promote sanitary measures (provide clean drinking water, drain stagnant pools near the
camp etc to control contagious diseases (e.g. Cholera)
xii) Observe working hours, provide appropriate fixtures and tools to reduce ergonomic injuries (poor
working postures, heavy loads, etc)
8.5 Operation and Maintenance Phase Positive Impacts
8.5.1 Improved Access to Safe Water
Improved physical access to safe water will certainly occur. The various level of stand pipes, house connections
and community points will improve access to safe water for all income levels within the community. Distance to

safe water sources will be drastically reduced hence an incentive to continuous hygienic use of water. As
access increases, hygienic use of water can be improved with multiplier benefits to the development process.
Impact Enhancement
i) Ensure that the distribution network taps into all economic levels within the community as indicated in
feasibility and ESIA baseline studies
ii) Ensure security of water assets by providing adequate protection against vandalism
iii) Undertake appropriate pricing to ensure affordability
iv) Maintain functionality and consistence in supply
v) Sensitize users on water saving techniques
8.5.2 Labour and Time Saving
Collecting water from distant sources not only encumbers household labour but also leads to time wastage.
Women and children who carry to responsibility to collect water have been trekking long distances to only pick
a few liters for each return trip. This translates into time and labour losses. Labour will have been locked on
water provisioning and instead of supporting household livelihood. As water sources come to the homestead
labour will be freed and time saved. Overall livelihood activities are expected to improve and overall welfare
enhanced.
Impact Mitigation
i) Introduce and subsidize water storage facilities to avoid shortage during non-supply periods
ii) Ensure consistence in pricing and affordability
iii) Sensitize the community of water saving
8.5.3 Improved Community Health
The improved access to safe water will directly translate into community health benefits. Regular use of water
for hygienic practices like handwashing, bathing and cleaning utensils will lead to reduction in incidence and
prevalence of water related diseases and illnesses (e.g. Typhoid, diarrhoea, dysentery, bilharzia, gastronomic
disorders, malaria, etc). As people adopt hygienic practices propelled by availability of water, improvements in
health conditions, expenditure on disease, loss of work time due to illness and infirmity will all reduce. Such
tendencies lead to improved community health and security.
Access to water trains into sanitation, the project component on sanitation shall further suppress the spread of
sanitary diseases mentioned above.

Enhancement Measures
i) Sensitize communities on appropriate water storage and use practices. Clean treated water delivered
to discharge points can be contaminated by being stored in dirty rarely cleaned clay pots and using
unhygienic withdraw practices common in rural settings (drawing by dipping entire hands into clay
pots).
ii) Provide piped water connections to government health facilities (institutional connection) to all health
units in Lokung Sub County as part of the intensification lines.
iii) Enforce other public health provisions including having a functional pit latrine, hand washing facility,
rubbish pit, community sanitation conditions, bathing shelters etc.
iv) Adjust eligibility criteria for water connections by including appropriate conditionalities such as having
a functional pit latrine, hand washing facility, rubbish pit / gunny bags for waste collection, community
sanitation conditions (zero open defecation), among other. This will enable local leaders and potential
water users to mobilize and prepare themselves before connection. It should be noted in many parts
of Uganda, the water utility managing units such as WSDF/Umbrellas have often verified some of the
above hygiene and sanitation conditions before establishing household connections. At the same time,
given the rural nature of communities, verifying WASH conditions before any connection if done will
enhance public health and safety.
v) Provide water tanks to health facilities to enable them store enough water for use when pumping is
down
8.5.4 Improved Gender Benefits.
The project will construct public toilets at Pangira Primary School and at other public facilities. These public
facilities will enhance gender benefits as the accord privacy to women because both facilities are gender
segregated meeting requirement for sanitation in a gender sensitive environment. Improved privacy will trigger
multiple benefits along the way including school attendance rates for young girls who could avoid classes during
the menstrual cycle. Availability of water near residences will further reduce to work load on women availing
more time for reproductive roles including health care.
Enhancement.
i) Sensitize women on appropriate use of sanitary facilities
ii) Popularize the use of disposable menstrual materials
iii) Ensure regular cleaning of public facilities
iv) Emphasize separate facilities for pupils and their teachers at Pangira Primary School

8.5.5 Increased enrolment and Improved Attendance in Education Institutions
The piped water project will contribute to improved education outcomes and targets due to increased access
to safe water in schools and Early Childhood Development (ECD) centres within Pangira and Licwar Parishes.
The availability of safe and clean water will enhance education outcome at primary and secondary schools.
The critical indicators that will be improved include:
a. Reducing the distance to water source from an average distance of between 500 and 1000
meters and above, to less than 100 meters.
b. Provide sufficient volumes of safe water
c. Provide affordable rates for institutional connections
d. Provide school toilets at Pangira Primary School
e. Enhance water storage capacity at schools
f. Improve menstrual health conditions for girls and female teachers (water for washing)
The above benefits will certainly have direct influence on education outcomes such as enrolment rate;
Attendance, staff welfare, learner & teacher performance, Completion rate, Reduced Absenteeism among
learners and teachers; Lower Dropout rate especially for girls, improved functionality of toilet facilities.
Enhancement measures
i) Provide intensified lines / piped water connections to all Early Childhood Development centres,
primary schools and secondary schools.
ii) Provide water tanks to enable them store enough water
iii) Conduct sensitization on community led total sanitation (CLTS).
8.6 Operation and Maintenance Phase Negative Impacts
8.6.1 Impacts on Underground Water Resources
The motorized abstraction of groundwater in Pagada has the potential to deplete groundwater resources if the
abstraction rate exceeds the aquifer recharge rates. Test results from the two production boreholes, DWD77396
(30 m³/h) located in Pagada village, Pangira parish and, DWD77397 (18 m³/h) also located in Pagada village,
Pangira Parish in Lokung Sub-county were deemed to be sustainable. However, should climatic conditions
change dramatically due to climate change, these withdraw levels may become unattainable.
The recharge of the aquifers largely depends on the rainfall regime (which is subject to fluctuations due to
climate change) of the area among others things and the infiltration of part of the same can be affected by
human activities that influence surface infiltration. The sensitivity of the receptors is considered to be medium
while the impact intensity is considered to be high. The overall impact significance is major.
Sensitivity

5 4 3 2 1


12
Impact Medium 3 Major 15 Moderate Moderate Minor 6 Minor 3
Magnitude 12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
Impact Mitigation
i) Acquire abstraction permit and observe conditions
ii) Undertake catchment management planning to ensure sustainable yield
iii) Enforce catchment protection measures as contained in catchment plans
iv) Observe abstraction rates of the two boreholes to enforce compliance with designed yield.
v) Ensure timely monitoring of water levels to ascertain any impact on the water level.
vi) Water levels should be accompanied by monitoring of the water quality to ascertain any trend in water
quality change with continued abstraction.
8.6.2 Disposal of Sludge from Sanitary Facilities
The project will construct an onsite sewage water borne system at Pangira Primary School and another facility
at Pangira Health Centre II. Given the anticipated high loading on these facilities that are planned to dispose
into septic tanks, sludge accumulation is bound to be rapid coupled by inappropriate use. Disposal of sludge
from these facilities poses a very big challenge. The nearby centres lack lagoons nor are there any central
sewage treatment plants. In the event sludge accumulation exceed acceptable hygienic level disposal shall
present challenges. Management may be tempted to employ non licensed service providers who may end up
disposing in wetlands or other non gazetted places. The magnitude of this impact is quite high since disposal
of untreated waste poses a health risk to the community and has ecological implications. Sensitivity of receptor
environment is also high. Overall impact significance is Major.
Sensitivity

5 4 3 2 1
12
Impact
Magnitude
12 9
10 8 6 2

3 2 1
Impact Mitigation
i) Use licensed waste to dispose of sludge for institutional facilities
ii) Sensitize residents on use of facilities to avoid use of non-biodegradable anal cleaning materials.
iii) Use of manifest system to ensure that the wastes are disposed of at a site (waste treatment plant)
gazetted by NEMA.
8.6.3 Unhygienic and Poor use leading to Spread of Communicable Diseases
Poorly maintained sanitary facilities where routine cleaning is not carried out will create active centers for the
spread of communicable diseases. Public facilities require regular and sometimes contracted workers who have
been trained to manage the facility. Failure to implement such provisions will leading to malfunctioning of the
facility. Disposal of other wastes including sanitary pads, use of bulky anal cleaning materials will all lead to
malfunctioning and providing breeding ground for pathogens and vectors. Given the low levels of awareness
as indicated in the baseline studies, the magnitude of this impact is high and sensitivity of the receptors is also
high. Impact significance is hence Major.
Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12
12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
Impact Mitigations.
i) Management shall contract paid labour to manage the facilities

ii) Sensitize all users on hygienic use of the facility
iii) Install signage directing users on use and operating the facility
iv) Maintain the facilities clean and usable
8.6.4 Impact on Household Incomes and Gender challenges
The proposed project especially the water supply component introduced payment for water. Much as the
service will be appreciated, there will be an effect on income and saving. Water has been obtained at no cost

being fetched by children and women from borehole or surface ponds. Payment will encroach on money spent
on other household consumables. Including water costs on household expenditure will generate gender
resistance as men may not be willing to foot such bills passing them to women. The magnitude of this impact
is medium and sensitivity is also medium. Impact significance will hence be Moderate.
Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12
12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
Impact Mitigation
i) Sensitization of communities on the need for hygienic practices and their link to household incomes.
ii) Introduce income generation activities for women
iii) Introduce SACCOS for women to support income enhancement schemes
8.6.5 Impacts Associated with Climate Change
Underground Water Sources
Climate Change will certainly affect water resources, the supply system and sanitation that comprise the project.
The impact of predicted changes in especially precipitation will have the potential to induce episodes of extreme
drought and flooding within the project area. However, the proposed source of water is underground water
which is relatively cushioned against extreme climate change impacts. Groundwater resources are widely
expected to be less affected by climate change, and it is widely believed that groundwater will form the basis
of adaptation programs, as it buffers against more unpredictable rainfall. Groundwater resources are therefore
likely to be impacted as much by increases in demand for groundwater as by any changes to groundwater
recharge.
Water Supply Infrastructure
Climate change is likely to lead to increasing risks on the infrastructure used in service provision. For water
supply infrastructure, there are significant threats of damage to water supply infrastructure, destruction of

sanitary systems, poor operation and maintenance, and disruption of essential power systems. The risks of
microbial contamination can very often be ascribed to failures in maintenance of source protection and water
distribution systems rather than diffuse pollution. Heavy rainfall has the potential to cause peak contamination
Sanitation Climate change impacts on sanitation are largely predicted in relation to floods and extended
droughts characterized by high temperatures. Floods have the potential to damaged sewage infrastructure
and water supply systems hence precipitating contamination of both the water sources and also the distribution
network. Loss of surface water due to prolonged drought can further affect sewage holding (septic tanks) and
treatment facilities leading to high concentrations of pathogens.
Groundwater resources are widely expected to be less affected by climate change and it is widely believed that
groundwater will form the basis of adaptation programs as it buffers against more unpredictable rainfall
(Jimenez et al 2014). Given the predictions and current climate change scenarios, the level of sensitivity of
climate change related impacts has been ranked as high, impact magnitude medium since the main source of
water is underground water which is relatively cushioned from climate change impacts. Overall impact
significance is hence moderate.
Sensitivity
5 4 3 2 1
Impact 12
12 9
10 8 6 2
3 2 1
Impact Mitigation;
i) Undertake catchment protection to gazzetted water sources

ii) Undertake regular and continuous water resource assessments such that data is available to balance
withdrawals and the recharge of underground water.
iii) Introduce water conservation practices that reduce consumption and encourage recycling.
iv) Water sources shall be designed to protect sources from flood contamination
v) Design flood resilient distribution networks and associated infrastructure.
vi) Design household and institutional latrines that are resilient to floods.

8.7 Cumulative Impacts
8.7.1 Valued Environment and Social Components
Multiple projects currently under implementation and those planned within the spatial and temporal framework
impact a set of environment resources and social systems. Although the scope of this report only covers the
proposed development of the solar powered piped WSSS in Pangira RGC, there are other projects in the project
area. The identified VECs may include;
a) Material Source Areas
Projects implementing infrastructure development especially water pumping station, water reservoirs, booster
stations, water office blocks and sanitation facilities shall require gravel, murram, sand, rocks and among other
products hence impacting on source areas.
b) Shared Land Corridors
Linear projects like roads, water supply and power lines normally share corridors. Relocation of such services
is an impact and acquisition and compensation of such corridors may raise social and economic concerns.
c) Loading on Social Services
The most critical service affected by multiple construction projects is health infrastructure. Increased inflow of
workers may place a burden on health units. Security services may experience increased demand due to the
inflow of workers.
d) Gender and Sexual Harassment
Increased inflow of migrant labour working on different projects may increase the anonymity of workers and
possible offenders. Because there are many contract workers it becomes difficult to isolate those engaged in
illicit sexual behaviors and further individual involved in harassment of women.
Possible concurrent implementation of other development projects and interventions within the same project
area or in proximity of Pangira RGC has the potential to generate cumulative impacts.

9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT AND

MONITORING PLAN
The purpose of the ESMP is to identify the principles, approach, procedures, and methods that will be used to
avoid, reduce or compensate for the environmental and social impacts of all activities associated with water
project. The ESMP provides a summary of activities, their related potential impacts, and the corresponding
recommended mitigation measures to be carried out during all phases of the Project. It details active remedial
and mitigation measures to be continuously carried out to prevent or minimize impacts on the bio-physical and
socio-cultural environments as well as to promote occupational safety and health of employees. It also seeks
to identify the various institutional responsibilities to implement identified Environment and Social safeguards
on the Project.
9.1 Phases of Implementation
Implementations of these measures will be carried out at different stages of the construction and operation
phases. During the design stage, the feasibility and design consultant will incorporate proposed mitigation
measures in the design and tender documents. The contractual agreement will also include clauses to enforce
the management of environmental and social aspects. Construction stage activities are mainly the responsibility
of the contractor and that of the construction supervision consultant. The actual physical implementation works
are carried out mostly at this stage. The execution of the civil works will also include the implementation of the
relevant environmental and social mitigation measures
9.2 Integration of Safeguards into Contracts
Ministry of Water and environment shall seek to include the following key aspects in the contracts for civil works.
9.2.1 Bill of Quantities
The BoQs must capture all relevant safeguards aspects. The indicative costs of implementing safeguards
extracted from the ESMP budget should be clearly provided as provisional sums or billable items in the Bills of
Quantities. These should include safeguards staffing, documentation (CESMP, etc.), waste management,
HIV/AIDS, grievance redress, gender awareness, site clean-up and landscaping, monthly ESMP reporting, air
quality and noise monitoring among others. Laxity in the provision and use of personal protective equipment is
a risk to the safety of workers. The BoQs should provide a sum for PPE and supervision be done to ensure that
all workers undertake works while in full PPE
9.2.2 Procurement of the Contractor
Implementation of mitigation measures during construction is key to managing short- and long-term impacts
and risks. As a best practice, the contracts for the civil works should include clauses on management of
environment and social aspects. Sometimes, the clauses are weak and cannot be used to hold the contractors
accountable. There is need to strengthen the clauses and to tailor them to the specific project safeguards
aspects and management needs. The contractual agreement will also include clauses to enforce the
implementation of the relevant mitigations. The clauses should be included in technical specifications in all

contract documents related to the civil works. Safeguards clauses should be prescriptive and specify: what
needs to be done, where it needs to be done, when and how the actions will take place, who is responsible,
the monitoring and reporting requirements, and what sanctions or legal recourse are available for work that
does not meet the required specifications.
The following Key safeguards personnel shall be recruited:
 Environment Officer
 Sociologist/Social Development Specialist
 Safety Officer
9.2.3 Staffing
It is common for contractors to recruit unqualified safeguards staff or to assign safeguards duties to site foremen
or clerks with no prior safeguards experience. Staffing requirements should be spelt out in the contracts. In
addition, it may be useful to include the minimum requirements in the contracts for the civil works. Therefore,
MWE through the supervising consultants must approve the contractor’s Environment Officer, Health and
Safety Officer and the Sociologist.
9.2.4 ESMP Monitoring and Reporting
Laxity in implementation and reporting on safeguards issues is common amongst contractors largely because
they do not take safeguards issues seriously. This can be addressed by requiring contractors to prepare
monthly environment and social monitoring reports. These should either be pay items and clearly included in
the BoQs or a condition for certification and payment approvals. Contractor safeguards reports are usually
characterized by failure to include useful monitoring indicators such as safety statistics (fatalities, minor injuries,
near misses, etc.), number of trees cut, and number replanted amongst others. The contractors will require
training on safeguards monitoring and reporting. The contractors need to undertake proper recordkeeping of
all safeguards activities. The contractors should liaise with District technical offices such as the DEO, DCDO
and Physical Planner to ensure proper monitoring and timely implementation of project activities
9.2.5 Decommissioning and Restoration of Disturbed Areas
The construction phase shall terminate and shall be followed by decommissioning. The Contractor must ensure
restoration of all disturbed areas including materials sites through proper landscaping, backfilling and restoring
topsoil, (re-) introduction of local species (e.g. natural re-grassing) similar to those destroyed in order to re-
establish the natural local ecology. The final payment must be tagged to successful restoration activities.
9.3 Contractor Management Plans
The Contractor will be required to prepare some standalone safeguards management plans in addition to the
Contractor’s Environment and Social Management Plan. Reference should always be made to the Contractor’s
Environmental and Social Management Plan (CESMP) as the overarching document that contains general
Control Statements for various impacts such, solid waste, and hazardous materials, water quality and

ecosystem, noise and vibration control, erosion control, waste excavation and disposal and safety and
occupational health. In addition to the Management Plans, the Contractor should prepare Method Statements
for specific activities such as trenching and submit for the Supervision Engineer’s review and comments before
commencement of works. If the Engineer notifies the Contractor that a specific method statement has failed to
provide adequate mitigations, such a statement should be revised and resubmitted until when approved. MWE
will also prepare any other management plans for other unforeseen project safeguards risks. The Supervising
Consultant/MWE (as represented by the Project Manager) shall provide clearance to the CESMP
before commencement of works, in consultation (technical) with the World Bank.
9.3.1 Labour Force Management Plan
The Contractor is expected to have a clear plan for recruitment of workers to promote project ownership by the
communities. The Contractor should give preference to local people by recruitment of unskilled and semi-skilled
labour from project villages and this should be done through local areas councils from where those seeking
employment should get letters of recommendations. The Labour Management Plan shall include provisions for
nondiscrimination based on Gender, a Code of Conduct and provisions for documentation of all workers on
site. Other constituent plans on BBV/SEA/SH shall also be drafted in the CESMP.
9.3.2 Quality Management Plan
A quality management plan defines the quality policies and procedures relevant to the project for both project
deliverables and project processes and who is charged with what responsibility to ensure compliance with set
standards. Given the nature of this project, the contractor should have a quality management plan to guide the
quality control and assurance processes to achieve the intended outcomes in terms of social, design, structural
and investment outcomes in line with environmental and social safeguards policies
9.3.3 Runoff and Erosion Control Plan
Site clearance at all construction sites will have the potential to influence site slope angles and the possibility
of generating runoff capable of stimulating soil erosion. Erosion risks are expected to be mainly associated
with vegetation clearance for trenching, construction of access roads and storage of excavated materials. In
the event of unpredicted intense rains run off will be associated with several soil erosion and drainage impacts,
such as, siltation and water stagnation that could be experienced in the direct project area. There is need to lay
special strategies for managing the soil erosion. An erosion control plan should be overlaid on the project
grading plan(s) or site plan if there is not a grading plan. The erosion control plan shall be based on Best
Management Practices (BMPs) and suit local conditions. The plan must include measures to prevent erosion,
contain sediment and control surface runoff. The erosion control plan must also include installation details of
the BMPs as well as notes. Construction sites often have areas where soil disturbing activities such as clearing,
grading, or cut/fill work has stopped for a period of time. Bare areas that are not actively under construction
need some type of temporary cover to prevent or minimize erosion in the event of rainfall. Applicable areas
include topsoil stockpiles, rough graded areas, sediment basin dikes, ditches, temporary earthen structures,
and graded areas undergoing settlement. The following controls should be considered:

i) Stabilization which includes a wide range of erosion prevention practices that cover exposed soil such
as the use of straw, mulch, erosion control blankets, plastic sheeting or tarpaulins.
ii) Erosion prevention practices like stabilization are generally less costly and more effective than
sediment control measures, which involve settling or filtering mobilized soil particles before they are
transported by runoff to surface waters.
iii) Various practices can be used for sediment removal
iv) From dewatering discharge. Sedimentation is primarily effective at removing larger sized particles
v) The Contractor should ideally include a comprehensive Erosion, Sedimentation and Pollution Control
Plan Checklist.
9.3.4 Waste Management Plan
The Waste Management Plan (WMP) shall be prepared to address waste management aspects associated
with the construction of the markets in line with legal and regulatory requirements. The Contractor, all
subcontractors, and vendors involved in the project shall have to adhere to this Plan. The Contractor is
responsible for ensuring that waste is managed in accordance with this Plan by providing the necessary
resources and by issuing instructions and guidance during project execution. The Contractor will implement
waste management measures and practices throughout the construction period to mitigate the associated risks.
The WMP will contain the following information:
i) Relevant legislation and guidelines for waste management of the Project;
ii) The procedures and initiatives proposed to address the management of waste materials;
iii) Safeguards, mitigation measures and monitoring to manage waste impacts during construction;
iv) Roles and responsibilities of those involved in the implementation of waste management controls;
v) An effective monitoring, auditing and reporting framework to assess the effectiveness of the controls
implemented
vi) Checklists and forms for day-to-day waste management activities
9.3.5 Occupational Health and Safety Plan
The Contractor will have to prepare a document that presents the framework for occupational health and safety
management and monitoring measures that he will undertake. The OHS plan should typically cover safety
programs that will be applied for promoting health and safety, preventing harm, fatality and hazards to the
employees, sub-contractors, properties and the general public.

9.3.6 Handling of Chemicals and Other Potentially Harmful Materials
Chlorine, a harmful and toxic chemical, will be employed at the storage reservoirs during project operation.
Thus, it must be safely handled to prevent any accidents, including health and safety issues. This section
analyses the handling aspects of this chemical.
9.3.6.1 Design and Management of Chlorination Storage and Dosing Areas
The following special storage and handling features should be utilized and maintained during the water supply
project operation.
i) Storage and equipment rooms be equipped with doors, opening outward to the outdoors complete with
panic hardware;
ii) Viewing window into chlorine storage and equipment rooms for operator security;
iii) Visual and audible emergency alarms at the chlorine room entrance;
iv) Exhaust fans with a typical rating to air changeover every minute;
v) A chlorine gas leak detector to generate alarms and attendant ammonia bottle to help locate a leak
vi) A drench shower located where it is easily accessible in case of emergency, with single turn (butterfly
valve) water tap
vii) An emergency kit to repair leaking containers. For systems that use gas chlorination
viii) Install alarm and safety systems, including automatic shutoff valves, that are automatically activated
when a chlorine release is detected;
ix) Install containment and scrubber systems to capture and neutralize chlorine should a leak occur;
x) Use corrosion-resistant piping, valves, metering equipment, and any other equipment coming in
contact with gaseous or liquid chlorine, and keep this equipment free from contaminants, including oil
and grease;
xi) Store chlorine away from all sources of organic chemicals, and protect from sunlight, moisture, and
high temperatures
9.3.6.2 Handling of Chlorine during Operation
Chlorine reacts violently with hydrogen, acetylene gases and solvents creating heat (EPA, 2011b). The reaction
of chlorine with ammonia can create explosive compounds and gases that are toxic to breathe. Chlorine also
reacts with metals. In the presence of water, chlorine can create a highly corrosive and dangerous acid mist.
Therefore
i) Prepare and approve standard operating procedures for its storage and handling;

ii) Never store chlorine gas and ammonia in the same building or area;
iii) Keep chlorine isolated and in different rooms from the chemicals that it reacts with;
iv) Chlorine storage areas, storage containers and process equipment and lines should be properly
labelled and appropriate hazard warning should be posted in accordance with site specific operating
procedures;
v) Gas containers should be stored in separate or divided rooms separately from flammable materials
and other chemicals such as ammonia and sulphur dioxide, if used elsewhere in the installation;
vi) Containers should be stored and used above ground level and always in a vertical position;
vii) Chlorine gas containers should be stored in marked areas shielded from external heat sources;
viii) The protective hood should be kept secure on all unused containers and should only be taken off only
when the container is being used. All containers in use should be secured in position by chains or other
methods as appropriate. Gas containers should only be lifted with suitably rated and tested equipment
and never by their protective hoods;
ix) Empty cylinders should be clearly marked and segregated from unused cylinders.
9.3.7 Emergency Response Plan
The main purpose of an Emergency Response Plan (ERP) is to provide a systematic approach to the protection
of employees, assets and the environment from impact of serious incidents. The plan encompasses organizing,
coordinating and implementing a range of procedures to prevent, mitigate, respond to and recover from the
consequences of an emergency event. The ERP covers the required actions for all situations that could
generate emergency situations during the project’s construction phase. It will be developed to establish general
guidelines and response procedures for the management of emergency events on the Project. It will also
establish an emergency management command structure and mechanisms for review, oversight and
accountability. The contractor shall establish procedures to ensure that all personnel have the skills to report
environment incidents. The contractor shall keep records of all incidents, investigation, and analysis and
counter measures taken. The ERP will also set out the means by which these measures will be communicated
to affected communities in a culturally appropriate manner. The ERP should have Best Practices, which include
working with local and national agencies like the fire brigade, police, hospitals, counter terrorism units etc. The
following are key emergencies, which the project should be prepared to handle:
 Fire
 Electricity shocks and electrocution
 Bomb threat
 Death of a worker on the project site
 Suicide
 Disasters e.g. earthquake, lightening, collapse of excavation walls
 Health epidemics

 Rapture or leak of equipment

 Flooding.
9.3.8 Security Management Plan
The purpose of the Security Management Plan is to assure a safe and secure project environment for staff,
visitors and its service providers alike and to mitigate any risk of loss/damage to project property, equipment or
its infrastructure. It identifies potential security risks present in the construction phase, methods and policies to
mitigate these risks, and the requirements to ensure the highest levels of safety and security in the
implementation of the Project. It will therefore, set out commitment of the Project to security. The Plan will
specifically deal with:
1) Security issues in the project i.e. being safe from attacks from thugs and ill motived persons;
2) Being prepared for insecurity incidents; and
Decisively responding to and managing the insecurity circumstances and incidents.
9.3.9 Community Health and Safety Plan
The Plan applies to Project construction activities and the associated risks and potential impacts that these
activities may have on community health and safety. The risks and potential project impacts to community
health and safety can emerge from both within and outside the so-called project area of influence. Therefore,
the scope of this plan focuses on the management of aspects associated with the interaction of construction
activities, the workforce, and the community as well as mitigation of contagious diseases (e.g. COVID-19; Ebola
etc). The Plan should include control measures designed to avoid, minimize or mitigate the adverse effects of
project activities on the health and safety of the community, while at the same time, enhancing the beneficial
effects and capitalize on opportunities that may contribute to improving overall community well-being.
9.3.10 HIV/AIDS Management Plan
The Contractor in pursuit of his commitment to health and safety will organize trainings, conduct awareness
and education on the use of infection control measure in the workplace. The Contractor is expected to provide
appropriate PPE to protect workers from the risk of exposure to HIV/AIDS and incorporate HIV/AIDS information
in occupational health and safety inductions, provide guideline in preventing the spread of HIV/AIDS and other
sexually transmitted infections (STIs), publicize knowledge related to HIV/AIDS and STIs to the work crews and
the surrounding communities, provide information on good HIV prevention interventions, including promotion
of the correct use of condoms and ensure sufficient resources are available for HIV programs.
9.3.11 Child Protection and Management Plan
Contractors should be cognizant of the importance of child protection issues and their responsibility to uphold
the rights of children at all times. A child protection plan should spell out measures to prevent any form of abuse
of children such sexual violence, exploitative labour and sexual exploitation which include children. Additionally,
the plan should have stringent punitive measures properly defined for potential perpetrators of child related

abuse. This should also be signed by contractor workers as part of their contractual obligations to guard against
child abuse. The Child protection Plan shall include the following:
i) Brief Overview of Child Concerns
ii) Policy, Legal and Regulatory framework governing child protection issues 226
iii) Child Protection Risks at each site
iv) Contractor’s Policy on Children and Codes of Conduct
v) Child Protection Services by contractor (Prevention & Mitigation)
vi) Arrangements for Referral & Linkage to Other Child protection services in area
vii) Support Offered to Children to access justice 8. Mentorship & Training
viii) Monitoring & Reporting
ix) Schedule of Engagements such as Community Meetings and Joint Stakeholder Meetings.
9.3.12 Archaeological and Cultural Heritage Resource Reporting Plan
During excavations, chance finds may be encountered. Therefore, the contractor should have a chance finds
management plan that defines the measures necessary for the overall management of any cultural heritage
encountered during construction.
In order to avoid potential damage to cultural property discovered during construction, the following will apply:
 Workers must be vigilant to any relics found during excavation;
 In case of a discovery during the excavation, workers must immediately report the findings to the
Foreman;
 The Foreman must stop the work immediately and communicate the findings to the Supervisor;
 The Supervisor then communicates the findings to the Contractor Manager;
 The Contractor Manager then notifies MWE Safeguards Team;
 The Department of Museums and Monument of Uganda will then be notified either via communicating
with the MWE Safeguards Team via telephone or email or based on a site visit within 14 days from
the time of discovery;
 Any further excavations or continuation of the infrastructure development at the Site of the discovered
heritage will be undertaken only with the approval of the Department of Museums and Monuments;

 Should the Conservator of Antiquities from the Department of Museums and Monuments confirm that
the discovered resource falls within the heritage resource description, he/she will report the resource
to the Minister of Tourism, Heritage and Antiquities for preservation and protection;
 Rescue excavation or in-situ conservation will be proposed based on the disturbance likely to be
caused by the project or in relation to cost vis-à-vis value of the heritage resource;
 MWE will then apply for either an excavation or preservation in-situ license of the discovered
resource. The feasible proposal will then be executed. In case of in-situ conservation, the site will be
managed and open to the communities and tourists that access the project area; and
 All chance finds will be recorded in the chance find form.
The project activities will then continue after the following have taken place:
1. In the case of archaeological artefacts discovery, MWE will inform the Uganda Museum and grant a
period where specialists from the Department of Museums and Monuments excavate and curate the
artefacts professionally;
2. In the case of discovered human remains the police will have to be notified and either the remains
are taken for forensic investigation or the LC1 authorities sanction the reburial of the remains at
another location. The Contractor then meets the relocation and reburial expenses which shall be
claimed from MWE; and
3. In the case of an encounter with an unknown sacred site, relocation ceremonies will be undertaken
by the custodians of the site and the contractor then meets the relocation expenses which shall be
claimed from MWE.
Overall, the following precautions ought to be undertaken:
A. Site avoidance: If the boundaries of the site have been delineated, attempt must be made to redesign
the proposed development to avoid the site;
B. Mitigation: If it is not feasible to avoid the site through re-design, it will be necessary to sample it using
data collection program prior to its loss. This could include surface collection and/or excavation; and
C. Site Protection: It may be possible to protect the site through the installation of barriers during the
time of the development and/or possibly for a longer term. This could include erection of high visibility
fencing around the site or covering the site area with a geo-textile and then capping it with fill. The
exact prescription would be site- specific.
Table 9.1: Archaeological and Cultural Resource reporting plan
Issues to be Methods of Reporting Timeline Agencies being

Reported Reported to

Preconstruction Archaeological excavation report Before start of the project Archaeologist and the
archaeological Filled excavation forms developer
rescue excavations
in selected areas
Relocation ofSigned Consent Forms, Before start of the project Developer and
cultural heritage Cultural heritage relocation completion cultural heritage
sites that can’t be report and, expert
avoided Relocation Completion certificates
Cultural Heritage Cultural heritage awareness training Before start of the project Cultural heritage
Awareness Program/sessions and on admission expert and Developer
Training. contractors/sub-
contractors on the project
Chance Finds Chance Finds procedure report; As and when it occurs DMMs/Cultural
Procedure Chance Finds reporting forms heritage expert,
Contractor and the
Developer
During the implementation of the project and in the event that, a PCR is encountered, the following can be
contacted:
Ministry of Tourism, Wildlife and Antiquities The Uganda Museum

Rwenzori Towers 2nd Floor, Plot 5-7 Kira Road,
Plot 6 Nakasero Road. P. O Box 365, KAMPALA-UGANDA
KAMPALA, UGANDA. (+256) 414 232707.
P. O. Box 4241 Kampala www.ugandamuseums.or.ug
Phone: +256 414 561 700
Email: [email protected]
9.3.13 Decommissioning/ Site Restoration Plan
At the end of construction activities, the Contractor shall ensure restoration of the disturbed natural sites through
environmental rehabilitation, backfilling and restoring topsoils, (re-) introduction of genetic species (e.g. natural
re-grassing) similar to those destroyed in order to re-establish the natural local ecology.
The decommissioning phase will focus on any of the following as applicable:
a) Workers’ camp
b) The parking yards
c) Material stockpile areas
d) Makeshift roads within the site premises
e) Immediate surroundings of the access roads whose vegetation will be cleared during construction

Specifically, the process of rehabilitating and restoring the site shall follow the following sequential approach:
1) All facility structures shall be demolished; the rumble/debris shall be used for fill purposes or taken to
an approved disposal site;
2) All obsolete equipment, vehicles, trucks and machinery shall be removed from sites;
3) Makeshift access roads shall be closed, scarified and revegetated;
4) Backfilling all openings with soil and leftover overburden;
5) Planting fast-growing trees and grasses to stabilize excavated areas with native species; and
6) Fencing off the re-vegetated areas should be provided until the reinstated vegetation has reached
maturity.
Joint site inspections will be conducted to ensure site restoration before handover of the project in order to
assess the progress of restoration activities. They will constitute the Contractor, the Client (MWE), Supervising
Engineer and the District Environment Officer.
9.3.14 Stakeholder Engagement Plan
a) The Stakeholder Engagement Plan (SEP) is an instrument for mapping and prioritizing stakeholders
across levels and regions; and for guiding planned consultations and disclosure of relevant project
information to/with identified stakeholders. The Plan shall be followed to guide stakeholder
participation during the project design and construction phases. The SEP shall also be useful during
the formulation of the Grievance Management Mechanism. Stakeholder categorization: Three (3)
categories of stakeholder to be mapped out (across three levels at the national, regional and
community) as follows.
b) Primary level stakeholders considered to have high influence and power in respect to the project,
project area and potential impacts and project implementation. These require regular engagements
and consultations throughout the project life. These include the beneficiary communities, Lokung
SCLG, Lamwo DLG
a) Secondary level stakeholder considered to have either high influence but low power or high power
but low influence. These will require to be initially consulted and regularly kept informed. These will
require to be initially consulted and regularly kept informed. These include political leaders in area
b) Tertiary stakeholders considered to have low power and low influence. These include neighbouring
sub counties and town councils.
Information needs: The following information should be made available to all stakeholders, who are likely to
be affected by positive and adverse environmental or social impacts from the project:

a) Purpose, nature, objectives and scale of the project.
b) Schedule and duration of proposed project activities.
c) Potential project risks and impacts extracted from the ESIA.
d) Proposed mitigation plans.
e) Available grievance mechanisms.
f) Envisaged consultation process, if any, and opportunities and ways in which the public can participate
(via the SEP) and
g) Time and venue of any planned public meetings.
h) Benefits of project
i) Possible risks and their consequences (non-technical) for public interest e.g. threats to water
catchments production wells, contamination; threats to water infrastructural e.g. vandalism.
Disclosure mechanisms: A number of strategies can used to enhance public information disclosure and
stakeholder consultations including:
i) Scheduled public hearings at community level (village and parish) for initial disclosure, disclosure of
draft reports and final reports including their implementation
ii) Dedicated and select meetings with institutional stakeholders at the central regional, district and sub-
county levels at different project phases
iii) Dedicated meetings with select social groups like livelihoods groupings and vulnerable social groups
including women, youth, PWDs and local leaders.
iv) Project Background Information Document (PBID) summaries will be prepared, translated and shared
alongside other strategies described herein
v) Non-Technical Summaries (NTS) of the ESIA may also be developed for public disclosure through
print media and info-shops for the regulators, funder and project proponent.
9.3.14.1 Stakeholder Mapping (Interest & Influence Grid)
The ESIA mapped categories of stakeholders that influence, and/or exert an influence on the water supply and
sanitation project in terms of its success and/or failure. Their roles and interests were mapped. A stakeholder
matrix was used to assess the stakeholder interests and ranked them using Influence and Power grid (High /
Low; +ve / -ve), as well as showing relationship (linkages & synergies) with the planned project as shown in
The purpose of the stakeholder mapping was to identify and assess entry points.

Table 9.2: Stakeholder mapping (Interest, Power & Influence Grid)
Level of
Interest, Main Interests, Concerns & Contribution to large solar powered piped water supply & sanitation facilities in
Category of Stakeholders
Influence & Pangira, RGC
Power
Primary (high influence & power
Fulfilling government / presidential priorities.
GoU/Executive – Presidency High +ve
Has ability to influence scale of project in case of any advocacy from local leaders & outcry from community
Some incumbent MPs played key role in lobbying for piped water project, and are eager to see water flowing in their
High +ve /
GoU/ Parliament (Area MPs) constituencies. If not, they have expressed concern, others have threatened to sabotage the project. Have strong
High -ve
support from communities and can lobby GoU/ Executive / Presidency over the project
GoU/ OPM High +ve Control all operations in IDP/ refugee communities of ranch 18; own land / sites for water facilities e.g. reservoir site
MWE (incl. WSDF-W/ North High +ve /
Oversee and manage existing piped water system managers (WSDF-W/North Umbrella; IRWMD; MWE)
Umbrella) High –ve
MWE High +ve Owns the project, control and manage the operation plan for the same
World Bank High +ve Funding the solar piped water supply and sanitation / IWMDP
High +ve / They are major players in current water supply value chains across the district especially in rural growth centres. Their
Water vendors
High -ve major concern is about negative impact of project on their potential to continue selling water to communities.
High +ve / The technical managers, staff and local leaders are key influencers. A same time, they feel side-lined / not fully engaged
Lamwo Higher DLGs
High -ve in planning and implementing the project. They also have limited information.
High +ve / They are near to the beneficiary communities, and have direct influence and power to enforce ordinances and bylaws
Lokung SC Lower LGs
High -ve that enhance project implementation esp. in ensuring environment and social safeguards.
Secondary stakeholders (high influence but low power or high power but low influence)
GoU/ Parliament High +ve They allocate
These implement several infrastructure and livelihood related projects e.g.NUSAF3
GoU/ Other MDAs High +ve
Protection of water catchments and natural resources where hosts and refugees use as open water source
They are civil society organizations (CSOs); humanitarian, emergency and relief agencies. Their services supplement
Other CSOs & Humanitarian government role. Their work enhances the integrity of water utilization and management in areas not yet covered, WASH
Low +ve
Agencies infrastructure at household and communities e.g. hand washing kits, pit latrine construction, water tank construction, etc.
There is also a great section that don’t know / not aware about the water supply and sanitation project
Low +ve / They own the land where water facilities will be constructed. If they decline to offer the land, it can negatively affect the
Property / Land Owners
Low –ve project. However, in case it happens alternative sites can be identified.
They influence public opinion about the project. However, they have limited information, which in end causes
Local media (Radio, TV, Print) Low +ve /
misinformation and public anxiety. There is also a great section that don’t know / not aware about the proposed solar
Low –ve
pipped water supply and sanitation project
Tertiary Stakeholders (low power and low influence)

Level of
Interest, Main Interests, Concerns & Contribution to large solar powered piped water supply & sanitation facilities in
Category of Stakeholders
Influence & Pangira, RGC
Power
Corporate Clubs (Rotary Clubs,
Low +ve They mobilise voluntary support for communities in need especially water, sanitation and hygiene.
Lions Clubs, etc.)
They have direct and speedy mobilization of greater section of communities, and can be influential in shaping community
Religious Institutions Low +ve
roles towards the project, where need be.
9.3.14.2 Stakeholder Engagement Plan (SEP) Matrix
In relation to the above, a Stakeholder Engagement Plan (SEP) matrix has been prepared to guide on how specific stakeholder engagements could be undertaken
by the contractor, MWE as well as other Government-Ministries, Departments and Agencies (MDAs) in future (construction, Operation phases).
Level and type of Materials

Project phase & Activity Objectives Methods
stakeholders
Pre- Construction phase
To mobilize community All stakeholders esp. District level meeting of Technical Workshop / Seminars; Site Visits
/public consciousness and beneficiary community; Managers IEC materials e.g. Leaflets, brochures, T-
Organize Stakeholder preparedness in relation to Lamwo DLG (Higher & shirts
District Level meeting of Local
Awareness events required roles they are Lower); Refugees; Radio Talk Shows (monthly / quarterly)
Leaders
supposed to play Institutions Newspaper Supplement / Pull out
Use national & Local media
Construction phase
To disseminate information Beneficiary communities at
Meeting of Sub County Technical Community meetings
about design and how local Sub County, Trading centres
Officers & Local Leaders
IEC materials (in English, translated into 3
Organise Kick-off areas will be affected, how & villages
Meeting Site Specific Communities major local language and dialects – Acholi,
meetings to benefit and play a role
(along distribution lines e.g. trading Langi, Madi, Sudanese Arabic, Swahili)
centres)
Public display of design
To provide updates about Technical managers, staff & Quarterly meetings Radio talk shows; DJ Mentions; Radio
Organise periodic the progress of the Local Leaders District (higher Magazines / Features
Site Visits
meetings construction works, mitigate & Lower LGs)
TV talk show / TV Feature / site visits
challenges and options. Radio programme
Beneficiary communities
To mitigate the impact of Water vendors Shortlisting vendors through their Community meetings
Provide jobs to water project on job loss among representatives (also use contacts
vendors Registration forms
water vendors provided in ESIA report)

Level and type of Materials

Project phase & Activity Objectives Methods
stakeholders
Organize meeting
To sensitize about start of All stakeholders All media channels IECs on operations – radio, TV, print,
Project closure events operations community meetings
Official launch / commissioning
Operation & Maintenance (O&M)
To mobilise water users to Beneficiaries (water users – All media channels IECs on operations – radio, TV, print,
Customer friendly service
pay / connect to water new & old) community meetings
provision to end users
services
9.3.15 Costed Environment and Social Management Plan
Table 9.3: Environment and Social Management Plan
No Environmental Activity Project Phase Impact Mitigation Measures Responsible Monitoring Responsible Annual
/Social Impact Location Party for indicators Party for Cost (USD)
implementati Monitoring
on
General Provisions
All impacts All activities in All phases All project Achieve full compliance with the national MWE Level of Compliance NEMA, 30,000
Project Site sites and World Bank safeguards with all ESMP MGLSD,
requirements, upon which this ESMP is requirements. MoLUD,
based, through regularly monitoring and DWRM,
address on-site situations and through Number of non- DLGs, DMM
applying the relevant mitigation compliance fines
measures. issued.
The Environmental Officer can issue Safeguard officers

penalties, in consultation with relevant are present and
authorities, for incidents of non- supported to carry
compliance, and always in liaison with out their duties
NEMA.
Designs and
Sensitise all Contractors, including construction
foremen, supervisors and labourers in the activities that are
informed by

on
requirement for and full implementation of environmental and
the ESMP. social requirements
Employ an adequately qualified and

experienced Environmental and Social
Safeguards Officers to ensure
environmental and social safeguards
requirements are integrated in the design
and construction phases of the project.
Put in place simple Construction Method

Statements for activities in sensitive
areas, like densely populated areas.
Specific provisions
Community
Anxiety Project Design Design Phase All Sites The design Teams shall sensitize all MWE Number of MWE 10,000
project stakeholders on project sensitization meeting
operations held
Increased Excavations Construction All The construction sites for project Contractor Number of NEMA, 15,000
Runoff and Soil excavated infrastructure will be hoarded off to complaints from MWE, DLGs
Erosion Storage of areas intercept any eroded material and any soil communities
construction material will remain within the site until it
materials is taken away for proper disposal or used Number of temporary
for backfilling to avoid loose soil being storage areas for
Materials washed away by storm water. The Project spoil in a water way
storage Contractor should backfill all trenches
areas immediately after laying the pipes and Disturbed areas that
compact such areas as to near level prior have been properly
to excavation. restored
No spoil soil shall be temporarily placed in Number of swamps

water ways. where construction
wastes have been
The top soil shall be kept separately so disposed off
that it is used last in backfilling of the
excavated areas. This is to ensure that

on
the living soil (top soil) is available for Waste transfer notes
plant growth in disturbed areas. for waste solid
disposed off at a
MWE will also ensure that proper NEMA approved
landscaping and vegetation restoration is facility
carried out to further reduce the possibility
of soil erosion. Native vegetation must be Culverts installed
used for re-seeding the excavated site. along access roads
to key project
The excess soil shall be spread along the components
trench by the Contractor but in liaison with
the local people; special attention would The acreage of
be made not to dispose of such cleared land for
construction wastes in swamps on any construction of key
sensitive ecosystem. project components
The excavated soil from the pit at the

WTP shall be removed from the site every
end of the day and disposed of in
accordance with the National
Environment (Waste) Management
Regulations, 2020.
Exposure to Excavations Construction On all project No employee should be exposed to a Contractor/ Noise monitoring NEMA, 10,000
high noise and operation sites noise level greater than 85 dB (A) for a Operator records MWE,
levels Machinery duration of more than 8 hours per day MGLSD,
operations without hearing protection. (National PPE issuance DLGs
Environment (Noise) Standards and records
Vehicular Regulations). Workers operating
movements equipment generating noise levels Number of workers
greater than 80 dBA over long hours must observed without
be given earmuffs; PPE during works
Workers be provided with the necessary Installed Equipment

personal protective equipment (PPE) with acoustic
such as ear muffs as found appropriate; insulation

on
The use of hearing protection by all the Hoarded off working
workers should be mandatory. The sites
mandatory use of hearing protection
equipment (earmuffs) should be enforced Work schedules
by the management of the Water clearly showing plans
Treatment Plant. for working near
public facilities and
Prior to the issuance of hearing protective day time
devices as the final control mechanism,
use of acoustic insulating materials, Presence of workers
isolation of the noise source, and other not wearing
engineering controls should be appropriate PPEs
investigated and implemented, where
feasible. Medical check-up
reports
Periodic medical hearing checks should
be performed on workers exposed to high Number of
noise levels. complaints
registered on noise
Sites must be hoarded to curb noise
impacts to neighbouring communities.
Works should be undertaken during day

time i.e. from 8am to 6pm.
Works near schools should be done in

periods like weekends in order not to
interfere with learning environment.
Loss of Clearance for the Construction All project The Environment management team MWE for the Number of NEMA, 15,000
Vegetation right and other sites shall mark off the disturbance zone using approved complaints MoLUD,
Cover and project sites high reflective tape before bush clearing RAP and the registered on DLGs, MWE But
Habitat for to limit the area disturbed by bush Contractor destruction of crops compensati
Wildlife clearing equipment. for property and other vegetation on costs
destroyed by shall be
Approved RAP report
and its

on
A soft start shall be used to allow slow their implementation determined
moving wildlife to move away from the activities report by the RAP
alignment
Percentage of PAPs
Vegetation clearance should be limited to compensated
only localities required for development.
Works undertaken in
Undertake selective tree cutting at work only the right of way
sites. that has no
incumbrances
Where cutting a tree is unavoidable,
replanting ten trees per tree cut of the Number and type of
same species should be implemented. invasive species
encountered and
Site restoration shall be undertaken using removed from the
natural species project sites
Topsoil removed during bush clearing Number of disturbed

shall be stockpiled and used in sites that have been
restoration. fully restored
Movement of equipment (vehicles,

contractors and the entire construction
crew) must follow designated pathways or
agreed upon access roads.
Introduction of Excavations Construction Habitats Transfer of spoil across vegetation zones Contractor Number of NEMA, 8,000
Invasive Plant areas shall be limited. The Environment team ungazzated access MWE,
Species Clearance of the shall identify suitable sites for spoiling in tracks by vehicles DLGs, UWA
right of way all vegetation zones identified.
Number of disturbed
Movement of Topsoil generated during bush clearance sites that are
equipment and grubbing will be stockpiled on site to restored
facilitate restoration and landscaping.

on
Equipment shall be washed before they Number of wild
are moved between construction sites. animals encountered
and reported to UWA
Movement of equipment (vehicles,
contractors and the entire construction Restoration plan and
crew) must follow designated pathways or closure reports
agreed upon access roads. This will avoid
unintended damages to fauna. Number of
awareness sessions
The contractor should restore sites where for managing any
activities will be carried out at all the wildlife encountered
project sites. The topsoil that will have
been removed before pitting the trenches Number of incidents
for the pipeline should be put back to of animals falling in
cover the trenches so that the mobile uncovered pits
fauna is not affected.
If wild animals are encountered, the

Contractor shall notify UWA so that it is
picked and taken to a secure place.
Trenching, pipework laying as well as well

as backfilling will be done concurrently.
For pits like at the clarifier and the booster
pump, the contractor shall ensure that
every evening, the pits are covered with
timber while being secured with a warning
tape.
Expropriation of Site clearance Construction All project MWE shall work with local council MWE Number of NEMA, 10,000 +
land and for project areas committees, sub-county committees, engagement MGLSD, compensati
Demolition of infrastructure Councilors, district land boards, CAOs, meetings with MoLUD, on costs as
Properties RDCs, Politicians and other local leaders stakeholders DLGs, detailed out
thereon to sensitize all people to be affected on in the RAP
the intentions of land acquisition. report

on
MWE shall conduct a Resettlement RAP report approved
Action Plan (RAP) in accordance with the by the CGV and the
Land Act and World Bank environmental Bank
and social Safeguard Policies especially
Involuntary Resettlement (OP 4.12). Percentage of PAPs
compensated o
MWE shall negotiate with land and
structural owners in compliance with local
market prices and government rates so
as to establish rational figures for 6 months’ notification
compensation and resettlement that are to the PAPs
in line with the World Bank environmental
and social Safeguard Policies especially
Involuntary Resettlement (OP 4.12).
Number of
All sorts of compensation and settlements complaints
must be done at least 6 months before registered
structures are demolished.
All physically or economically displaced

people should be offered an option Clearly spelled out
between either a full resettlement options for
package, including the provision of compensation
replacement residential land and a house, procedures disclosed
or cash compensation in line with the
World Bank environmental and social Grievance log
Safeguard Policies especially Involuntary showing status of
Resettlement (OP 4.12). addressing
complaints
Any grievances in the course of project
implementation shall be addressed in
accordance with the grievance redress
mechanism presented in Annex 13.

on
Impact on Excavations, Construction All project The Contractor shall construct a drainage Contractor Number of NEMA, 8,000
Water and sanitation areas system with silt traps to reduce impacts of complaints from MGLSD,
Sanitation management storm water from the construction site. community MWE,
and equipment registered on DWRM,
servicing All excavated soils shall be used for pollution of water DLGs,
backfilling immediately after laying of NWSC
pipes. The heaped soils at deep
excavations shall be consolidated in an
area with embarkments to prevent it from Silt traps in drainage
being washed away. system
Appropriate sanitary facilities shall be Spoil soil

installed at the campsite and working consolidated with
gangs shall be provided with mobile embankments
toilets that will be maintained and emptied
on time. The emptied sanitary waste shall Appropriate and
be disposed of at regional NWSC adequate sanitary
Treatment Plant. facilities
Regular servicing of project vehicles shall Vehicle maintenance

be outsourced to gazetted vehicle service log
centres (Vehicle maintenance and
Servicing companies) either in Adjumani
or neighbouring Gulu and Moyo districts.
No vehicle shall be allowed to be serviced
in sensitive ecosystems. The Service
centre must present with proof that its
fluids such as old car engine oil shall be
is properly managed
Wastewater and Operation At the Promotion of collection services, or Operator Number of NEMA, 15,000
Steapage sanitation ensuring that collection services are complaints MWE,
collection facilities available, is of primary concern. registered due to DWRM,
overflowing septic DLGs,
tank NWSC

on
Timely collection of sewage should be
undertaken to prevent sewage over flows.
Number of
There should be a system among the promotional
communities, their leaders and the health initiatives
workers to monitor, detect and alert the implemented
responsible authorities to call for
emptying of any septic tank that poses a Number of private
danger to the community sector players
involved in septic
collection services
Number of sewage
overflows from septic
tanks reported
Emptying and
collection schedule
and records
Contacts of emptying
service providers
readily available
Availability of
sewage delivery
notes
Generation of Construction Construction All project All sorts of waste generated during Contractor No Wastes NEMA, 20,000
Construction activities sites construction such as HPDE and uPVC indiscriminately MWE,
Waste offcuts and other accessories associated disposed off in the
with water and sanitation projects shall be project site observed Adjumani
collected by the contractor and given to DLG
recycling facilities. Other forms of waste Sanitary facilities on
which are inert or ceramic in nature may all project sites
be collected by NEMA gazetted waste
handlers (Who shall be engaged by the

on
Contractor) and taken to a NEMA Number of
gazetted waste disposal facilities for complaints on
disposal. improper waste
disposal registered
All organic waste generated at eating
places during construction such as food Waste Management
stuffs shall be collected and transported plan and records
by the contractor to designated Town
Council landfills for disposal. This activity Number of waste
shall be supervised by the District bins on sites
Environment Officer and the supervising
consultant. Records of quantities
of waste collected
All plastic waste generated at rented and recycled or
residences for the workers or campsites disposed off
in the course of work such as mineral
water bottles, polythene bags, jerry cans Waste Delivery
and cups shall be collected and Notes after disposal
given/sold either to the local people for re-
using or taken for recycling in respective
factories.
The Contractor shall develop and

implement a Waste Management Plan
that puts into consideration sorting at the
source, proper storage and
transportation. That will at minimum
contain the types, nature and quantities of
wastes expected to be generated as well
as their corresponding methods of
treatment and disposal. The plan shall
also indicate the sites of proposal as well
as the frequency of collection and
disposal.
Adequate and appropriate sanitary

facilities shall be constructed at the
campsite while workers along the

on
construction sites shall be provided with
mobile toilets that shall be cleaned and
emptied promptly.
Water treatment Operation WTP and Minimize the quantity of solids generated Operator Quantities of wastes NEMA, 20,000
and sanitary Sanitary by the water treatment process through generated MWE,
facilities facilities optimizing coagulation processes.
maintenance MOU with NEMA DWRM,
A NEMA approved waste handler should licensed waste Adjumani
be engaged to collect and dispose of solid handler DLG
wastes to a gazetted NEMA waste
disposal facility Emptying schedules
and disposal records
Alternatively, landfill solid wastes but not
close to any surface or groundwater Number of
(residuals from WTPs are typically not incidences of
hazardous (EPA, 2011a), thus can be overflowing of the
landfilled). septic tank
Regenerate activated carbon such as by

returning spent carbon to the supplier.
Promptly empty the public toilets and

toilets at the water office and dispose of
sewage to regional NWSC sewage
treatment plant.
Impact on Excavations Construction Road To minimize interference with traffic, Contractor Number of traffic NEMA, 8,000
transport - across roads and operation crossings digging trenches and piping across roads and incidents registered MWE,
Traffic and shall be conducted in hours with less Operator UNRA,
Road Safety traffic preferably on weekends. Number of
complaints regarding Adjumani
The trench excavated across the roads, traffic interactions DLG,
after laying the pipes should be backfilled registered by the
with marram, compacted and levelled to road users
the level of the existing road immediately.

on
This is to ensure that the integrity of the Road traffic Uganda
road is not affected by the water line signage’s Police
construction activities.
Notifications to
Conspicuous notices shall be well placed Traffic Police
on roads and guides on ground shall
direct traffic in case of diversions or open Daily reports
trenches.
Number of affected
The contractor will have to notify traffic road crossings that
police in advance and work with it during are repaired
trenching across high ways and other
major roads. Drivers with
defensive driving
All drivers to be employed by the licenses
Developer or Contractor shall be
qualified, skilled with valid driving permits.
The roads that will be affected by the

repaired and restored immediately after
laying of pipes
Impact on Interaction of Design and All project Workers and the community shall be Contractor Number of incidents MWE, 15,000
public Health workers with Construction sites sensitized on protective behaviour and related to public NEMA,
communities practices during work by distributing health, MGLSD,
(Influx of workers appropriate education materials to drunkardness, etc Adjumani
workers and the surrounding community. registered on the DLG
project
The Contractor shall develop and
implement an HIV prevention and Number and
management Plan. category of
Stakeholder
High risk groups such as the youths sensitised
especially students shall be continuously
sensitized on the dangers of casual sex,
consequences of early marriages,
teenage pregnancy and monitored to

on
ensure that such groups are not at risk of Number of HIV
falling victims. prevention programs
implemented
The Contractor shall provide surveillance
and active screening and treatment of Diseases outbreak
workers and the community where a surveillance and
communicable disease is discovered. management plan
Excessive alcohol abuse shall be Appropriate and

discouraged as a policy among project adequate sanitation
construction workers. facilities at all active
sites
The contractor and subcontractors ought
to have adequate sanitation facilities for Substance/alcohol
the workers at both places of residences and abuse policy
and at all work places.
Orientation and
The contractor or subcontractors shall sensitization reports
procure a secure and descent on GBV, SEA and
accommodation for all staff either through responsible sexual
renting the existing structures in the behaviour
project area or by constructing new
houses in consultation with MWE and Appropriate and
local authorities. adequate
accommodation
All construction workers shall be facilities for workers
orientated and sensitized about
responsible sexual behaviour, prevention Code of conduct
of Gender Based Violence (GBV) and developed and
Sexual Exploitation and Abuse (SEA) in signed by all
project communities. employees
The contractors will develop and follow a SOPs for Covid -19
code of conduct. The information prevention
regarding Worker Code of Conduct will be
provided in local language(s).

on
For prevention of Covid-19, the following
measures shall be adhered to:
Establish a daily screening protocol for

staff and visitors, to ensure that
potentially infected staff do not access
worksites.
Regularly clean and sanitize surfaces like

desks, doors, printers, vehicles, toilets,
and other shared equipment and spaces.
Establish a hand washing station at the

entrance to the worksite and the security
MUST ensure that all people accessing
the worksite wash their hands.
Employees and visitors must at all times

maintain the recommended social
distancing and must not make
unnecessary make direct contact with the
staff and clients. The Ministry of Health
proposal for working in shifts MUST be
complied with. In this regard, recommend
that a rotational timetable for staff be
prepared and communicated.
The Developer/contractor should provide

protection materials i.e. (i) face shields
which must be put on all the time when
the employees are on duty and (ii) Hand
sanitizers to be on every work
desk/station.
The physical meetings must be minimized

and virtual meetings encouraged.

on
Social ills as a All project Construction Along all The contractor shall involve local (LC) Contractor Recommendation MWE, 20,000
result of influx of Activities project sites leaders in labour recruitment to ensure letters for workers NEMA,
construction people hired have no criminal record. from LCs MoGLSD,
workers(Crime, Adjumani
, HIV risks, Local governments and the contractor DLG
Sexual shall collaborate with police to contain Uganda
Harrasment, criminal activities. Number of Police
Sexual coordination
Exploitation and A register of all construction workers shall meetings held
Abuse and GBV be filed with local authorities to aid in between the
tracking cases of child neglect. contractor, LCs and
Police
With the assistance of a competent sub-
contractor, the contractor shall draft an
HIV/AIDS policy
Workers’ register
A service provider for professional shared with LCs
HIV/AIDS activities shall be procured and
engaged
The contractors shall put in place worker HIV prevention and

place committees to oversee management
implementation of HIV/AIDS control initiatives
activities. implemented
Contractor will provide counseling

support and work based positive culture
to posttest workers Service provider for
counselling engaged
The contractor will provide condoms to all
workers free of charge placed in private
and areas of confidence.
Code of conduct
Peer based awareness and counseling signed by all workers
shall be instituted within the workforce.

on
All workers (permanent or temporary) will Workers GRM
be required to sign the project code of estabslihed and
conduct prior to commencing their functional
assignments.
SEA/SH Action plan
A worker Grievance mechanism shall be and implementation
established and operated. reports
Ensure that there is recruitment of (a)

service provider(s) to support in
prevention (sensitization) and response
(referral pathway) activities.
Develop and implement a SEA/SH action

plan with an Accountability and Response
Framework as part of the C-ESMP. The
SEA/SH action plan will follow guidance
on the World Bank’s Good Practice Note
for Addressing Gender-based Violence in
Investment Project Financing involving
Major Civil Works (Sept 2018). The
SEA/SH action plan will include how the
project will ensure necessary steps are in
place.
Drug abuse and All construction Design and All project The contractor shall involve local (LC) Contractor Recommendations MWE, 5,000
prostitution Phase activities Construction site leaders in labour recruitment to ensure from LCs for workers NEMA,
that people hired have no criminal record. MGLSD,
Percentage of labour Adjumani
The local content provision shall be sourced from the DLG
emphasized to minimize labour community Uganda
requirements needed from outside the Police
community. Number of
engagement
meetings held with
police

on
Local governments and the contractor Number of
shall collaborate with police to contain awareness and
criminal activities. sensitization
meetings held
The Developer together with the
Contractor and the Adjumani district local
governments shall undertake
comprehensive awareness to
avoid/minimize risks related to drug us
and prostitution.
Noise and Trenching and Construction Construction No employee should be exposed to a Contractor Complaints MWE, 7,000
Vibrations Operations sites noise level greater than 85 dB (A) for a registered on noise NEMA,
duration of more than 8 hours per day pollution MGLSD,
without hearing protection. DLGs
Levels of noise from
Workers be provided with the necessary Noise monitoring
personal protective equipment (PPE) records
such as ear muffs as found appropriate;
Medical check-up
The use of hearing protection by all the reports
workers should be mandatory. The
mandatory use of hearing protection Records of PPE
equipment (earmuffs) should be enforced issuance
by the management of the Water
Treatment Plant. Hoarded off sites
Periodic medical hearing checks should

be performed on workers exposed to high
noise levels.
Sites must be hoarded to curb noise

impacts to neighbouring communities

on
Air Pollution Trenching Construction Construction sites shall be hoarded off to Contractor Complaints NEMA, 10,000
restrict dust to within site boundaries; registered on air/dust MWE, DLGs
Haulage of pollution
Materials Sprinkle water on vehicle pathways;
Levels of air/dust
PPE like dust masks shall be availed to emissions from the
workers whenever needed; monitoring reports
Loose materials like sand that are Trucks covered with

susceptible to dust generation during tarpaulin during
haulage be covered with tarpaulin; transportation Water
sprinkling records
Limit vehicle speed to 30Km/hr on
marram roads. PPE issuance
records
Instructions to drivers
on speed limit
including speed limit
signage installed
along the haulage
routes
Public Health Trenching Construction All project The contractor shall install safe temporary Contractor Number of temporary NEMA, Part of Bid
and Safety activities Phase sites crossing points on trenches to enable access constructed MGLSD,
Impacts people to access their properties and NWSC,
Pipe laying Availability of Adjumani
social services at all times
restoration plan DLG MWE
Fitting
Restoration plans for all shall be
produced and approved before
commencement of operations

on
Construction safety signage shall be
installed at all construction sites and
trenches
All installed access culverts shall be able

to accommodate existing traffic
Installed pipe lines shall be properly

backfilled, levelled and compacted to
enable all community resident easy
access including the disabled.
A nominated service provider shall be

hired to undertake community
sensitizations and engagement on their
health and safety during construction
works.
Impacts on During Construction At all project Structures like shrines and graves if Contractor Number of NEMA, 5,000
Cultural excavations sites encountered (if any) will be relocated in complaints on PCR MWE,
Heritage accordance with the existing rituals and registered MGLSD,
Resources norms of the society. Loss of incomes Adjumani
shall also be compensated for since the Notifications to DMM DLG DMM
owners may take some time without any
income from them especially if it’s Proof of payments for
deemed necessary to relocate them far the relocation
from their original site due to cultural
rituals involved. Details of compensation Number of incidents
shall be contained in the RAP. when works stop due
to PCR
On discovering evidence of possible
scientific, Paleontological, historical, Training records on
prehistoric, or archaeological remains, CFP
the contractor shall notify the Department

on
of Museums and Monuments giving the PCR avoidance
location and nature of the finds. procedures
The Contractor shall cease work in the

vicinity of the site and request the
responsible officer from the Department
of Museums and Monuments to inspect
the site and make recommendation on
possible salvage within 72 hours.
The Contractor shall exercise care so as

not to damage artefacts or fossils
uncovered during excavation operations
and shall provide such cooperation and
assistance as may be necessary to
preserve the findings.
The department of Museums and

Monuments is located in Kampala,
Kamwokya just before Uganda Wild Life
Authority on the road to Ntinda (Kira
road). The Commissioner Uganda
Museum can be contacted on +256
772485624. A detailed chance find
procedure has been presented in this
report.
To mitigate damage to archaeological

resources, it is proposed that the
construction foremen will inform
construction crew to be aware of the
possibility of discovering fossils or
archaeological remains, what form these
would take (bones, fossils in rock, shards
or pottery, arrow heads etc.) and the
procedure to be followed shall be as
stated above.

on
The contractor shall develop and
implement avoidance procedures. In the
event of human remains, there shall be no
further excavations or disturbance of the
site until the responsible police authorities
have been informed.
Sexual and Work sites Construction All project Contractors to develop and implement Contractor Number of NEMA, Social
Gender Based sites GBV codes of conduct for workers, complainants related MWE, Developme
Violence visitors, sub-contractors and service to gender and other MGLSD, nt Expert
(SGBV) providers vulnerable groups DLGs already
catered for
Promote GBV/SEA/SH awareness before in 2 above.
and during project implementation
Number workers
Strengthen GBV Referral pathways sensitised on their
within the community (core and influence sexual rights 15,000
zone of project area). The referral
pathways and reporting of GBV is Number of
provided under annex 11. sensitisations on
social protection
There is need to engage into community requirements
policing with emphasizing on prevention undertaken
of GBV. This can be done by the local
area police department of Family At least 30% of the
Protection Unit (FPU). workforce are
women
The local government (CDO) should
strengthen awareness and sensitization Number of workers
against GBV. sensitised on gender,
children and other
MWE should consider having a dedicated vulnerable groups
service provider for GBV, VAC, HIV/AIDS requirements
to provide overall mitigation
implementation and management during
civil works.

on
The contractor, where a case arises, will Number of
cooperate with law enforcement agencies complaints
in investigating complaints of SGBV. registered
Workers will be sensitized on their sexual Child protection

rights. MWE shall Work with the Policy and
contractor on establishing zero tolerance implementation
policies and codes of conduct related to reports
violence against women and girls
(VAWG). National abuse
hotline availed to all
To the extent possible, there will be the workers
gender sensitivity in task allocation;
Number of cases on
The contractor shall conduct gender child abuse, SH and
sensitization to the work force on matters GBV reported to
such as gender sensitive communication police
and on the gender sensitive conduct of
workers towards women including putting Orientation plans and
in place toilets segregated by gender reports on child
amongst others abuse, GBV, SH etc
A child protection plan will be developed

by MWE and provided to all the
contractors and school management to
discourage the contractors from using
children as laborers. In addition,
contractors will be required to avoid
employing workers who are below
eighteen years old. They will also be
required to keep records that show the
ages of their workers.
Ensure that the community and local

leadership have access to and know of
and report abuse using the national child
abuse hotline

on
The existence of the hotline can be
displayed throughout near the
construction site and in the community at
large.
The contractor shall ensure that

mechanisms for close monitoring of
worker’s behaviour/conduct are in place
e.g. contractor could discreetly engage
the police to identify anonymous
informers from among the workers to
monitor and report any negative
behaviour by the workers including child
abuse related misconduct, display a call
line or suggestion box where the
community can provide feedback on
workers behaviour.
MWE and the contractor shall ensure that

all local leaders and women/child
representatives are fully oriented to the
labour force related risks for children
engaging in construction related
activities.
Talks with the contractor and his

workforce Any person involved in child
abuse shall be dealt with in accordance
with the law.
There will be a Specialist (Social

Specialist) to oversee gender
mainstreaming in the project.
Impacts on Abstraction site operation Abstraction Acquire abstraction permit and observe NWSC Abstraction Rates NWSC Nil
site conditions

on
Water Resources Undertake catchment management MWE MWE
of the Albert Nile. planning to ensure sustainable yield
Enforce catchment protection measures

as contained in catchment plans
Observe abstraction rates of the two

boreholes to enforce compliance with
designed yield.
Ensure timely monitoring of water levels

to ascertain any impact on the water level.
Water levels should be accompanied by

monitoring of the water quality to
ascertain any trend in water quality
change with continued abstraction.
Disposal of Sludge Disposal Operations Institutions Use licensed waste to dispose of sludge School Disposal Quantities DLG
Sludge from from Institutional for institutional facilities Authorities
Sanitary Facilities MWE
Facilities Sensitize residents on use of facilities to District
avoid use of non-biodegradable anal Authorities School
cleaning materials. Managemen
t
Use of manifest system to ensure that the
waste is disposed of at a waste treatment
plant gazetted by NEMA.
Unhygienic and Use of sanitary operations Institution Management shall contract paid labour to School Number of times DLG
Poor use Facilities manage the facilities Authorities facility is cleaning
leading to MWE
Spread of

on
Communicable Sensitize all users on hygienic use of the District School
Diseases facility Authorities Managemen
t
Install signage directing users on use and
operating the facility
Maintain the facilities clean and usable
Occupational Lifting, working Construction All project The contractor should have in place a Contractor Number of Safety NEMA, 10,000
health and at heights, and Operation sites Health and Safety Policy and Action Plan, and Inductions MGLSD,
safety of transportation addressing workers’ occupational health Operator undertaken MWE,
workers etc and safety issues, workers’ welfare and Adjumani
working conditions in line with the Number of safety DLG
Occupational Health and Safety Act of incidents registered
2006, and World Bank Group EHS
general Guidelines, and the EHS Number of
guidelines for water projects complaints on health
and safety registered
The Contractor should have HSE
induction for all workers, and undertake Workers observed on
daily tool box meetings prior to works, sites with appropriate
including work at heights and adequate PPEs
Ensure adequate provision of PPEs PPE issuance

(gloves, safety shoes, safety belts, records
overalls and goggles), as well as
continuous awareness on the need for Traffic Management
use of PPEs and enforcement of usage Plan
Ensure good housekeeping practices on Training records for

site (have all equipment, materials, workers
containers well stacked or stored) to
avoid trips and falls on site Records of safety
drills

on
The movement of hazardous liquid Fenced material
chemicals will be done on drip trays to storage areas and
avoid spillage to the ground camp sites
All workers on sites should be well trained First aid box and
on the risks and their tasks facilities available at
worksites
Workers should regularly be taken
through safety drills and emergency
preparedness training allowing for quick
and efficient responses to accidents that
could result in human injury or damage to
the environment.
First aid facilities should be provided on

site and accessible to all personnel. It
should among others contain rubber
gloves, bandages, pain killers and cotton
wool to cater for minor accident victim.
Fence off equipment storage areas and

camp sites to discourage idlers to the
sites
The contractor and Operator to have in

place a traffic management plan, and
guidelines for drivers to avoid accidents.
Overall ESMP Implementation costs 398,000

9.4 Environmental and Social Monitoring Programme
9.4.1 Rationale for Monitoring
Monitoring performance on Environment and Social Safeguards on the project shall be carried out.
Implementation of proposed mitigation/enhancement actions and procedures will be monitored such that were
found ineffective, they are either modified, redesigned or new approaches are suggested. Monitoring will further
allow evaluation of compliance with national standards as well as with the World Bank policies and guidelines.
The Ministry has established a monitoring mechanism for supervision, monitoring and enforcement of E&S
requirements. The mechanism includes the MWE teams (including the PST), the supervising consultants and
contractors. Furthermore, the Ministry will procure a dedicated consultant for undertaking stakeholder
engagement activities and formation, training and tooling of GRMs as well as other E&S Risk management
activities and the ministry has allocated separate budget for this consultancy.
9.4.2 Scope of Environmental and Social Monitoring
Environmental monitoring will be undertaken at different levels as described below
i) Surveillance: Undertaken by the Supervision Engineer on behalf of MWE.
ii) Quarterly Monitoring: Joint by all relevant stakeholders at various levels.
iii) Audit activities: To be done by a NEMA registered Environmental Auditor.
iv) Spot checks: By Supervising Engineer, MWE, Contractor, District Leadership, NEMA.
9.4.3 Monitoring Activities and Processes
 Water Resources and Weather
Monitoring weather during construction will be aimed at enabling the scheduling of construction activities to
avoid delays due to unfriendly weather events especially rainfall. However, during the operation phase,
monitoring ground water resources shall be undertaken to ensure optimum yield is upheld.
 Site Inspection
Routine inspections will be carried out to cover all aspects of environmental and social management on site.
Daily inspection aims to identify any environmental issues and rectify them without delay whereas weekly,
monthly and quarterly inspections will verify that the daily inspections are identifying any maintenance
requirements and that these requirements are being completed in an appropriate time frame. Site inspections
will be carried out by the Contractor with instructions from the Supervision Consultant.
 Meetings
Monthly site meetings are to be held to discuss project progress and, in such meetings, safeguards issues shall
be sufficiently discussed and minuted. That shall include a review of the effectiveness of the mitigation

measures, successes, and non-compliances. This will be a platform for the Engineer, the client (MWE) and
World Bank to raise any environmental issues arising from the joint inspection and as a reaction to the
contractor’s presentation
 Record Keeping
MWE shall ensure that all relevant monitoring and compliance records are readily available. Section 122 (6) of
NEA No 5 of 2019 states, “A developer shall maintain proper records of the monitoring undertaken under
subsection (2), which shall be made available to the Authority or lead agency upon request” while subsection
(7) states, “A lead agency or the Authority may require the developer to submit monitoring reports in a
prescribed form”.
 Monthly and Quarterly Environmental and Social Report
Either a standalone Monthly Environment and Social shall be prepared, or safeguards shall be sufficiently
covered in the Contractor’s Monthly Progress Report in fulfilment of the Contractor’s contractual reporting
obligations. The report will highlight different activities undertaken to manage environmental and social aspects
of the project in line with contract specifications, laws, standards, policies, and plans of Uganda and World
Bank Safeguard policies. This report will also have to be verified and approved by the supervising consultant
Planning for management of environmental aspects is typically done on a continuous basis. In that regard,
every monthly progress report should include a schedule for environmental and social activities for the next
month.
This Contractor’s Monthly Report is expected to summarize the following:
i) Progress in implementing the CESMP and the standalone management plans;
ii) Status of key approvals and documentation for the project;
iii) Compliance with legal obligations and specifications;
iv) Compliance to the commitment to child protection and GBV (SEA & SH) prevention and management
v) Findings of the monitoring programmes, with emphasis on any breaches of the control standards,
action levels or standards of general site management;
vi) Summary of any complaints by the community and actions taken/to be taken; and
vii) Key environmental activities for the next month.
On a quarterly basis, the supervising consultant will prepare an Environment and Social Report covering similar
thematic areas as listed above (for the quarter) that will be submitted to the developer (MWE). This report will
inform the MWE quarterly report that will be shared with the World Bank and other stakeholders. MWE should
stipulate reporting requirements in the bidding documents for sourcing the project contractor and supervising
consultant, and binding clauses should also be included in the subsequent contracts to ensure compliance.

 Accident and Incident Reporting
The supervising consultant and contractor shall ensure reporting of any serious and severe incidents to MWE
within 24 hours of their occurrence while MWE will ensure similar reporting to the World Bank within 48 hours
of their occurrence. The Safety Officer shall fill relevant incident and accident forms. Accidents shall also be
reported to the Police.
 Reporting Channels on SGBV/SEA-SH
During implementation, the contractor shall follow guidelines on where and how to report SGVB/SEA-SH
incidents and breaches. The ESS team will track, record, report and manage all GBV/SEA related incidents
(breaches). All reports on GBV/SEA-SH shall indicate BY WHO, TO WHOM, WHAT, WHEN and TARGET /
ACHIEVEMENTS. It is essential that the confidentiality and safety of victims and/or survivors will (must) be
protected.
FORMANT / ISSUES TO REPORT BY WHO TO WHOM WHEN

The project will track and report severe GBV/SEA-SH Social MWE (who As soon as
incidents, breaches and allegations, by clearly establishing the Safeguards can then becomes
following: officer / GRM report to bank) known
 Keep record of all incidents (GBV/SEA-SH Register) (Tracking is
 Nature of the case; done
 Location; age, sex of victims and/or survivors; continuously /
 Perpetrators sex, relationship to victim / survivor; origin daily)
 Project-related (Yes / No)
 Whether the victims and/or survivor were referred to
services.
 Any other resolution of matter done
The GBV Service Provider (contracted to project) shall ensure GBV Service Contractor & Monthly
continuous monthly reporting is done on following: provider (e.g. MWE
 Total number of GBV/SEA-SH cases received / referred, CBO, NGO)
disaggregated by age and by sex; location, date of
occurrence, referral status
 The number of cases open, closed cases, and average
time they have been open / closed
 Summary data on perpetrators (location, relation to
victims and/or survivors), date of occurrences
The contractor (through a designated officer e.g. Supervising Contractor MWE Monthly /
Engineer) shall prepare a Status Report on GBV/SEA-SH. Quarterly
Specifically, the report shall highlight the following issues:
 Progress on Key Indicators on GBV/SEA-SH showing
Planned and Achieved Target)
 GBV /SEA-SH Incident Register (Excel file)
 Training done (total number of participants – workers,
local leaders, community actors)

 Community awareness meetings done on GBV/SEA-SH

prevention and response / reporting and community
feedback (minutes of the community meetings can also
be shared)
 Performance of GRM- how correctly for receiving and
resolving complaints; GRM indictors
 Status on appropriate mechanism to resolve GBV/SEA-
SH complaints
The MWE as an implementing Agency (IA) shall prepare MWE World Bank Monthly /
status reports on GBV/SEA-SH and report to World Bank. Quarterly
If the aggrieved party is satisfied, the matter shall be closed and signed off with them in the complaints log book
(Annex 10). The grievances on GBV, VAC, sexual harassment, among others that result into body injuries,
shall be referred to nearby health centre facilities. However, in case of criminal cases, grievances on GBV,
VAC, sexual harassment, among others, shall be immediately referred to Police (in respective cells) for
statutory investigations and management in accordance with Uganda’s legal system.
Therefore, in a formal reporting, the following procedure will be undertaken using the report form;
 Getting the details of the Victim of GBV by GBV focal person
 Documenting the details of the Case
 Preparing witnesses to engage other Legal Actors like the Police
 Establishing the appropriate procedure including the need to for medical examination of the victim and
the perpetuator
 Producing a comprehensive report to enable duty bearers assess and take appropriate actions
 Submitting the report to Duty Bearers like Uganda Police, State Attorneys and Courts
 Follow up of GBV Cases and victims to ensure appropriate services are accessed by the Victim
9.4.4 Environmental and Social Management Plan Reviews
The ESMP is a living document subject to similar influences and changes from variations to the provisions of
the project specifications. It will be reviewed at an interval of not more than 6 months in order to identify any
required amendments. The review shall be informed by changing project implementation conditions as
observed by the either the client, contractor, funding agency, supervising consultant or any other stakeholder.
9.4.5 Environmental and Social Compliance Audit
MWE will take the responsibility to fulfil the requirements for an Environmental and Social audit, not less than
12 nor more than 36 months after project completion or commencement of operations respectively in line with
the National Environment Act No 5 of 2019 and the National Environment (Audit) Regulation 2020.

9.4.6 Approval of the ESMP Activities
Implementation of ESMP activities will be approved by MWE and safeguards compliance will be one of the
basis for payment. Final payment for the contractor shall be tagged to successful restoration of all disturbed
areas and clean-up of all construction sites.
9.4.7 Enforcement of Compliance
The supervising engineer must strictly supervise implementation of the ESMP and where there are breaches,
the supervising engineer should issue written instructions, cautions and warnings as applicable. Where the
contractor fails to comply, contractual clauses should be invoked, and penalties or fines effected. If necessary,
the civil works can be suspended if the contractor repeatedly fails to adhere to instructions. MWE should
penalize the supervising consultant if he fails to supervise and enforce ESMP implementation by the contractor.
9.5 Operation Phase Monitoring
9.5.1 Water Supply Plan
Monitoring during the operations phase shall mainly consist of observing the Source catchment area, withdraw
rates from the boreholes and trends of use. The sanitation component shall also require monitoring disposal
efficacy, rates of facility management, changes in user profiles and maintenance schedules. MWE should
develop, implement, and maintain a water safety plan taking into consideration the potential risks to the safety
of the water from the supply catchment area to the consumer. A water safety plan should consist of three key
components:
a) System assessment to determine whether the drinking-water supply chain (up to the point
of consumption) as a whole can deliver water of a quality that meets health-based targets;
b) Identifying control measures in a drinking water system that will collectively control identified
risks and ensure that the health-based targets are met; and
c) Management plans describing actions to be taken during normal operation or incident

conditions and documenting the system assessment (including upgrade and improvement),
monitoring and communication plans and supporting programmes.
d) Water quality testing regime to ensure portable water meets national and international
standards
9.5.2 Monitoring operational sanitation Facilities
Constructed institutional facilities shall be monitored to ensure operational efficiency. MWE, Lamwo District
Local Government and Lokung Sub County shall perform monitoring on sanitation facilities established at
Pangira Primary School and Pangira Health Centre II. Monitoring shall focus on the following:
a) Integrity of Structures especially the building

b) Performance of floor slab (ability to channel urine into the squat hole).
c) Disposal of feacal sludge
d) Daily cleaning routine
e) Any other aspect identified by the team.
9.6 Roles and Responsibilities in ESMP Implementation
The overall implementation of the ESMP will rest with the Ministry of Water and Environment which shall
coordinate with NEMA to ensure that environmental and social safeguards are addressed effectively throughout
the lifecycle of the Project. NEMA may delegate some of its mandate to Lamwo District Environment Office
where project operations will take place. Other Sectoral Agencies with mandate on respective issues shall act
in the implementation of the ESMP. Table 9-2 below details institutional mandates.
Table 9.4: Institutions Mandates on the Project
Institution Mandate/ Responsibilities
Ministry of MWE will be responsible for the overall implementation of the Project ESMP. The Ministry may
Water and delegate some of its roles to the Supervising Consultant who will act on their behalf. The Ministry will
Environment hire Supervising Consultants who will perform day to day monitoring of environment and Social
(MWE) Safeguards Implementation on the project. The contractor procured by the ministry will recruit
competent safeguards personnel to implement the ESMP in accordance with the provisions of law
and world bank Environment and Social Standards.
However, to augment the capacity of the Project Coordination Team, it is proposed some short-term
technical assistance to back this capacity be provided for in the project.
National NEMA will review and if acceptable approve this environment and social impact assessment as well
Environment as undertake compliance monitoring as per the National Environment Act 2019 Section 9 and to
Management approve external environmental compliance audits as per the Environmental Audit Regulations
Authority (2020) section 19.
(NEMA)
The World The World Bank will be financing the project and is therefore expected to offer implementation
Bank support supervision to the project’s environmental and social performance through missions. The
World Bank will designate a safeguards team that can participate in safeguards missions.
Ministry of The resettlement process shall involve valuation and commutation of different rates for PAPs. The
Lands Chief Government Valuer will have to approve all forms of compensation
Housing and
Urban
Development

Institution Mandate/ Responsibilities
Department This will provide support in preserving the physical cultural resources within the project area and
of Museums managing any chance finds encountered.
and
Monuments,
Ministry of
Tourism,
Wildlife and
Antiquities
OSH The OHS Department will undertake registration of the construction site as well as participate in
Department, periodic supervision visits to assess and monitor management of occupational health and safety
Ministry of issues. The Department will also undertake checks on all equipment used by the contractor.
Gender,
Labour and
Social
Development
Lamwo Lamwo District Local Government through the various department shall perform monitoring roles
District Local (District Water Office, District Environment and Natural Resource Office, District Community
Government Development Office, District Labour Office among others).
Local The local council leaders in the project area will have a role on matters of helping the contractors
Councils in settle in the project area and to support identification of raw materials sources. They will be key in
Lokung aspects of labour identification and endorsements as well as safeguarding the cultural sites. The
local leaders will support law enforcement agencies in curbing crime during project implementation
9.6.1 Role of Supervising Consultant
The Supervising Consultant shall as a minimum have in their team an Environment Specialist and a Social
Specialist who will have overall responsibility of issuing guidance and instructions to the contractor including
review and approval of the contractor’s management plans. The Environmental Specialist and Social
Safeguards Specialist will work closely with MWE Safeguards Team in supervising the contractor. In addition,
the Supervising Consultant will conduct scheduled site supervisions to monitor state of safeguards compliance
as documented or executed by the Contractors. The Supervising Consultant will have obligation to also oversee
compliance and observation of environment, safety, health and social requirements alongside other cross-
cutting issues in the project.
9.6.2 Roles of Contractor During Project Implementation
During the construction phase, MWE will engage contractors to undertake the civil works and O&M tasks for
the project respectively. Contractors will be responsible for complying with all relevant legislation and adhere
to all mitigation measures specified in the ESMMP including the NEMA conditions of approval. MWE will
therefore ensure compliance with mitigation measures under contractual obligations. The contractors will be
obliged to commit resources to ensure implementation of obligations in the contract through hiring qualified

Safeguards personnel to operationalize the environmental and social requirements in the ESMP and supporting
documentation.
9.6.3 Key Human Resource Requirement for ESMP Implementation
Table 9.5: Key Human Resource Requirements
Stakeholder Personnel required
Ministry of Water and Project Support Team (PST) Specialists

Environment
Water Engineer
Sociologist
Environmental Health Officer
Health and Safety Officer
Project Contractor Site Engineer
Site Supervisor
Site Foreman
Environmental Officer
Sociologist
Health & Safety Officer & Site Nurse
O&M Contractor Environmental Officer
Sociologist
Grievance Management Officer
Lamwo District Local District Natural Resources Officer

Government
District Environmental Officer
District Water Officer
District Engineer
District Community Development Officer

NEMA Regional Environment Officer
Ministry of Gender, Labour and Health and Safety Inspector supported by District Labour Officer
Social Development OHS
Department
NGO/ CBO Representative with skills in environmental management and conflict resolution
Department of Museums and Archaeologist

Monuments
9.7 Capacity Building
The goal of the IWMDP is to the maximum extent possible utilize existing institutional structures and capacity
within the MWE and the local government to implement the Project. In order to successfully implement the
ESMP, it is important to ensure that target groups and stakeholders are exposed to regular Environmental and
Social Safeguards capacity development.
The key institutions/group that require capacity development include:
a) Beneficiary Communities: There is a need to carry our training and awareness trainings for the key
community members on the safeguard’s aspects of the project. Further, they need to be facilitated to
enable them effectively monitor the ESMP implementation process.
b) Staff of the Lamwo District Local Government: The staff at the district level needs to be trained on key
aspects of the project. They also need to be facilitated to enable them effectively monitor the ESMP
implementation process.
There is a need for the project to foster inter institutional monitoring of the implementation of the project’s
ESMP. An inter-institutional monitoring committee should be formed, trained and their activities facilitated. A
capacity building plan should be developed after instituting an inter institutional monitoring committee.
9.8 Grievance Redress Mechanism
The contractor and operator of the project will be required to set up a proactive mechanism to manage project
related complaints and grievances in a less adversarial, less costly, quicker and participatory way, in line with
the IWMDP Grievance Management Guidelines (MWE 2021). The guidelines stipulate two separate grievance
redress mechanisms are put in place: 1) for handling community related grievances, and 2) for handling workers
related grievances. The guidelines were created to ensure consistent, formal and effective institutionalized
framework for easy submission of grievances as well as speedy and equitable resolution of grievances during
project implementation. The Project developer (MWE) shall ensure that different stakeholders receive effective
sensitizations and trainings on complaints and grievances redress mechanism for the project.

It should also be noted that at any stage, an aggrieved party may be free to use alternative redress including
existing legal processes in Uganda.
Effective grievance redress mechanism gives an opportunity to the organization to implement a set of specific
measures to ensure good governance accountability and transparency in managing and mitigation of
environmental and social issue of a particular project. The community grievance redress shall consist of
grievance committees and shall be formed at the community level, construction site, Sub County, District and
MWE. A separate GRM for workers shall also be formed at the Construction site.
Every aggrieved person shall be able to trigger this mechanism to quickly resolve their complaints. The
objectives of the grievance process are:
 Ensure that appropriate and mutually acceptable corrective actions are identified and implemented to
address complaints;
 Verify that complainants are satisfied with outcomes of corrective actions;
 Avoid the need to resort to judicial proceedings.
The project will operate two major grievance redress mechanisms, namely:
 Worker’s grievance redress mechanism, and

 Community grievance redress mechanism.
NB: In all cases, criminal matters shall be explicitly handled in accordance with the Criminal Code Act and other
laws governing criminal issues in Uganda.
9.8.1 Worker’s Grievance Redress Mechanism
Employee grievances may include:
a) Undesirable working conditions in physical terms.

b) Changes without prior notice.
c) Poor employee relations.
d) Improper wage adjustments.
e) Dissatisfactory office policies in case of: Promotion, Demotion, Leaves, Overtime
f) Violation of laws.
g) Inadequate safety, health, and welfare amenities.
h) Labour-management hostility.
i) Incidences of workplace favouritism and nepotism, among others.
9.8.1.1 Workers’ council
The project construction works shall employ over 100 workers. For better organisation and management of
workers’ grievances, this substantial number shall necessitate the establishment of a Workers’ Council. The
workers’ council shall consist of each category of workers organizing themselves and selecting male and female
representatives. These categories will include:

a) Casual workers
b) Drivers, Operators and Turn men
c) Flag Personnel
d) Site Cooks & Cleaners
e) Technical
f) Consultant Site Sociologist
For effective confidence building and confidentiality, the Consultant Site Sociologist shall be the secretary to
document and manage the grievance log, minutes, and writing workers’ council reports. The other members
will select a Chairperson and Vice Chairperson. The council shall meet at least once every week to ensure
timely management of workers’ issues.
Roles of Workers’ Council: With management support from the contractor, Supervising consultant and MWE,
the workers’ council shall play a significant role in proactive management of employer–employee relations,
workers’ welfare and grievances within the workplace. This council shall not interfere with either Management’s
authority or its obligation to manage their contracts but rather provides a formally recognized opportunity and
avenue for their grievances to be lodged and managed and their rights to be heard and respected. Workers’
Council shall:
(i) Provide a forum for consultation, frank exchange of information, discussion and joint problem solving
between management and employee representatives on issues pertaining to staff welfare, rights,
discipline; any proposed changes dealing with policies, procedures and working conditions.
(ii) Receive and report workers’ complaints/grievances to management and negotiate for timely redress/
participate in arbitration of cases between workers and management through disciplinary hearings
and / or between fellow workers through conflict resolution meetings
(iii) Represent the interests of workers pertaining to their terms and conditions of employment, staff
welfare, staff development and other matters of concern to the workers, and to negotiate with the
contractor’s management on their behalf accordingly.
(iv) Educate Workers on their rights, discipline, code of conduct, spirit of staff unity across the project as
well as on respect for cultural diversity pertaining to workers of different races, tribes, religion and
other cultural differences
(v) Regularly solicit for employees' suggestions/opinions to management through appropriate and
organized channels such as their representatives, suggestion box, or joint meetings from time to time.
(vi) Act as a point of contact between the employees and management; establish and maintain good
relations, foster effective two-way communication and mutual understanding between workers on one
hand, and with management on another.
(vii) Identify and represent concerns of special interest groups on the project such as women, expectant
and lactating mothers, workers with disability etc.
(viii) Organize and conduct monthly Workers’ GMC meetings to review and discuss staff welfare, discipline
and related matters; compile and share in timely manner meeting minutes with the contractor,
supervising consultant and MWE pointing to key action areas requiring attention.
(ix) Report any incident(s) of violation of workers’ rights, staff indiscipline and related issues to
management for redress

(x) Keep adequate log of all matters that come before the Workers’ GMC for better reference and
effective management
NB: Any appeals from the Workers’ Council shall be referred to the Site Disciplinary committee
9.8.1.2 Site disciplinary committee
A Site Disciplinary Committee comprising of the following members will be established to manage appeals from
workers’ council:
 Consultant’s Lead Sociologist (Chairperson)

 Contractor’s Human Resource Officer (Secretary)
 Chairperson of Workers’ Council
NB: The committee may adopt any other member deemed important depending on the issue being resolved.
The committee shall meet at least twice every month, during working hours based on a meeting schedule prior
agreed with project Management (contractor and supervising consultant). A special meeting, if required, may
be held at the call of the Chairperson at short notice in consultation with the project management. The site
disciplinary committee shall ensure fairness and make recommendations to the Contract Manager on the
appropriate course of action.
NB: Any resulting appeal against recommendations from the Site Disciplinary committee shall be escalated to
MWE through the Resident engineer for overall guidance and more appropriate actions. MWE may involve
mandated offices including Labour Officers, Labour Unions, among others to conclude the emerging labour
issues.
9.8.1.3 Stages of handling workers’ grievances
Option 1: Informal discussion: If workers have a grievance or complaint regarding their work, they shall,
wherever possible, raise their concern with a supervisor or manager as it may be possible to find a solution
informally. This shall make it more likely that disputes can be resolved quickly, closer to the source of the
problem, making it less likely that the issue escalates into an intractable problem. Nonetheless, the issue and
response shall still be logged and tracked from the perspectives of checking outcomes and monitoring.
Option 2: Formal complaint: If the grievance is not resolved informally, the aggrieved shall proceed to resort
to the formal grievance redress mechanisms, following the following steps;
Step 1: Lodging the compliant to workers’ council
If the matter is serious and/or the worker wishes to raise the matter formally, the worker shall set out the facts
of the grievance in writing to the committee, with support and guidance from the section representative who
then forwards the complaint to the secretary. The secretary then records the complaint in the log book and
notifies the chairperson. Alternatively, the worker may raise complaint through suggestion boxes, phone calls,
text messages or email to the secretary (Consultant’s Site Sociologist).
Step 2: Assessment of compliant and investigation by workers’ council within 5 days

On receipt of the complaint, the secretary shall make further investigations and in consultation with Chairperson
shall schedule for a meeting (depending on the urgency of the complaint) to assess the complaint and
determine the corrective action. The assessment shall also identify the key issues that have been raised,
together with any root causes, and shall determine the outcome that the worker is looking for from the process.
Any additional information shall be gathered to allow a full assessment. The appropriate form of investigation
will depend on the type of complaint and the seriousness of the allegation. In general terms, the committee
shall try to understand the key issues and interview the individuals involved in a complaint, e.g. those managing
the workers, or those responsible for the activity or service that is raised in the grievance. The workers council
shall conclude the issues or escalate the issues to the Disciplinary committee.
Concluded issues which require attention of management shall be communicated formally by the Secretary to
Contract Manager for action with a copy to the Resident Engineer. The issues which require escalation shall
be referred to the Secretary of the Site Disciplinary committee (Contractor’s Human Resource Officer).
Step 3: Determination of corrective action by disciplinary committee within 7 days
A disciplinary committee shall then hold hearings, and invite both the offender and the offended. The disciplinary
committee shall give fair hearing to anyone suspected as offender in order to make fair judgment guided by the
Workers’ Code of Conduct. On assessment of the complaint and judgement derived from hearings convened
for complaints of disciplinary nature, the GMC will advise / recommend to the contractor’s management in
writing on the appropriate course of action to be taken against the suspected offender. The submission shall
be made by the Chairperson to Contract Manager with a copy to the Resident Engineer.
Step 3: Feedback from the affected parties
The contractor or worker shall give feedback to the GRC on the implementation of the Committee
recommendation and this shall be recorded in the log book.
Step 5: Appealing to MWE against the verdict of the disciplinary committee
Any issues that require escalation beyond disciplinary committee shall be referred to MWE. The issues shall
be referred by the Resident Engineer and addressed to Permanent secretary of MWE with attention to the
Social Development Specialist. Upon case receipt, the project management team shall review and handle the
matter within 10 days. The team shall comprise at the minimum the following:
 Project Engineer (Chairperson)

 Social Development Specialist (Secretary)
 Environment Specialist
 Communication Specialist
In the event that the team finds a valid case, it would then revisit the process of investigation in consultation
with the District Labour Office and/or any other relevant office/ agency. The steps of the worker’s grievance
management process are illustrated in Figure 9.1.

9.8.1.4 Community Grievance Redress Mechanism
During construction works, anticipated complaints are mainly of two categories; criminal and civil. Criminal
grievances e.g. theft, Gender Based Violence and Violence against children shall be immediately referred to
Uganda Police for statutory investigations and management in accordance with Uganda’s legal system. Civil
related grievances include complaints that require civil understanding and settlement. These shall be handled
with guidance from the following:
9.8.2 Grievance management structure
The grievance management structure will be anchored to institutionalize the decentralized setting of the Local
Government system. Hence committees shall be established at Sub County and District level to manage
grievances. The key components of the grievance management structure will include the following:
 Complaints and grievances desk

 Grievances management committee at project site level, sub-counties/ town councils and district levels
 Appeals procedure
 Communication protocols and feedback
9.8.2.1 Common civil related grievances in construction projects
Considering the nature and extent of works, grievances may arise especially during the construction phase of
the project and these include;
a) Land requirements especially where a realignment is sought, alternative access where a road has been
closed due to ongoing works like on a swamp or river crossing, workers camp and material storage
areas
b) Clearance of right of way which may affect crops and trees
c) Temporary displacement of road side activities in urban centres, including vendors
d) Complaints related to noise, dust, and traffic incidents
e) Complaints on workers behaviour or conduct specially towards women, girl and boy children
f) Illicit behaviours like alcoholism, smoking, drug abuse etc. of the contractor’s workers
g) Disruption of social set up and security
h) Disputes on compensation values
i) Increased pressure on social services and infrastructure, including water supply
j) Contractor failure to pay workers and suppliers
k) Accidents arising out of contractor’s negligence to provide necessary information, protective gears and
supervision.

Figure 9.1: Workers’ grievance management process flow chart
9.8.2.2 Complaints and grievances desk
This will be the secretariat for grievances management hosted within the GRC at project site level, Contractor’s
Sociologist for Site GRC, CDO for Sub-county GRC, District CDO for District GRC and Social Development
Specialist for MWE GRC. This will be dedicated office assigned the responsibility of receiving, registering, and
screening, assessing and following up complaints and grievances to their conclusion. Specific capacity building
will be delivered by MWE to these secretariats to ensure that they perform their roles effectively.
9.8.2.3 The Grievance Management Committees for community grievances (GMC)
Dedicated Grievance Committees will be established to manage grievances during project implementation. The
committees will be set up in a manner that brings political leadership and technical teams so that any resultant

agreements are politically acceptable and technically compliant. The grievances management committees shall
be formed at water user committee level, project site level, Sub-county, District and MWE level.
Committee 1: Water user committee - to handle within 3 days upon receipt of Grievance
The water user committees shall be the first step for community grievance management. The committees shall
include at least 11 members including Chairperson, Vice Chairperson, Secretary, other Members (7) including
a youth, Elderly Person, PWD and at least 3 members should be female. Quorum sitting shall be of at least five
(5 members). The LC I Chairpersons and Vice Chairpersons will be ex-officials to these committees. Any
grievances that are not resolved at this level shall be escalated to the project site level.
Committee 2: Site GMC for Community Grievances with 5 days upon receipt of Grievance
The GMC at site level shall include the following:
 Resident Engineer- Chair Person

 Site Engineer
 Contractor’s Sociologist
 Contractor’s Health and Safety Officer
 Consultant’s Site Sociologist- Secretary
 Consultant’s Site Environmentalist
For timely management of community level complaints, the Contractors shall have a grievance desk at the site.
Under the supervision of the consultant Site Sociologist, the contractor shall make immediate responses to
matters related to the road construction, contractor’s workers, agents, sub-contractors or suppliers. Unresolved
matters by the contractors shall be escalated or referred to the Sub-county level.
Committee 3: GMC at Sub-county Level - to handle with 5 days upon receipt of Grievance
The Sub-county grievance management committee shall include the following members:
 LC III Chairperson/ Mayor (Chairperson)

 SAS/ Town clerk
 Sub-county Water Officer
 Sub-county Health Assistant
 Community Development Officer (Secretary)
 Parish Chief where the grievances originated
 Representative of the PAPs
Committee 4: GMC at District Level- to handle with 5 days upon receipt of Grievance
At the District Level, the Grievances Management Committee shall consist of:
 LC V Chairperson (Chairman)
 Chief Administrative Officer
 District Water Officer

 District Health Inspector

 District Community Development Officer (Secretary)
 Representative from the PAPs
 District Lands officer
 Any other Officer that the CAO deems fit to fast track the grievance redress process.
Committee 5: GMC at Ministry/ NWSC Level to handle with 3 days upon receipt of Grievance
At Ministry of Water and Environment the Permanent Secretary shall take administrative charge of all referred
complaints/grievances. The Social Development Specialist shall be the focal person for grievance handling at
the Ministry.
9.8.2.4 Capacity Building for the Grievances Management Committees
The MWE shall orient and train the committees in their responsibilities. In the execution of their responsibilities,
the respective committees will seek support and advice from any other relevant official (s) from time to time
depending on the matter being handled.
9.8.2.5 Appeals Procedure
At each committee level where the complainant is dissatisfied with the outcome of the negotiation or
implementation of agreed upon actions, he/she shall be advised to lodge an appeal to be handled at a higher
level within 14 days. This procedure shall be followed until all resolution levels.
9.8.2.6 Process of handling community grievances
Step 1: Receipt of complaint
The grievance management committees at all levels will have one person to act as the grievance officer. A
verbal or written complaint from a complainant will be received by the grievance officer and recorded in a
grievance log that is kept in the community at each Grievance management level. Complaints can be submitted
at any time, either directly or through a grievance handling committee member. Some can also be submitted
by word of mouth or through telephone, SMS or emails.
At water user committee level, which is the first level of community grievance management, the secretary shall
register the complaint, screen it and handle it if possible or;
i. Refer to the grievance management committee for further investigations, or

(ii) Refer to police if the grievance is of criminal nature for example assaults, rapes, defilements, theft etc.
If the aggrieved party is satisfied, the matter shall be closed and signed off with them in the complaints
log book.
This committee shall sit at least every two weeks to investigate and conduct hearings, outcomes of which will
be given to the complainant within 24hrs. If the complainant agrees and is satisfied with the decision taken, the
matter shall be closed and signed off in the complaints log book. If the party is not satisfied, the matter shall be
referred to the site committee in Step 2.

Step 2: Escalation of Grievances to Construction Site Grievance management committee
The site GMC shall receive and register the grievances by the Contractor’s Sociologist. The Consultant Site
Sociologist will then review the register and recommend to the Chairperson the schedule for GMC meeting.
The affected person (s) shall be involved in GMC hearings so that conclusive solutions are arrived at. Once
completed, the affected person shall sign in the grievance register if satisfied and if not satisfied with outcome,
he/ she or the Site committee will escalate to Sub-county within 7 days.
NB: At the Site level, the Resident Engineer shall update MWE on grievances management and emerging
issues which might require immediate or explicit action or support from MWE to expedite project
implementation.
Step 3: Escalation of Grievances to Sub-county Grievance management committee
The Sub-county shall have a grievance management desk. The Community Development Officer shall be the
Grievance officer responsible for recording all grievances at this level. Member of the committee shall include;
the L.C III Chairperson, SAS, CDO and any other person deemed relevant by the L.C III Chairperson. Where
the Sub-county receives grievances directly from the community, the issues will be referred to Construction site
for action. If necessary, the complainant and LC1 chairperson of their village shall be invited to attend the
hearing.
If the complainant is satisfied with the decision at this level, he/she shall be informed of the outcome within
24hrs and the matter shall be closed off and signed in the grievance log book. If the complainant is not satisfied,
the matter shall be referred to the District Grievance management committee.
NB: At the Sub-county level, the SAS shall update CAO grievances management and emerging issues which
might require immediate or explicit action or support from District expedite project implementation.
Step 4: Escalation of Grievances to District Grievance management committee
In the event that a complainant is not satisfied with the decision made by the Sub-county committee or the
committee fails to resolve it, it shall be referred to the District Grievance management committee. This
committee shall be chaired by the LCV Chairperson and members will include the CAO, RDC, District Land
officer, District Community Development Officer, District Water Officer/ Project focal person and any other
persons deemed relevant by the chairperson. At district level, the District Community Development Officer shall
be responsible for receiving and recording the grievance in the log book. On receipt, he will screen the grievance
and handle it if possible. If not, he will notify the committee chairperson who shall convene a meeting/ hearing
within one week, the outcome of which shall be communicated to the aggrieved person within 24hrs. If the
complainant is satisfied with the outcome, the matter shall be signed off in the log book. If the aggrieved is not
satisfied, the matter shall be referred to the Ministry of Water and Environment as step 4.
NB: At the District level, the CAO shall update MWE on grievances management and emerging issues which
might require immediate or explicit action or support from MWE to expedite project implementation.

Step 5: Escalation of Grievances to MWE Grievances Management Committee
At the Ministry of Water and Environment, referrals shall be registered in a complaint log book by the Social
Development Specialist. Within 2 weeks, the MWE committee shall investigate and if necessary, conduct site
visits and conclude the issue.
If the complainant is satisfied with the decision, the matter shall be signed off in the complaints log book with
consent of the complainant. The Ministry shall, in form of reports, also report to the World Bank on the
complaints handled and the outcomes of the same.
In the event that the matter has not been solved at this level, MWE may advise the complainant to seek further
justice from alternative offices like courts of law or any other Government agencies.
The steps of the grievance management process are illustrated in Figure 9.2.
9.8.3 The World Bank’s Grievance Redress Service (GRS)
The WB GRS provides an avenue for individuals and communities to submit complains directly to the World
Bank if on their opinion a World Bank financed project has or is likely to cause harm to communities and the
environment which in turn may have adverse effects to them or the community. The GRS seeks to ensure that
grievances are promptly reviewed and responded to, and problems and solutions identified by working together.
The GRS acknowledges the project-level grievance mechanisms as the primary tools for raising and addressing
project-related grievances. The GRS helps to resolve issues that cannot be resolved at the project level or
where there is no project-level grievance mechanism.

Figure 9.2: Community grievance management process flow chart
How to submit a complaint: The GRS accepts complaints in English or in the language of the complainants.
The channels for submission include the following:
i) The World Bank – Uganda Country Office
Rwenzori House, 1 Lumumba Avenue,

P.O. Box 4463, Kampala, Uganda
+256 414 230 094
Email: [email protected]

ii) Complainants may use the form on the GRS website available at www.worldbank.org/grs
iii) Submissions to the GRS may also be sent by: Email: [email protected]
Instructions to submit procurement related complaints can be found on the GRS website.
iv) Letter can be sent to:
The World Bank Grievance Redress Service (GRS)

MSN MC 10-1018 1818 H St. NW
Washington, DC 20433, USA
Complaints should:
 Include the names of complainant(s) (or their representatives) and state if confidentiality is requested;
 Identify the project that is the subject of the complaint
Describe the harm complainants believe is caused or may be caused by the project

10 KEY RECOMMENDATIONS AND CONCLUSIONS

10.1 Conclusions
The proposed water supply and sanitation project in Lokung Sub County, Lamwo District will certainly enhance
socioeconomic development in the project area. The project design and operations shall benefit a range of
project beneficiaries within the Pangira RGC. The no project scenario would see continuation of the hardships
faced by residents of Pangira RCG who are in severe need of clean and safe water, and existing sources are
not enough to serve the increasing population and, in some cases, not protected. The benefits to the local
economy will be in addition to reduced morbidity, increased enrolment of children in educational institutions,
increased productivity of households and reduced incidences of domestic violence. The positive outcomes of
implementing the project will infer positive change to the climate change, gender, health and educational
vulnerabilities associated to water supply in the area. Improved water availability in the community and
construction of sanitation facilities are meant to unlock the vicious cycle of the spread of disease and low
productivity in the area. The project will hence entail accelerated development with key milestones in education,
health, settlement and agro production among others being anticipated. Access to water and improvements in
sanitation will come with greater gender benefits, women and girls will realize improved hygiene and hence
productivity in all sectors. Participation in decision making and support to family livelihood strategies will be
added benefits.
The key negative impacts that will arise during the construction phase include influx of immigrants, labour land
acquisition that will trigger displacement of livelihood activities and road crossings. Compensation and
community health and safety are the key fears raised by the communities. Land acquisition and resettlement
impacts and risks are expected to be managed through preparation and implementation of a Resettlement
Action Plan. The transmission and distribution lines are expected to mainly utilize the road reserves which will
significantly minimize resettlement risks. Road crossings of the transmission line especially within Pagada
trading centre are expected to pose traffic safety risks but implementation of a robust Traffic Management Plan
will address such impacts. The ESMP emphasizes the need to immediately restore excavated/ disturbed areas
as soon as the pipes have been laid. In general, all potential major impacts can be effectively mitigated. The
level of impacts shall be moderated by the fact that the projects are linear impacting a narrow corridor through
largely modified flat landscapes. Important negative impacts triggered by the project and have received
attention in this ESIA that if not well mitigated may encumber project sustainability include social ills of
construction labour, gender impacts, occupational health and safety and land take and expropriation of land
and properties thereon. Other less critical impacts will be on management of pit latrine sludge, increased runoff
and erosion at worksites, construction waste among others. Based on the assessment contained in this
document, most the anticipated negative impacts will be reversible, localized, short-term and can be mitigated
through implementation of an Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan. With a strong
environment and social safeguards team in place and a responsive contractor implementation of mitigation
measures contained in here and further as demanded from time to time by regulatory agencies and MWE, the
project will remain largely sustainable.
The project is an intervention of the Central government (MWE) with support from the World Bank that will
require collective action from stakeholders such as the Local government and regional actors in the WASH

sector for its effective implementation. The critical aspect is meaningful stakeholder mobilization and
engagement as well as recruitment of an experienced team to manage the safeguards risks. MWE will spear
head the supervision of the construction contractor and the operator to ensure negative impacts from the project
are minimised. This should entail among others, undertaking of annual audits following provisions of the ESMP
to ensure continuous improvement of the project’s processes and products. MWE should use its vast
experience in implementing similar water supply projects to effectively manage these potential risks.
10.2 Recommendations
Based on the results of the ESIA, the team recommends the approval of the proposed project and its
components for implementation on condition that the recommended mitigating measures are implemented, and
as any other stakeholders may recommend in the course of review of this report or following an audit. The team
further recommends that the following be undertaken during the course of project implementation:
a) The distribution line should be extended to provide water supply to the areas hosting the water sources.
This is aimed at promoting social equity and sustainability of the project;
b) The Contractor should develop and implement a Contractor ESMP for the project’s construction phase,
encompassing the auxiliary footprint;
c) Construction material for the project should be sourced from legally authorised sites;
d) Extension of the hydroelectric power lines at the water source sites should strictly follow the access
route alignment to ensure that the set-out land requirements suffice; and
e) The contractor shall be required to produce a Contractor’s Environment and Social Management Plan
(C-ECMP) before commencement of project operations.
f) All infrastructure servicing the project especially power lines follow the same corridor as the
transmission mains.
g) An annual audit is performed on all project components not less than 12 nor more than 36 months after
project completion or commencement of operations respectively.

REFERENCES
Andrew Reid 2016, Constructing History in Uganda, UCL
Anywar, R.S. (1948) Acholi KiKer Megi: The life of Kwot Ibrahim Awic (translated by J. V Wild U.J) Volume XII.
Bennun, L. A. and P. Njoroge (1996). Birds to watch in East Africa: a preliminary red data list. Research Reports of the
Centre for Biodiversity, National Museums of Kenya: Ornithology 23:1–16.
Benson Okello (2015). The Socio-Political History of the Langi of Uganda, 1750 To 1909
Bere (1947). 'An Outline of Acholi History'. The Uganda Journal. 2: 1-8.
Charles Amone, Okullu Muura (2013) British Colonialism and the Creation of Acholi Ethnic Identity in Uganda, 1894 to
1962. The journal of imperial and common wealth history
CITES Appendix II of the IUCN Red Category, 2019.
Child Poverty and Deprivation in Refugee-Hosting Areas Evidence from Uganda

https://www.poverty.ac.uk/sites/default/files/attachments/ChildPoverty-and-Deprivation-in-Refugee-Hosting-Areas-
Uganda.pdf
Cronk, Q.Cs. and Fuller, J.L. 1995. Plant Invaders: The Threat to Natural Ecosystems. Chapman and Hall, London.
Daubenmire, Rexford. 1959. A Canopy-coverage method of vegetation analysis. Northwest Science 33:43-64.
Davenport, T.R.B. 1993. The Butterflies of Uganda - An Annotated Checklist. Uganda Forest Department, Kampala,
Uganda.
Delany, M.J. 1975. The Rodents of Uganda. British Natural History Museum, London.
De Kiewet Hemphill et al (1963) Asians in East Africa. Oxford
Drewes R. C., Howell, K & Spawls, S, (2006). Pocket Guide to the Reptiles and Amphibians of East Africa.
Bloomsbury Publishing Plc ISBN: 9780713674255.
Environment & Social Framework for IPF Operations, ESS8: Cultural Heritage
Heyer, W.R., Donnely, M.A., Mc Diarmid, R.W., Hayek L.C., and Foster M.S. (Eds.). (1994). Measuring and Monitoring
Biological Diversity: Standard Methods for Reptiles and Amphibians. Smithsonian Institution Pr Channing. A, (2001).
Amphibians of Central and Southern Africa. Cornell University Press, Ithaca, New York.
IUCN/SSC, (2003). USGS Press Release, Dec 3rd 2002 shedding Light on Amphibian declines. Newsletter of the
Declining Amphibian population Task force. Issue no.55. Feb 2003.
J. P’Bitek Okot (1963) Oral literature and its social background among the Acholi and Lango. St. Peters College Oxford.
Jimenez Cisneros BE, Oki T, Arnell NW, Benito G, Cogley JG, et al. 2014. Freshwater resources. In Climate Change
2014: Impacts, Adaptation, and Vulnerability, Part A: Global and Sectoral Aspects (Working Group II Contribution to the
Fifth Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change), ed.CB Field, VR Barros, DJ Dokken, KJ
Mach, MD Mastrandrea, et al., pp. 229–69. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge Univ. Press

Kati, V.I. & Sekercioğlu, C.H. (2006). Diversity, ecological structure, and conservation of the landbird community
of Dadia reserve, Greece. Diversity and Distributions, 12, 620-629.
Kinyera, Okeny et al (2020). Critical analysis of archaeological research trends in Uganda: 1920-2018. 12. 14-27.
10.5897/AJHC2019.0459.
Kiyaga-Mulindwa, D. (2004). The archaeology of the riverine environments of the Upper Nile valley in Uganda. In F.
Chami and G, Pwiti and Radimilahy (eds.). The African Archaeology Network: Reports and Review, 4: 38-56.
Pomeroy, D. (1992). Counting birds. A guide to assessing numbers, biomass and diversity of Afrotropical birds. AWF
technical handbook series. pp 393-408.
Magurran, A.E., 1988. Ecological diversity and its measurements. Princeton, NJ, Princeton University press.
Odum, E. P. (1985) Trends expected in stressed ecosystems. Bioscience 35, 419-422
Schiotz, A. (1972): “The Treefrogs of Eastern Africa”. Spolia zool. Mus. Haun. 25: 1-346.
Thomas, C.D., Jordana, D., Lewis, O.T., Hill, J.K., Sutcliffe, O.L. & Thomas, J.A. (1998). Butterfly distributional patterns,
processes and conservation. (In) Mace, G.M., Balmford, A. & Ginsberg, J.R. (eds.), Conservation in a changing world.
Cambridge University Press. pp 107–138.
Thorn, E., and Kerbis, P.J. (2009). Small Mammals of Uganda. Bonner zoologische. monographien Nr. 55: 1-
90 Editor: Karl-L. Schuchmann.

APPENDICES
Appendix 1; NEMA Approval of ToR



Appendix 2: Project Layout drawings

Appendix 3: Water Supply Design Parameters

Test Pump Yield (m3/hr) 18.00 30.0
Borehole Yield to be Used (m3/hr) 18.00 30.00
Hours of Pumping (hr) 8.0 8.0
Efficiency Pump (%) 60.0% 60.0%
Efficiency Motor (%) 80.0% 80.0%
Total Daily Delivery (m3/day) 144 240
Pumping Main Section No. 01 (From Pump Installation Point to Ground Level at Borehole)
Pump Installation Depth in Borehole (m BGL) 75.000 75.000
Cwh 140 140
Pipe Details OD90 HDPE PN10 OD110 HDPE PN10
Flow in Pipe (m3/hr) 18.000 30.000
Flow in Pipe (m3/s) 0.005 0.008
Total Headloss in Section 01 (m) 1.2 1.1
Pumping Main Section No. 02 (From Ground Level at Borehole toInlet Level at WTP)
Ground Level at WTP (m AMSL) 992.150 992.150
Cwh 140 140
Flow through pipe section 02 (m3/hr) 18.000 30.000
Flow through pipe section 02 (m3/s) 0.005 0.008
Chainage at WTP 0+060 0+020
Chainage at Borehole 0+000 0+000
Total Headloss in Section 02 (m) 1 0
Total Pumping Head from Borehole to Reservoir

Appendix 4: Equipment and Materials

Appendix 5: Water Quality Test Certificates

Pagada A water Quality Results

Pagada B Water Quality Results

Appendix 6: Flora species encountered in the assessment

Family Species Name Life Form IUCN Status
Fabaceae Acacia hockii Shrub LC
Moringaceae Moringa oleifera Shrub LC
Fabaceae Acacia senegalensis Shrub LC
Mimosaceae Acacia sieberiana Shrub LC
Fabaceae Albizia coriaria Shrub LC
Fabaceae Albizia zygia Shrub LC
Amaranthaceae Amaranthus spinosus Herb LC
Meliaceae Azadirachta indica Tree LC
Asteraceae Bidens pilosa Forb LC
Poaceae Bracharia jubata Grass LC
Poaceae Brachiaria decumbens Grass LC
Poaceae Brassica carinata Grass LC
Poaceae Brassica elongate Grass LC
Brassicaceae Brassica oleracea Grass LC
Commelinaceae Commelina benghalensis Herb LC
Euphorbiaceae Croton macrostachyus Tree LC
Poaceae Cynodon dactylon Grass LC
Cyperaceae Cyperus rotundus Sedge LC
Poaceae Digitaria abyssinica Grass LC
Poaceae Digitaria longiflora Grass LC
Poaceae Echinochloa colona Grass LC
Poaceae Eleusine coracana Grass LC
Poaceae Eleusine indica Grass LC
Poaceae Eragrostis curvula Grass LC
Fabaceae Erythrina abyssinica Shrub LC
Moraceae Ficus exasperata Tree LC
Moraceae Ficus natalensis Tree LC
Moraceae Ficus Sycomorus Tree LC
Poaceae Hyparrhenia rufa Grass LC
Poaceae Hyparthelia dissoulta Grass LC
Anacardiaceae Mangifera indica Tree LC
Bignoniaceae Markhamia lutea Tree LC
Moringaceae Moringa Oleifera Tree LC
Lamiaceae Ocimum gratissimum Herb LC
Poaceae Panicum maximum Grass LC
Poaceae Panicum trichocladum Grass LC
Poaceae Pennisetum purpureum Grass LC
Lauraceae Persea americana Fruit LC
Myrtaceae Psidium guajava Fruit LC
Euphorbiaceae Ricinus communis Shrub LC


Fabaceae Senna siamea Herb LC
Fabaceae Senna spectabilis Herb LC
Solanaceae Solanum incanum Herb LC
Solanaceae Solanum nigrum Herb LC
Fabaceae Vachellia sieberiana Shrub LC
Asteraceae Vernonia amygdalina Shrub LC
Rhamnaceae Ziziphus abyssinica Shrub LC
Commelinaceae Commelina diffusa Herb LC
Capparaceae Crateva andasonia Shrub LC
Euphorbiaceae Croton macrostachyus Tree LC
Cucurbitaceae Cucurbita maxima Forb LC
Poaceae Cynodon dactylon Grass LC
Cyperaceae Cyperus rotundus Sedge LC
Poaceae Digitaria abyssinica Grass LC
Poaceae Digitaria longiflora Grass LC
Dioscoreaceae Dioscorea cayennensis Tuber LC
Dioscoreaceae Dioscorea rotundata Sedge LC
Ebenaceae Diospyros abyssinica Shrub LC
Dracaenaceae Dracaena fragrans Herb LC
Dracaenaceae Dracaena steudneri Shrub LC
Dracaenaceae Dracaena triasciata Herb LC
Poaceae Echinochloa colona Grass LC
Poaceae Eleusine coracana Grass LC
Poaceae Eleusine indica Grass LC
Poaceae Eragrostis ciliaris Grass LC
Poaceae Eragrostis curvula Grass LC
Poaceae Eragrostis olivaceae Grass LC
Poaceae Eragrostis pilosa Grass LC
Poaceae Eragrostis sp Grass LC
Poaceae Eragrostis tenuifolia Grass LC
Fabaceae Erythrina abyssinica Shrub LC
Myrtaceae Eucalyptus grandis Tree LC
Moraceae Ficus exasperata Tree LC
Moraceae Ficus natalensis Tree LC
Moraceae Ficus sur Tree LC
Proteaceae Grevillea robusta Tree LC
Poaceae Hyparrhenia rufa Grass LC
Poaceae Hyparthelia dissoulta Grass LC
Poaceae Imperata cylindrica Grass LC
Verbenaceae Lantana camara Shrub LC
Poaceae Leersia hexandra Grass LC
Anacardiaceae Mangifera indica Tree LC


Bignoniaceae Markhamia lutea Tree LC
Meliaceae Melia azedarach Shrub LC
Fabaceae Mimosa pigra Shrub LC
Moringaceae Moringa Oleifera Tree LC
Musaceae Musa sapientum Fruit LC
Lamiaceae Ocimum gratissimum Herb LC
Poaceae Oryza glaberrima Grass LC
Oxalidaceae Oxalis latifolia Herb LC
Poaceae Panicum brevifolium Grass LC
Poaceae Panicum maximum Grass LC
Poaceae Panicum trichocladum Grass LC
Poaceae Pennisetum purpureum Grass LC
Lauraceae Persea americana Fruit LC
Arecaceae Phoenix reclinata Tree LC
Fabaceae Piliostigma thonningii Shrub LC
Pinaceae Pinus caribea Tree LC
Myrtaceae Psidium guagaja Fruit LC
Euphorbiaceae Ricinus communis Shrub LC
Poaceae Rottboellia cohinchinesis Grass LC
Fabaceae Senegalia senegal Shrub LC
Fabaceae Senna siamea Herb LC
Fabaceae Senna spectabilis Herb LC
Solanaceae Solanum Incanum Herb LC
Solanaceae Solanum nigrum Herb LC
Bignoniaceae Spathodea campanulata Tree LC
Poaceae Sporobolus pilifeus Grass LC
Fabaceae Vachellia sieberiana Shrub LC
Asteraceae Vernonia amygdalina Shrub LC
Asteraceae Xanthium strumaium Herb LC
Rhamnaceae Ziziphus abyssinica Shrub LC

Appendix 7: Avifauna Species List

Survey Points
COMMON SCIENTIFIC
NAME NAME
ATLAS No.
A10
A11
A12
A13
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
347 African     
Mourning Streptopelia
Dove decipiens
1144 Black Bishop Euplectes     
gierowii
138 Black Kite Milvus migrans  
1265 Black-and-    
Spermestes
white
bicolor
Mannikin
1230 Black-  
crowned Estrilda nonnula
Waxbill
27 Black-headed Ardea  
Heron melanocephala
1165 Black-headed Ploceus  
Weaver melanocephalus
355 Blue-spotted   
Wood Dove Turtur afer
1013 Bocage's Malaconotus 
Bush- Shrike bocagei
1266 Bronze Spermestes  
Mannikin cucullatus
732 Common Pycnonotus       
Bulbul barbatus
165 Common  
Quail Coturnix cotunix
376 Eastern 
Plantain-eater Crinifer zonurus
889 Grey-backed Camaroptera    
Camaroptera brachyuran
147 Grey Kestrel Falco   
ardosiaceus
1032 Grey-backed Lanius  
Fiscal excubitoroides
1207 Grey-headed   
Sparrow Passer griseus
51 Hadada Ibis Bostrychia 
hagedash
351 Laughing Streptopelia  
Dove senegalensis
36 Little Egret Egretta garzetta 
443 Little Swift   
affinis
Apus

Survey Points
COMMON SCIENTIFIC
NAME NAME
ATLAS No.
A10
A11
A12
A13
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
1172 Little Weaver Ploceus luteolus 
129 Lizard Kaupifalco   
Buzzard monogrammicus
934 Northern 
Black- Melaenornis 
Flycatcher edolioides
995 Pied wagtail Motacilla aguimp 
350 Red-eyed Streptopelia  
Dove semitorquata
346 Ring-necked Streptopelia  
Dove capicola
771 Sooty Chat Myrmecocichla   
nigra
459 Speckled  
Mousebird Colius striatus
869 Stout Cisticola Cisticola 
robustus
447 White-rumped  
Apus caffer
Swift
555 Yellow-   
Pogoniulus
throated
subsulphureus
Tinkerbird

Appendix 8: Record of stakeholder engagement

Consultations with the Lamwe CAO
The
CAO Lamwo district Mr. James Bedijo Okumu being consulted in his office.
The reconnaissance team during consultations at the CAO`s and Water office in Lamwo District respectively.

Consultations with the Chairperson Lokung Sub couunty
LC 3 Chairperson Hon. Thomas Onen giving his views during consultations in his office
Consultations at Lokung S/C Office in Lamwo District

A Consultative meeting with Pangira community members at Pagada Trading Centre
A Consultative meeting with Lokung Subcounty officials in the S/C hall

Some of the Consultation Lists









Appendix 9: Project Valuation certificate

Appendix 10: Receipt of 30% Administration fee on submission of the ESIS

Appendix 11: GRM FORMS

Village Level GRC Reporting Template

Subcounty Level GRC Reporting Template

District Level GRC Reporting Template

National Level GRC Reporting Template

Volume 5-2 (B) - ESIA For Pangira

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume 5-2 (B) - ESIA For Pangira

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume 5-2 (B) - ESIA For Pangira

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

REPUBLIC OF UGANDA

MINISTRY OF WATER AND ENVIRONMENT

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESMENT FOR THE

ENVIRONMENTAL & SOCIAL IMPACT STATEMENT

Ministry of water and Environment Pinnacle Enviro Consult

E-mail;[email protected] or [email protected] E-mail; [email protected]

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page ii IWMDP-MoWE

Proponent: MINISTRY OF WATER AND ENVIRONMENT

Project Number: P163782 Contract Number: MWE/CONS/21-22/00019

Document No: ESIA/0026/2023

Name Title Date; Document Revision

Authors Dr. Kijobo Paul Musali Team Leader/Environmental Specialist

Dennis Noah Higenyi Sociologist

Isah Kiti Nabide Hydrogeologist

Dr. Bernard Barasa Water/Wastewater Specialist

Percis Namukasa Biodiversity/ Ecology Expert

John Paul Magaya GIS Specialist

Ann Mary Kirabo Occupational Health and Safety Specialist

Clever Peter Tofayo Air Quality, Noise and Vibrations Specialist

Dr. John O. Kameri Environmental Management

Reviewer Dr. John O. Kameri Project Manager 12/04/2023

Approver Dr. Paul Kijobo Musali Team Leader 13/04/2023

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page iii IWMDP-MoWE

S/No Name Speciality

Other contributing specialists

S/No Name Specialty

1. Mildred Nassuna Sociologist

2. Willie Epalitai Socio-Economist

3. Joash Kalogoi Environmental Engineer

4. Frank Mugisha Soil and Water conservation

5. Emmanuel Eteni Environmentalist

6. Mercy Bwire Botanist

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page iv IWMDP-MoWE

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page v IWMDP-MoWE

KEY ESIA TEAM AND DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE

NEMA CERTIFIED AUDITORS

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page vi IWMDP-MoWE

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page vii IWMDP-MoWE

CONSULTING FIRM DECLARATION

John Kameri Ochoko (Ph.D)

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page viii IWMDP-MoWE

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page ix IWMDP-MoWE

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page x IWMDP-MoWE

2.5.2 Design of Public and Institutional Toilets ............................................................................................................................ 21

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xi IWMDP-MoWE

5 BIOPHYSICAL AND SOCIO-ECONOMIC BASELINE .................................................................................................................... 71

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xii IWMDP-MoWE

7.3.1 Central Sewerage System ................................................................................................................................................ 145

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xiii IWMDP-MoWE

9.3.3 Runoff and Erosion Control Plan ...................................................................................................................................... 176

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xiv IWMDP-MoWE

Appendix 10; Project Valuation certificate ...................................................................................................................................... 265

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xv IWMDP-MoWE

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xvi IWMDP-MoWE

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xvii IWMDP-MoWE

Table 7.2: Option 2- Power Consumption Costs ....................................................................................................................................... 144

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xviii IWMDP-MoWE

Pinnacle Integrated Resources (U) Ltd Page xix IWMDP-MoWE

Pangira Solar Water Supply and Sanitation Project